Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

11th Bio Botany Guide Plant Growth and Development Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I.

Question 1.
Select the wrong statement from the following:
(a) Formative phase of the cells retain the capability of cell division.
(b) In elongation phase development of central vacuole takes place.
(c) In maturation phase thickening and differentiation takes place.
(d) In maturation phase, the cells grow further.
Answer:
(d) In maturation phase, the cells grow further.

Question 2.
If the diameter of the pulley is 6 inches, length of pointer is 10 inches and distance travelled by pointer is 5 inches. Calculate the actual growth in length of plant.
a) 3 inches
b) 6 inches
c) 12 inches
d) 30 inches
Answer:
options are wrong, (correct Ans = 1.5 inches)
Solution:
Step I:
Diameter of the Pulley=6 inches
Radius of the pulley \(=\frac{6}{2}\)= 3 inches
Actual growth in length= Distance travailed by pointer x Radius of the pulley Length of the pointer
=\(\frac{5 \times 3}{10}\) =1.5=1.5.
Answer:
1.5 inches

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 3.
In unisexual plants, sex can changed by the application of
a) Ethanol
b) Cytokinins
c) ABA
d) Auxin
Answer:
c) ABA

Question 4.
Select the correctly matched one
A) Humanurine i) Auxin-B
B) Corn gram oil ii) GA3
C) Fungs iii) Abscisic acid II
D) Herring fish sperm iv) Kinetin
E) Unripcrnaizegrains v) AuxinA
F) Young cotton boils vi) Zeatin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 1
Answer:
b) A – v, B – i, C – ii, D – iv, E – vi, F – iii

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 5.
Seed dormancy allows the plants to:
(a) overcome unfavorable climatic conditions
(b) develop healthy seeds
(c) reduce viability
(d) prevent deterioration of seeds
Answer:
(a) overcome unfavorable climatic conditions

Question 6.
What are the parameters used to measure growth of plants?
Answer:
Growth in plants can be measured in terms, of

  • Increase in length or girth (roots and stems)
  • Increase in fresh or dry weight
  • Increase in area or volume (fruits and leaves)
  • Increase in a number of cells produced.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 7.
What is plasticity?
Answer:
Plasticity refers to the environmental heterophylly seen in Butter cup plant (Ranunculus). In this aquatic plant, the leaves in the air is normal, where as the leaves submerged underwater are highly thin and hairy highly adapted to do carbon assimilation Developmental heterophlly seen in the juvenile plant leaves of cotton and corianter. Where the young leaves have a different shape from the mature leaves is not considered as plasticity.

Question 8.
Write the physiological effects of Cytokinins.
Answer:

  1. Cytokinin promotes cell division in the presence of auxin (IAA).
  2. Induces cell enlargement associated with IAA and gibberellins
  3. Cytokinin can break the dormancy of certain light-sensitive seeds like tobacco and induces seed germination.
  4. Cytokinin promotes the growth of lateral bud in the presence of apical bud.
  5. Application of cytokinin delays the process of aging by nutrient mobilization. It is known as the Richmond Lang effect.
  6. Cytokinin:
    • increases rate protein synthesis
    • induces the formation of inter-fascicular cambium
    • overcomes apical dominance
    • induces the formation of new leaves, chloroplast and lateral shoots.
  7. Plants accumulate solutes very actively with the help of cytokinins.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 9.
Describe the mechanism of photoperiodic induction of flowering.
Answer:
Mechanism of photoperiodic induction of flowering.

  • The physiological change on flowering due to the relative length of light and darkness (photoperiod) is called Photoperiodism.
  • The photoperiod required to induce flowering is called critical day length. Eg. 12 hours in Maryland Mammoth’s Tobacco Xanthium 15.05 hours.

Photoperiodic induction:

  • An appropriate photoperiod in 24 hours cycle constitutes one inductive cycle. Plants may require one or more inductive cycles for flowering.
  • The phenomenon of conversion of leaf primordia into flower primordia under the influence of suitable inductive cycles is called photoperiodic induction. Example: Xanthium (SDP) -1 inductive cycle and Plantago (LDP) -25 inductive cycles.

Site of photoconductive perception:

  • Leaves are the parts that receive photoperiodic stimulus (PPS), again it is only leaves that synthesize floral hormones and translocate them to the apical tip to promote flowering.
  • This can be demonstrated by experiments conducted in the Cocklebur plant. Which is an SD plant. The nature of flower-producing stimulus has been elusive so far. It is believed by physiologists that a hormone is responsible for it, Chailakyan (1936) named it as Florigen It is not possible to isolate it.
Procedure Observation Inference
1. Take potted plant A and defoliate the plant subject it to SD – a condition There is no induction of flowering No leaf to receive stimulus or induction of flowering
2.  Take potted plant B – and defoliate all, except one leaf subject it to SD – condition. There is the induction of flowering One leaf is enough to receive stimulus or induction of flowering.
3.  Take potted plant C – and defoliate it and subject it to LD condition There is no induction of flowering no leaf to receive stimulus or induction of flowering
4. Take potted plant D and subject all leaves to LD but one leaf to SD There is the induction of flowering One leaf is enough to receive an induction in the SD condition

Question 10.
Give a brief account of programmed cell death (PCD).
Answer:
Senescence is controlled by plants’ own genetic program and the death of the plant or plants part consequent to senescence is called Programmed Cell Death. In short senescence of an individual cell is called PCD. The proteolytic enzymes involving PCD in plants are phytases and in animals are caspases. The nutrients and other substrates from senescing cells and tissues are remobilized and reallocated to other parts of the plant that survives.

The protoplasts of developing xylem vessels and tracheids die and disappear at maturity to make them functionally efficient to conduct water for transport. In aquatic plants, aerenchyma is normally formed in different parts of the plant such as roots and stems which enclose large air spaces that are created through PCD. In the development of unisexual flowers, male and female flowers are present in earlier stages, but only one of these two completes its development while the other aborts through PCD.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 2

Part-II.

11th Bio Botany Guide Plant Growth and Development Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
The open form of the growth occurs in:
(a) leaves and flowers
(b) stem and root
(c) leaves and stem
(d) stem and flowers
Answer:
(b) stem and root

Question 2.
An example of a De-Differentiating cell is ………………
a) Tracheary element
b) shoot apex
c) Cork cambium
d) root apex
Answer:
c) Cork cambium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 3.
Primary growth of the plant is due to the activity of:
(a) phloem parenchyma
(b) phloem meristem
(c) vascular cambium
(d) apical meristem
Answer:
(d) apical meristem

Question 4
Choose the natural Auxin of the following
a) Anti Auxin
b) NAA
c) 2.4.D
d) IndoleAcetic Acid (IAA)
Answer:
d) Indole Acetic Acid (IAA)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 5.
Thickening and differentiation of cells take place during:
(a) elongation phase
(b) formative phase
(c) maturation phase
(d) flowering phase
Answer:
(c) maturation phase

Question 6.
The hormone present in Coconut milk is
a) Gibberellins
b) Ethylene
c) Cytokinin
d) Auxin
Answer:
c) Cytokinin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 7.
The total growth of the plant consists of four phases in the following order.
(a) Log phase, lag phase, decelerating phase and maturation phase
(b) Log phase, lag phase, maturation phase and decelerating phase
(c) Lag phase, log phase, maturation phase and decelerating phase
(d) Lag phase, log phase, decelerating phase and maturation phase
Answer:
(d) Lag phase, log phase, decelerating phase and maturation phase

Question 8.
Which of the following Phytóhormone does not occur naturally in plants?
a) 2. 4. D
b) GibberellicAcid
c) 6. Furfuryl amino purine
d) IAA
Answer:
a) 2.4.D

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 9.
Absence of light may lead to the yellowish color in plants and this is called:
(a) venation
(b) etiolation
(c) estivation
(d) vernation
Answer:
(b) etiolation

Question 10.
Apical dominance is caused when Auxin
a) Concentration is more than Cytokinins
b) Concentration is less than Cytokinins
c) and Cytokinin concentration are equal
d) and Cytokinin concentration are fluctuating
Answer:
a) Concentration is more than Cytokinins

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 11.
Indicate a plant growth regulator from the following:
(a) cytocin
(b) cytokinins
(c) acetic acid
(d) methylene
Answer:
(b) cytokinins

Question 12.
Which prevents premature fall of fruit?
a) NAA
b) Ethylene
c) GA3
d) Zeatin
Answer:
a) NAA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 13.
The activity of synergistic effect involves the activity of:
(a) auxin and gibberellins
(b) auxin and ethylene
(c) ABA and gibberellins
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(a) auxin and gibberellins

Question 14.
The term Auxin was coined by
a) Went
b) Darwin
c) Smith
d) Garner
Answer:
a) Went

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 15.
The term auxin was first coined by:
(a) Charles Darwin
(b) Kogl
(c) F.W. Went
(d) Smith
Answer:
(c) F.W. Went

Question 16.
The term Gibberellin was coined by
a) Went
b) Kurosawa
c) Skoog
d) Yabuta
Answer:
d) Yabuta

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 17.
Indicate a synthetic auxin.
(a) Indole Acetic Acid
(b) Phenyl Acetic Acid
(c) Indole Butyric Acid
(d) Naphthalene Acetic Acid
Answer:
(d) Naphthalene Acetic Acid

Question 18.
The mineral required for the synthesis of IAA is
a) Copper
b) Magnesium
c) Zinc
d) Boron
Answer:
c) Zinc

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 19.
Auxin stimulates:
(a) transpiration
(b) respiration
(c) flowering
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) respiration

Question 20.
The most widely occurring Cytokinin in plants is
a) ABA
b) NAA
c) TNT
d) IPA
Answer:
d) IPA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 21.
Who established the structure of gibberellic acid?
(a) Brain etal
(b) Kurosawa
(c) Cross et al
(d) Yabuta and Sumiki
Answer:
(c) Cross etal

Question 22.
The term Florigen was coined by
a) Maheswari
b) Chailakyan
c) R Gane
d) Richmond Lang
Answer:
b) Chailakyan

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 23.
Cytokinins inducing cell division was first demonstrated by:
(a) Haberlandt
(b) Charles Darwin
(c) Clarke
(d) Hubert
Answer:
(a) Haberlandt

Question 24.
Which of the following is a bioassay for Cytokinins?
a) Chlorophyll preservation test
b) Dwarf maize Assay
c) Seed germination Assay test
d) Neem cotyledon Assay
Answer:
d) Neem cotyledon Assay

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 25.
Indicate correct statements.
(i) Genes are intracellular factors for growth.
(ii) Temperature has no role in the growth of plant.
(iii) Oxygen has a vital role in the growth of plants.
(iv) CIN ratio of soil does not affect the growth of plant.
(a) (i) and (iv)
(b) (ii) and (iv)
(c) (i) and (iii)
(d) (ii) and (iii)
Answer:
(c) (i) and (iii)

Question 26.
Avena curvature test as a BioAssay for
a) Auxins
b) GA3
c) Cytokinin
d) Ethylene
Answer:
a) Auxins

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 27.
The stress phytohormones (Abscisic acid) was first isolated by:
(a) Linn et al
(b) Addicott et al
(c) Edward et al
(d) Stone and Black
Answer:
(b) Addicott et al

Question 28.
The Gibberellins have been commercially exploited for
a) increasing the size of grapefruits
b) inducing rooting in stem cuttings
c) breaking the dormancy in seeds
d) production of disease-resistant varieties
Answer:
c) breaking the dormancy in seeds

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 29.
Pick out the correct statement from the following:
(i) Abscisic acid is found abundantly inside the chloroplast of green cells.
(ii) ABA is a powerful growth promotor.
(iii) ABA is formed from the pentose phosphate pathway.
(iv) ABA has anti-auxin and anti-gibberellin properties.
(a) (i) and (iv)
(b) (i) and (ii)
(c) (ii) and (iii)
(d) (ii) and (iv)
Answer:
(a) (i) and (iv)

Question 30.
Biennials can be induced to flower in the first season itself by treatment with
a) Auxin
b) Kinetin
c) GA
d) ABA
Answer:
c) GA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 31.
Pea and barley are classified under:
(a) short-day plants
(b) short long day plants
(c) long day plants
(d) long short day plants
Answer:
(c) long day plants

Question 32.
Auxin a was isolated from human urine by
a) F.W. went
b) Charles Darwin
c) Kogl and Haugen Smith
d) Denny
Answer:
c) Kogl and Haugen smith

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 33.
Usually, Xanthiumpensylvanicum will flower under:
(a) long day condition
(b) short long day condition
(c) photo neutral condition
(d) short-day condition
Answer:
(d) short-day condition

Question 34.
The most widely occurring Cytokinin in plants is
a) Indole Acetic Acid (LAA)
b) Indole Butyric Acid (IBA)
c) Pentenyl Adenine (IPA)
d) Naphthalene  Acetic Acid (NAA)
Answer:
c) Pentenyl Adenine (IPA)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 35.
Who found out the phytochrome in plants?
(a) Butler et al
(b) Michell et al
(c) Boumick et al
(d) Gamers and Allard
Answer:
(a) Butler et al

Question 36.
Scientists, those who are connected with Ethylene
(I) Denny
(II) R. Gane
(III) Kurosawa
(IV) Cocken
Options:
a) (I) (II) & (III)
b) (II) (III) & (IV)
c) (I) (II) & (IV)
d) (I) (III) & (IV)
Answer:
c) (I)(II)& (IV)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 37.
Pick out the wrong statement from the following:
(a) Vernalization increases the cold resistance of plants
(b) It increases the resistance of plants to fungal disease
(c) Vemalizatiqn increase the vegetative period of the plant
(d) It accelerates the plant breeding
Answer:
(c) Vemalizatiqn increase the vegetative period of the plant

Question 38.
Day-neutral plants are
a) Sugarcane & Coleus
b) Bryophyllum& Night Jasmine
c) Wheat, rice & Oats.
d) Potato, Tomato & Cotton
Answer:
d) Potato, Tomato & Cotton

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 39.
In apple and plum, the method of breaking seed dormancy involves the process of:
(a) impaction
(b) Scarification
(c) exposing to red light
(d) Stratification
Answer:
(d) Stratification

Question 40.
Xanthium (Cocklebur) requires …………….. hours of light to induce flowering,
a) 12
b) 9
c) 15.05
d) 13.05
Answer:
c) 15.05

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 41.
The hormone that cannot be isolated
a) IAA
b) ABA
c) NAA
d) Florigen
Answer:
d) Florigen

Question 42.
The term Photoperiodism was coined by
a) Went
b) Butler
c) Gamer
d) Skoog
Answer:
c) Garner

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 43.
ABA acts as antagonistic to
a) Ethylene
b) Cytokinin
c) Gibberellic acid
d) IAA
Answer:
c) Gibberellic acid

Question 44.
If a short-day plant, flowering is induced by
a) Long nights
b) Photo periods less than 12 hrs
c) Photoperiods shorter than critical value and uninterrupted long night
d) Short photoperiods and interrupted long nights
Answer:
c) Photoperiods shorter than critical value and uninterrupted long night.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 45.
Phytochrome is
a) Reddish phytohormone
b) Bluish biliprotein pigment
c) Photoreceptor of apical bud
d) Unstable pigment molecule
Answer:
b) Bluish biliprotein pigment

Question 46.
The growth & ripening is induced by Ethylene in
a) Tropical fruits
b) Temperate fruits
c) Climacteric fruits
d) Nonclimacteric fruits
Answer:
c) Climacteric fruits

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 47.
The bioassay of ABA was done with
a) Rice
b) Wheat
c) Maize
d) Barley
Answer:
a) Rice

Question 48.
Four types of senescence were recognized by
a) Leopold
b) Gamer
c) Addicott
d) Cocken et al
Answer:
a) Leopold

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 49.
The final stage of senescence is
a) PCD
b) Scarification
c) Yellowing
d) Abscission
Answer:
d) Abscission

Question 50.
Match & Find out the Correct Answer

Column I Column II
1.  Yabuta&Sumiki a) Identified Ethylene
2.  Lethan & Miller b) Isolated Auxin from Human urine
3.  Cockenetal c) Isolated and identified Zeatin
4.  Kogi & Haugen Smith d) Isolated Gibberellin in Crystal form

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 3
Answer:
b) D C A B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 51.
Match the following and Find the Correct Answer

I. Auxin a) Bolting
II. ABA b) Induces Respiration
III. Gibberellin c) Cell division
IV. Ethylene d) Weedicide
V. Cytokinin e) Closure of stomata

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 4
Answer:
b) D E A B C

II. Assertion (A) & Reason (R)

Question 52.
a. Both A & R are true and ‘R’ is the correct explanation of A
b. Both A & R are true but ‘R’ is not the correct explanation of A
c. A is true but R is False
d. Both A and ‘R’ are False
Assertion (A): The shoot Apical meristems are the only source of Auxin synthesis
Reason (R): Dormancy of lateral buds over Apical buds is due to Auxin
Answer:
C. A is true but R is False

Question 53.
Assertion (A): Hormones are also called Growth regulator
Reason (R): Hormones promote or inhibit plant growth
Answer:
A. Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 54.
Assertion (A): In many land Mammoth flowering occurred at different times at different latitude
Reason (R): Many land Mammoth is a tobacco variety
Answer:
b. Both Assertion (A) and, Reason (R) are true and Reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion.

III. 2 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Define closed form of growth in plants.
Answer:
Leaves, flowers, and fruits are limited in growth or of determinate or closed-form growth.

Question 2.
Compare between Absolute and Relative growth rates
Answer:

Absolute growth Relative growth
An increase in the total growth of two organs measured and compared per unit time is called Absolute growth rate The growth of the given system per unit time expressed per unit initial parameter is called relative growth rate

Question 3.
Name the phases of growth in ‘S’ shaped growth curve.
Answer:

  • Lag phase
  • Log phase
  • Decelerating phase
  • Maturation phase

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 4.
Mention the phase of growth in plants
Answer:
I. Formative phase
II. Elongation phase
III. Maturation phase

Question 5.
Distinguish between absolute growth rate and relative growth, rate.
Answer:
Absolute growth rate:
An increase in total growth of two organs measured and compared per unit time is called absolute growth rate.

Relative growth rate:
The growth of the given system per unit time expressed per unit initial parameter is called relative growth rate.

Question 6.
What is the Grand period of growth
Answer:
The total period from initial to the final stage of growth is called Grand period of growth.
When plotted against time the growth curve is ‘S’ shaped, (sigma curve) it is also known as Grand Period curie consists of 4 phases

  1. Lag,
  2. Log,
  3. Decelerating,
  4. Maturation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 7.
What is meant by the dedifferentiation of plant cells?
Answer:
Differentiated cells, after multiplication again lose the ability to divide and mature to perform specific functions. This is called redifferentiation, eg: Secondary xylem and Secondary phloem.

Question 8.
Define Phytohormone.
Answer:
The chemical substances synthesized by plants and thus naturally occuring are known as Phytohormones. Eg. Auxin, Gibberellins.
Recently 2 groups – Brassinosteroids, Polyamines were also known to behave like hormones.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 9.
Mention any two synthetic auxins.
Answer:

  • 2, 4 – Dichloro Phenoxy Acetic Acid (2, 4 – D)
  • 2, 4, 5 – Trichloro Phenoxy Acetic Acid (2, 4, 5 – T)

Question 10.
State 3 characteristic features of phytohormones.
Answer:

  1. They are produced in root tips and stem tips and leaves (do not have specialized cells or organs for secretion)
  2. The transfer of hormones takes place through the conducting system (xylem and phloem)
  3. They are required in trace quantities
  4. They either promote, inhibit or modify growth.

Question 11.
Name the natural auxins present in plants.
Answer:

  • Indole Acetic Acid (IAA)
  • Indole Propionic Acid (IPA)
  • Indole Butyric Acid (IBA)
  • Phenyl Acetic Acid (PAA)

Question 12.
Give the historial significance of Agent Orange
Answer:

  • Mixture of two phenoxy herbicides – 2.4. D and 2.4.5 T together known as Agent orange.
  • This Agent orange, was used by USA in Vietnam war as chemical warfare weapon to defoliate forests in Vietnam.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 13.
Does the trimming of plants in gardens have any scientific explanation?
Answer:

  • Yes, trimming of plants removes apical buds and hence apical dominance is prevented the lateral buds sprout and give a beautiful bushy appearance and aesthetic value.
  • Also in tea estates, this trimming develops more lateral branches and more tea leaves thus it has commercial significance.

Question 14.
Where do you find cytokinin hormone in plants?
Answer:
The distribution of cytokinin in plants is not as wide as those of auxin and gibberellins but found mostly in roots. Cytokinins appear to be translocated through xylem.

Question 15.
What is bolting?
Answer:

  • When treated with Gibberellins the rose the plants (genetic dwarf) exhibit excessive internodal growth.
  • This sudden elongation of a stem followed by flowering is called bolting.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 16.
What is Richmond Lang effect?
Answer:
Application of Cytokinin delays the process of aging by nuitrient mobilization.

Question 17.
Why do you call Abscisic acid (ABA) as stress hormone?
Answer:
It inhibits the shoot growth and promotes growth of root system. This character protect the plants from water stress. Hence, ABA is called as stress hormone.

Question 18.
Define photoperiodism & Critical day length.
Answer:

  • The physiological change on flowering due to relative length of light and darkness (Photoperiod) is called
    Photoperiodism.
  • The photoperiod required to induce flowering is called critical day length Eg.
    • Mary land mammoth (tobacco variety) requires 12 hours of light.
    • Cocklebur required 15.05 hours of light.

Question 19.
Write down the importance of photoperiodism in plants.
Answer:

  • The knowledge of photoperiodism plays an important role in hybridisation experiments.
  • Photoperiodism is an excellent example of physiological pre-conditioning that is using an external factor to induce physiological changes in the plant.

Question 20.
What is the importance of photoperiodism?
Answer:

  • The knowledge of photoperiodism an important role in hybridization experiments.
  • It is an excellent example of physiological preconditioning that is using an external factor to induce physiological changes in the plant.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 21.
What is meant by Epigeal germination?
Answer:
During epigeal germination, cotyledons are pushed out of the soil. This happens due to the elongation of the hypocotyl.
Eg: Castor and Bean.

Question 22.
Define Vernalization.
Answer:

  • It is a process by which many annuals and biennials are induced to flower when subjected to low-temperature exposure.
  • T.d. Lysenko first used the term.

Question 23.
Define the term phytogerontology.
Answer:
The branch of botany which deals with ageing, abscission and senescence is called Phytogerontology.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 24.
Distinguish between Epigeal and Hypogeal germination.
Answer:

Epigeal Hypogeal
Cotyledons pussed out of the soil Cotyledons remain below the soil due to rapid elongation of epicotyls.
Happens due to the elongation of the hypocotyl Eg. Castor & Bean Eg. Maize

Question 25.
Define seed dormancy and what are its types.
Answer:
The condition of a seed when it fails to germinate even in suitable environmental condition is called seed dormancy.
There are two types
(I) Innate dormancy (II) Imposed dormancy.

Question 26.
What is Scarification?
Answer:

  • By mechanical and chemical treatments like cutting or chipping of hard tough sed coat and use of organic solvents to remove waxy or fatty compounds are called scarification.
  • It is a method of breaking dormancy of the seeds.

Question 27.
Distinguish between Re differentiation and Devernalization.
Answer:

Redifferentiation Devernalization
Differentiated cells after multiplication again lose the ability to divide and mature to perform specific functions, is called Re differentiation.
Eg. Sec.Xylem & Sec.
Phloem The reversal of the effect of vernalization is called Devemalization.

Question 28.
Define Senescence.
Answer:

  • Ageing or getting old is called senescence.
  • It refers to all collective, progressive and deteriorative processes which ultimately lead to complete loss of organization and function (Eg. leaves turn yellow and fall off from plant).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 29.
What is impaction in seed dormancy.
Answer:

  • In some seeds water and oxygen are unable to penetrate micropyle due to blockage by cork cells.
  • These seeds are shaken vigorously to remove the plug
  • The process of removing the plug or block is called impactation.

Question 30.
What is called stratification in seed dormancy?
Answer:

  • The break dormancy, some plant seeds have to be exposed to well aerated, moist conditions under low temperature (0°c to 10°c) for weeks to months.
  • This kind of seed dormancy breaking treatment is known as stratification.
  • The stratified soil layers should be given a low-temperature treatment for a certain period so as to induce germination.
  • Eg. the Seeds of Rosaceae plants Apple, Plum, Peach, etc.

Question 31.
What are the 4 types of Senescence?
Answer:
Leopold (1961) explained 4 types they are

  1. Overall senescence
  2. Top senescence
  3. Deciduous senescence
  4. Progressive senescence.

Question 32.
What is the Abscission layer or Abscission Zone?
Answer:
Abscission is marked internally at the place of petiole by a distance zone of few layers of thin-walled cells arranged transversely. This zone is called Abscission Zone, which leads to Abscission of the leaf.

Question 33.
The photoperiodic response will not be possible in a defoliated plant. Give scientific reasons.
Answer:
Yes, a defoliated plant will not respond to photoperiodic change because the hormonal substance responsible for flowering is present in the leaves of the plant.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 34.
What is gas chromatography?
Answer:

  • It is a bioassay technique by which Ethylene can be measured.
  • It helps in the detection of the exact amount of ethylene from different plant tissues like lemon and orange.

Question 35.
Give the occurrence and precursors of Gibberellins and Cytokinins.
Answer:

Character Gibberellins Cytokinin
Occurrence Produced by plant parts like an embryo, roots, and young leaves near the tip. Immature seeds are rich in Gibberellins. Formed in root apex shoot apex like Auxin. Also formed in buds & young fruits.
Precursor Formed by 5C precursor, Iso prenoidunit called Iso Pentenyl Pyrophosphate (IPP) through a number of intermediates primary precursor – Acetate. Derived from purine-Adenine.

IV. 3 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Explain Arithmetic growth rate and Geometric growth rate by diagrams.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 6

Question 2.
Explain stages in growth by drawing the sigmoid curve.
Answer:

  • The total period from the initial to the final stage of growth is called the Grand period of growth.
  • The graph that is drawn by taking time and rate of growth is ‘S’ shaped. It is known as a sigmoid curve.

It has 4 stages:

  1. Lag phase
  2. Log phase
  3. Decelerating phase
  4. Maturation phase

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 7

Question 3.
Mention the internal factors, that affect the growth of plants.
Answer:

  • Genes are intracellular factors for growth.
  • Phytohormones are intracellular factors for growth, eg: auxin, gibberellin, cytokinin.
  • C/N ratio.

Question 4.
Mention the Agricultural role of Auxin.
Answer:

  • Eradicate weeds: Eg. 2.4 D and 2.4.5.7
  • Formation of seedless fruits: (Parthenocarpic fruits) Eg. Synthetic Auxin.
  • Break dormancy.
  • Induction of flowering: In pineapple NAA induce flowering
  • Increase the number of female flowers: Eg. Cucurbita.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 5.
List out the agricultural applications of auxins.
Answer:

  • It is used to eradicate weeds, eg: 2,4 – D and 2,4,5 – T.
  • Synthetic auxins are used in the formation of seedless fruits (Parthenocarpic fruit).
  • It is used to break the dormancy in seeds.
  • Induce flowering in Pineapple by NAA & 2,4 – D.
  • Increase the number of female flowers and fruits in cucurbits.

Question 6.
What are the Precursors of Gibberellins?
Answer:

  • Gibberellins are chemically related to terpenoids (natural rubber, Carotenoids, and steroids) formed by 5-C precursors and an Isoprenoid unit called Iso Pentenyl Pyrophosphate (IPP) through a number of intermediates.
  • The primary precursors are Acetate.

Question 7.
What are the uses of ethylene in agriculture?
Answer:

  • Ethylene normally reduces flowering in plants except in Pineapple and Mango.
  • It increases the number of female flowers and decreases the number of male flowers.
  • Ethylene spray in the cucumber crop produces female flowers and increases the yield.

Question 8.
Explain the mechanism of Vernalization by Hypothesis of hormonal involvement.
Answer:
I. Vernalization: According to Purvis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 8

 

 

 

 

II. Devernalization
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 9

 

 

Question 9.
What are the practical applications of Vernalization?
Answer:

  • It shortens the vegetative period and induces the plant to flower earlier.
  • It increases the cold resistance of the plants.
  • It increases the resistance of plants to fungal disease.
  • Plant breeding can be accelerated.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 10.
What is meant by the viability of seeds?
Answer:

  • Viable means the living condition of the seed
  • The shelf life of the seed after which it cannot germinate is known as the viable period
  • It varies from plant to plant
Name of the plant Viability
1. Oxalis seeds Few days
2.  Lotus seeds More than 1000 years
3.  Judean Dale palm (Methuselah) More than 2000 years

Question 11.
Differentiate between climacteric and Non-climacteric fruits.
Answer:

Climacteric fruits Non-Climacteric fruits
1.There is a sharp rise in respiration rate near the end of the development of fruit.
2. The ripening on demand can be induced in these fruits by exposing them to normal air conditioning.
3. Epthan secrete Ethylene continuously about 1 ppm of ethylene Eg. Lemon, Apples, Banana, Mango
These fruits cannot be ripened by exposure to ethylene so-known as non-climacteric fruits.
Eg. Grapes, Watermelon orange.

Question 12.
Differentiate between scarification & Stratification in breaking seed dormacy
Answer:

Scarification Stratification
Mechanical and chemical treatment either by cutting, chipping or use of organic solvents to remove waxy or fatty compounds is called scarification. Rosaceous plants (Apple, Plum Peach, and Cherry) will not germinate until they have been exposed to well derated, moist conditions under low temperature (1°c to 10°c) for weeks to months and this treatment is known as stratification.

Question 13.
Mention the factors causing dormancy of seeds.
Answer:

  • Hard, tough seed coat causes barrier effect as impermeability of water, gas and restriction of the expansion of embryo prevents seed germination.
  • Many species of seeds produce imperfectly developed embryos called rudimentary embryos which promotes dormancy.
  • Lack of specific light requirement leads to seed dormancy.
  • A range of temperatures either higher or lower cause dormancy.
  • The presence of inhibitors like phenolic compounds which inhibits seed germination cause dormancy.

Question 14.
What are the factors that affect senescence?
Answer:

Name of the factor Effect of senescence
ABA & Ethylene Accelerates
Auxin & Cytokinin Nitrogen deficiency reduces increases
Nitrogen supply retards
High temperature in vernalized seeds Accelerates
Low temperature Retards
Water stress Accumulation of ABA leading to senescence

Question 15.
What are the morphological and Anatomical changes due to Abscission?
Answer:

  • Abscission Zone: formed at the base of petiole
  • Greenish grey in colour by rows of 2 to 15 cells thick primary wall and middle lamella
  • The dissolution of by pectinase & Cellulase
  • Formation tyloses – that block conduction of vessels
  • Degradation of chlorophyll – Colour of leaves changes and leaves fall off.
  • After Abscission – Suberization of outer layer of cells by the development of periderm.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 16.
Write down the significance of Abscission.
Answer:
1. Abscission separates dead parts of the plant like old leaves and ripe fruits.
2. Helps in dispersal of fruits and continuing the life cycle.
3. Abscission of leaves (in deciduous plants) helps in water conservation during summer.
4. Helps in vegetative propagation (Shedding of gemmae or plantlets) Eg. Bryophyta.

V. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Describe an experiment to measure the growth of a plant or By lever Auxanometer measure the rate of growth in stem tip.
Answer:
Experiment:
1. Arc auxanometer:
The increase in the length of the stem tip can easily by measured by an arc auxanometer. If consists of a small pulley to the axis of which is attached a long pointer sliding over a graduated arc. A thread one end of which is tied to the stem tip and another and to a weight passes over the pulley tightly. As soon as the stem tip increases in length, the pulley moves and the pointer slide over the graduated arc (Refer Figure) The reading is taken. The acutal increase in the lengthwm stem is then calculated by knowing the length of the pointer and the radius of the pulley. If the radius of the pulley is 4 inches and the length of pointer 20 inches the actual growth is measured as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 10

Actual growth in length\(=\frac{\text { Distance travelled by the pointer radius of the }}{\text { Length of the pointer }}\)
For example, actual growth in length \(=\frac{10 \times 4 \text { inches }}{20 \text { inches }}\) = 2 inches

Question 2.
Explain the physiological effect of Auxin? Add a note on its agricultural applications.
Answer:
Cell elongation:
Promotes cell elongation in stem & Coleoptile

Root growth:
At extremely low concentration – promote root growth, at high concentrations it inhibits elongation of roots, but induce more lateral roots

Apical dominance:
Suppression of growth of lateral buds – by apical bud is known as Apical dominance
Prevents Abscission

Secondary growth:
Promotion of cell division in the cambium, responsible for secondary growth this property is exploited in tissue culture. (Callus foundation)

Respiration Stimulates respiration Induces Vascular differentiation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 3.
Give the Agricultural application of Auxin.
Answer:
Weedicide
2.4.D & 2.4.5. T – Weedicides to remove weeds

Induce parthenocarpy
Synthetic auxins used to induce parthenocarpy (formation of seedless fruits).

Break dormancy
Used to break seed dormancy.

Induce flowering in Pineapple Eg. NAA & 2.4.D

Induce female flowers (numbers)
Eg. Cucumber.

Question 4.
Explain physiological effects of Gibberellins
Answer:

  • Induction of cell division & cell elongation – Extraordinary stem elongation.
  • Reversal of dwarfism & Bolting – Rosette (genetic dwarfism) plants when treated with Gibberellins exhibit excessive enter nodal growth – This sudden elongation of a stem followed by flowering is called Bolting.
  • Breaks dormancy – in Potato tubers.
  • Biennials flower in the 1 st year – Instead of cold exposure, if biennials treated with Gibberellins flower in the 1st year itself.

Question 5.
Write an essay on the role of ethylene on plant physiology and agriculture.
Answer:
Almost all plant tissues produce ethylene gas in minute quantities.
1. Discovery:
In 1924, Denny found that ethylene stimulates the ripening of lemons. In 1934, R. Gane found that ripe bananas contain abundant ethylene. In 1935, Cocken et al., identified ethylene as a natural plant hormone.

2. Occurrence:
Maximum synthesis occurs during climacteric ripening of fruits and tissues undergoing senescence. It is formed in almost all plant parts like roots, leaves, flowers, fruits and seeds.

3. Transport in plants:
Ethylene can easily diffuse inside the plant through intercellular spaces.

4. Precursor:
It is a derivative of amino acid methionine, linolenic acid and fumaric acid.

5. Bioassay (Gas Chromatography):
Ethylene can be measured by gas chromatography. This technique helps in the detection of exact amount of ethylene from different plant tissues like lemon and orange.

6. Physiological Effects:

  • Ethylene stimulates respiration and ripening in fruits.
  • It stimulates radial growth in sterft and roof and inhibits linear growth.
  • It breaks the dormancy of buds, seeds and storage organs.
  • It stimulates the formation of an abscission zone in leaves, flowers and fruits. This makes the leaves to shed prematurely.
  • Inhibition of stem elongation (shortening the internode).
  • In low concentration, ethylene helps in root initiation.
  • Growth of lateral roots and root hairs. This increases the absorption surface of the plant roots.
  • The growth of fruits is stimulated by ethylene in some plants. It is more marked in climacteric fruits.
  • Ethylene causes epinasty.

7. Agricultural role:

  • Ethylene normally reduces flowering in plants except in Pineapple and Mango.
  • It increases the number of female flowers and decreases the number of male flowers.
  • Ethylene spray in cucumber crops produces female flowers and increases the yield.

Question 6.
Explain the physiological Effects of Cytokinins.
Answer:

  • With IAA – Promotes cell division With IAA & GA – Induces cell enlargement
  • Breaks dormancy of light-sensitive seeds (tobacco) induces seed germination.
  • Promotes growth of lateral
  • buds even in the presence of apical bud.
  • Delays the process of aging by nutrient mobilization known as Richmond Lang effect.
  • Induces rate of protein synthesis.
  • Induces the formation of interfascicular cambium Overcomes apical dominance
  • Induces the formation of new leaves chloroplast and lateral shoots.
  • Induces Accumulation of solutes.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 7.
Write down the physiological effects of Ethylene
Answer:

  • Stimulates respiration and thereby ripening of fruits
  • Stimulates radial growth in stem and root and inhibits linear growth.
  • breaks dormancy of
    1. buds
    2. Seeds
    3. Storage Organs
  • Stimulates abscission 2 one formation in
    1. leaves
    2. flowers
    3. fruits (so leaves shed prematurely)
  • Prevents stem elongation by preventing internodal growth
  • Root growth in low concentration
  • Stimulates growth of lateral roots and root hairs and increase the absorptive surface
  • Ripening of fruits – Increases ripening in climacteric fruits (Mango, banana) etc.
  • It causes epinasty

Question 8.
Describe the methods of breaking the dormancy of seeds in plants.
Answer:
The dormancy of seeds can be broken by different methods. These are:
1. Scarification:
Mechanical and chemical treatments like cutting or chipping of hard tough seed coat and use of organic solvents to remove waxy or fatty compounds are called Scarification.

2. impaction:
in some seeds, water and oxygen are unable to penetrate micropyle due to blockage by cork cells. These seeds are shaken vigorously to remove the plug which is called Impaction.

3. Stratification:
Seeds of rosaceous plants (Apple, Plum, Peach, and Cherry) will not germinate until they have been exposed to well aerated, moist conditions under low temperature (0°C to 10°C) for weeks to months. Such treatment is called Stratification.

4. Alternating temperatures: Germination of some seeds is strongly promoted by alternating daily temperatures. An alternation of low and high temperature improves the germination of seeds.

5. Light:
The dormancy of photoelastic seeds can be broken by exposing them to red light.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 9.
Define photoperiodism – Classify plants based on photoperiodism
Answer:
a. The physiological change on flowering due to the relative length of light and darkness is called photoperiodism.

  • Gamer and Allard (1920) coined the term
  • They studied photoperiodism in Biloxi variety of soybean (Glycine max) and Many land mammoth varieties of tobacco.

b. Depending on photoperiodic responses plants are classified into several types.
1. L.D. Plants (Long Day) The photoperiod required to induce flowering is called critical day length depending on critical day length if it is long (more than 12 hours) and with short nights. Eg. Pea Barley and Oats
Short LD Plants: These are Long day plants but need short day length during the early period of growth for flowering Eg. Wheat, Rye

2. SD Plants: Plants requiring short critical day length for flowering or a long night.
Eg. Tobacco, Cocklebur, Soya, Rice, and Chrysanthemum.
Long SD Plants: Actually SD plants but need long days during the early period of growth for flowering Eg. Some SPS of Bryophyllum & Night Jasmine.

3. Intermediate day plants:
These require a photoperiod between a long day and a short day for flowering Eg. Sugarcane and coleus.

4. Day Neutral plants:
There are a number of plants which can flower in all possible photoperiods, known as photo neutral or hiterterminate plants. Eg. Potato, Rhododendron, Tomato & Cotton.

Question 10.
Describe the role of phytochrome in inducing Flowering
Answer:
Definition:
It is a bluish biliprotein responsible for the perception of light in the photophysiological process, existing in two different forms is mainly involved in flower induction, (i.e) Pr and PFr.

  • Butler et al(1959) named the pigment.
  • It exists in two interconvertible forms
Pr PFr
1. red light absorbing form
2. Absorbs red lgiht of wavelength 660 nm
3. Biologically inactive form & stable found in the diffused state in cytoplasm
4. Promotes flowering in SD plants and inhibits flowering LD plants.
1. Far-red light absorbing form
2. Absorbs far-red light of wavelength 730 nm
3. Biologically active and it is unstable Associated with a hydrophobic area of the membrane system
4. Promotes flowering in LD plants and inhibit flowering in SD plants.

Mechanism:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 14
Other functions:
Play a role in seed germination and changes in membrane conformation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 11.
Write an Essay on Vernalization
Answer:
Definition:

  • Many biennials and perennials are induced to flower by low-temperature exposure (O°c to 5°c) This process is called Vernalization.
  • T.D. Lysenko – Coined the term.

Mechanism of Vernalization:
2 theories explain the mechanism of vernalization.

1. Hypothesis of Phasic development (T.D. Lysenko),
The development of the annual plant has 2 phases.

  1. Thermostate-Vegetatine stage requiring low temperature and suitable moisture.
  2. Photo stage -high temperature needs to synthesize florigen.

2. Hypothesis of hormonal involvement (Purvis 1961)

Vernalization has several steps
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 15

The technique of Vernalization:

  • Seeds soaked in water
  • Allowed to germinate at 10°C to 12°C
  • Transferred to low temperature for few days to 30 days (3°C to 5°C).
  • Germinated seeds after the low temp, treatment are allowed to dry & then sown.
  • Quickened flowering than untreated (control seedling)

Devernalization:
The reversal of the effect of vernalization is called Devemalization.

  • Practical Applications:
  • Vernalization shortens the vegetative period and induces the plant to flower earlier
  • It increases cold resistance
  • It increases fungal resistance
  • It accelerates Plant Breeding.

Question 12.
Define Senescence and give its types
Answer:
Definition:
Getting old or Ageing is call d senescence in plants.
It refers to all collective, progressive, and deteriorative processes which ultimately lead to complete loss of organization and function.
Types – 4 types (Leopold -1961)

  1. Overall senescence: When the entire plant gets affected and dies – Eg. Annuals – Wheat & Soybeans, Perennials – Agave & Bamboo
  2. Top senescence: Occur in aerial parts only Eg. Parrennials – Banana and Gladiolus
  3. Deciduous senescence: Occur only in leaves Eg. Decidual plants – Elm and Maple
  4. Progressive Senescence: Occur in Annuals occur in old leaves first followed by new leaves than stem and finally root system.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 13.
Explain the physiology of senescence and Factors affecting senescence Physiology of Senescence :
Answer:

  • Change in the structure of cells
  • Vacuoles act like lysosome-secrete hydrolytic enzymes.
  • Reducation in photosynthetic rate (due to loss of chlorophyll & accumulation of anthocyanin)
  • The decrease in Starch content,  Protein content
  • Decrease in …………. r RNA level due to increased activity of enzyme RNA ase
  • Degeneration of DNA – by increased activity of enzyme DNA ase

Factors affecting senescence :

Name of the factor Effect of senescence
ABA & Ethylene Accelerates
Auxin & Cytokinin Nitrogen deficiency reduces increases
Nitrogen supply retards
High temperature in vernalized seeds Accelerates
Low temperature Retards
Water stress Accumulation of ABA leading to senescence

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 14 Respiration Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 14 Respiration

11th Bio Botany Guide Respiration Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part-I.

Question 1.
The number of ATP molecules formed by complete oxidation of one molecule of pyruvic acid is:
(a) 12
(b) 13
(c) 14
(d) 15
Answer:
(a) 12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 2.
During oxidation of two molecules of cytosolic NADH + H+, number of ATP molecules produced in plants are
a) 3
b) 4
c) 6
d) 8
Answer:
b) 4

Question 3.
The compound which links glycolysis and Krebs cycle is:
(a) succinic acid
(b) pyruvic acid
(c) acetyl CoA
(d) citric acid
Answer:
(c) acetyl CoA

Question 4.
Assertion (A): Oxidative phosphorylation takes place during the electron transport chain in mitochondria.
Reason (R): Succinyl Co A is phosphorylated into succinic acid by substrate phosphorylation.
a) A and R is correct. R is correct explanation of A
b) A and R is correct but R is not the correct explanation of A,
c) A is correct but R is wrong
d) A and R is wrong
Answer:
c) A is correct but R is wrong

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 5.
Which of the following reaction is not involved in Krebs cycle.
(a) Shifting of phosphate from 3C to 2C
(b) Splitting of Fructose 1,6 bisphosphate of into two molecules 3C compounds.
(c) Dephosphorylation from the substrates
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 6.
What are enzymes involved in phosphorylation and dephosphorylation reactions in EMP pathway?
Answer:
(i) Enzymes involved in phosphorylation are
a) Hexokinase and phospnofructio kinase.
(ii) Enzymes involved in dephosphorylation are
a) Phosphoglycerate Kinase
b) Pyruvate Kinase

Question 7.
The respiratory quotient is zero in succulent plants. Why?
Answer:
In some succulent plants like Opuntia, Bryophyllum carbohydrates are partially oxidised to organic acid, particularly malic acid without the corresponding release of CO2 but O2 is consumed hence the RQ value will be zero.

Question 8.
Explain the reactions taking place in mitochondrial inner membrane.
Answer:
Electron and hydrogen (proton) transport takes place across four multiprotein complexes (I-IV). They are.
1. Complex-I (NADH dehydrogenase).
It contains a flavoprotein (FMN) and associated with non-heme iron Sulphur protein (Fe-S). This complex is responsible for passing electrons and protons from mitochondrial NADFI (Internal) to Ubiquinone (UQ)
NADH+H+UQ ⇌ NAD+UQH2

2. In plants, an additional NADH dehydrogenase (External) complex is present on the outer surface of inner membrane of mitochondria which can oxidise cytosolic NADH + H+.
Ubiquinone (UQ) or Coenzyme Quinone (CoQ) is a small, lipid-soluble electron, proton carrier located within the inner membrane of mitochondria).

3. Complex-II (succinic dehydrogenase) It contains FAD flavoprotein is associated with non-heme iron Sulphur (Fe-S) protein. This complex receives electrons and protons from succinate in Kerbs cycle and is converted into fumarate and passes to ubiquinone.
Succinate + UQ Fumaraic LQH2

4. Complex-III (Cytochrome bcj complex) This complex oxidises reduced ubiquinone (ubiquinol) and transfers the electrons through Cytochrome bc1 Complex (Iron Sulphur centci bcl complex) to cytochrome c.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 1

5. Complex IV (Cytochrome c oxidase) Complex IV is the terminal oxidase and brings about the reduction of 1/2 O2 to H2O. TWO protons are needed to form a molecule of H2O (terminal oxidation).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 9.
What is the name of alternate way to glucose breakdown? Explain the process in involved in it?
Answer:

  • Pentose phosphate pathway is the alternate pathway for breakdown of glucose.
  • Pentose phosphate pathway was described by Warburg, Dickens and Lipmami (1938).
  • It is also known as Hexose monophosphate shunt (HMP shunt) or Direct oxidative phase and non – oxidative phase.
  • The oxidative phase convert six molecules of six carbon Glucose 6 phosphate to 6 molecules of five-carbon sugar Ribulose – 5 Phosphate with loss of 6CO2 and generation of 12 NADPH + H+

Non oxidative pathway convert Ribulose – 5 – phosphate molecules to various intermediates such as
Ribose – 5 – phosphate (5C)
Xylulose – 5 – phosphate (5C)
Glyceraldehyde – 3 – phosphate (3C)
Sedoheptulose – 7 – phosphate (7C) and
Erythrose – 4 – phosphate (4C)

Finally five molecules of glucose 6 – phosphate is regenerated
6 x Glucose – 6 – phosphate + 12NADP+ + 6H2O

5 x glucose – 6 – phosphate + 6CO2 + Pi + 12 NADPH + 2H+
The net result of complete oxidation of one glucose – 6 – phosphate yield 6CO2 and 12 NADPH + H+. The oxidative pentose phosphate pathway is controlled by glucose – 6 – phosphate dehydrogenase enzyme which is inhibited by high ratio of NADPH to NADP+.

Question 10.
How will you calculate net products of one sucrose molecule upon complete oxidation during aerobic respiration as per recent view?
Answer:
When the cost of transport of ATPs from the matrix into the cytosol is considered, the number will be 2.5 ATPs for each NADH + H+ and 1.5 ATPs for each FADH2 oxidized during the electron transport system. Therefore, in plant cells net yield of 30 ATP molecules for complete aerobic oxidation of one molecule of glucose. But in those animal cells (showing malate shuttle mechanism) net yield will be 32 ATP molecules. Since the sucrose molecule gives, two molecules of glucose and net ATP in plant cell will be 30 × 2 = 60.
In an animal cell, it will be 32 × 2 = 64.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Part-II.

11th Bio Botany Guide Respiration Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
The term respiration was coined by:
(a) Lamark
(b) Kerb
(c) Pepys
(d) Blackman
Answer:
(c) Pepys

Question 2.
Black man divided respiration into floating respiration and protoplasmic respiration based on respiratory ………..
a) Quotient
b) respiratory reaction
c) respiratory pathway
d) substrate
Answer:
d) substrate

Question 3.
The discovery of ATP was made by:
(a) Lipman
(b) Hans Adolt
(c) Warburg
(d) Karl Lohman
Answer:
(d) Karl Lohman

Question 4.
The type of respiration which is rare and liberates toxic ammonia
a) Protoplasmic respiration
b) floating respiration
c) Aerobic respiration
d) Anaerobic respiration
Answer:
a) Protoplasmic respiration

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 5.
On hydrolysis, one molecule of ATP releases energy of:
(a) 8.2 Kcal
(b) 32.3 kJ
(c) 7.3 Kcal
(d) 7.8 Kcal
Answer:
(c) 7.3 Kcal

Question 6.
To convert Kcal to KJ multiply by 4.18(100 Kcal=418 KJ) calculate the amount KJ energy for 7.3 Kcal
a) 30.6 KJ
b) 32.06 KJ
c) 29.03 KJ
d) 5.01 KJ
Answer:
a) 30.6 KJ

Question 7.
Identify the link reaction:
(a) conversion of glucose into pyruvic acid
(b) conversion of glucose into ethanol
(c) conversion of acetyl CoA into CO2 and water
(d) conversion of pyruvic acid into acetyl coenzyme – A
Answer:
(d) conversion of pyruvic acid into acetyl coenzyme – A

Question 8.
Food materials like carbohydrate, fat and proteins are completely oxidised into CO2, H2O and energy in ………………. respiration
a) anaerobic
b) aerobic
c) Bacterial respiration
d) Facultative
Answer:
b) aerobic

Question 9.
Kreb’s cycle is a:
(a) catabolic pathway
(b) anabolic pathway
(c) amphibolic pathway
(d) hydrolytic pathway
Answer:
(c) amphibolic pathway

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 10.
Which process is occur in yeast and some bacteria and 2 ATP molecules are produced during this process.
a) Anaerobic respiration
b) aerobic respiration
c) mixed fermentation
d) CAC cycle
Answer:
a) Anaerobic respiration

Question 11.
The oxidation of one molecule of NADH + H+ gives rise to:
(a) 2 ATP
(b) 3 ATP
(c) 4 ATP
(d) 2.5 ATP
Answer:
(b) 3 ATP

Question 12.
Net product in Glycolysis are
a) 4ATP and 2NADH + H+
b) 2 ATP and 2NADH + H+
c) 6ATP
d) 24 ATP
Answer:
b) 2ATP and 2NADH + H+

Question 13.
Cyanide acts as electron transport chain inhibitor by preventing:
(a) synthesis of ATP from ADP
(b) flow of electrons from NADH + H+
(c) flow of electrons from cytochrome a3 to O2
(d) oxidative phosphorylation
Answer:
(c) flow of electrons from cytochrome a3 to O2

Question 14.
Which is the raw material for the formation of chlorophylls, cytochrome, phytochrome and pyrrole substance
a) acetyl COA
b) Pyruvic acid
c) Malic acid
d) Succinyl COA
Answer:
d) Succinyl COA

Question 15.
End products of fermentation in yeast is:
(a) pyruvic acid and CO2
(b) lactic acid and CO2
(c) ethyl alcohol and CO2
(d) mixed acid and CO2
Answer:
(c) ethyl alcohol and CO2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 16.
Which cycle is considered as amphibolic pathway.
a) Calvin cycle
b) Glycolysic
c) ETS chain
d) Kreb cycle
Answer:
d) Kreb cycle

Question 17.
The external factors that affect respiration are:
(a) temperature, insufficient O2 and amount of protoplasm
(b) temperature, insufficient O2 and high concentration of CO2
(c) temperature, high concentration of CO2 and respiratory substrate
(d) temperature, high concentration of CO2 and amount of protoplasm
Answer:
(b) temperature, insufficient O2, and high concentration of CO2

Question 18.
The complex system responsible for passing electrons and protons from mitochondria to ubiquinone is ………………..
a) Complex I
b) Complex II
c) Complex III
d) Complex IV
Answer:
a) Complex I

Question 19.
The oxidative pentose phosphate pathway is controlled by the enzyme:
(a) glucose, 1, 6 diphosphate dehydrogenase
(b) glucose 6 phosphate dehydrogenase
(c) fructose – 6 – phosphate dehydrogenase
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) glucose 6 phosphate dehydrogenase

Question 20.
Which are the high energy phosphate groups in ATP
a) adenine
b) Pentose sugar
c) Last two phosphate group
d) First two phosphate group
Answer:
c) Last two phosphate group

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 21.
In-plant tissue erythrose is used for the synthesis of:
(a) Erythromycin
(b) Xanthophyll
(c) Erythrocin
(d) Anthocyanin
Answer:
(d) Anthocyanin

Question 22.
How many ATP molecules are produced when a molecule of glucose undergo fermentation?
a) TwoATPs
b) Six ATPs
c) Eight ATPs
d) one ATP
Answer:
a) Two ATPs

Question 23.
Identify the electron transport inhibitor:
(a) phosphoenol
(b) dinitrophenol
(c) xylene
(d) indol acetic acid
Answer:
(b) dinitrophenol

Question 24.
Enzymatic reaction for partial oxidation of glucose in the absence of oxygen is present in
a) Some Bacteria
b) Yeast fungus
c) A and B
d) Bryophytes
Answer:
c) A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 25.
Cyanide resistant respiration is known to generate heat in thermogenic tissues as high as:
(a) 35° C
(b) 38° C
(c) 40° C
(d) 51° C
Answer:
(d) 51° C

Question 26.
Match the Column I with the enzyme responsible for its production in column II
Answer:

Column I Column II
A. Citric acid 1. Hexose Kinase
B. Glucose 6-Phosphate 2. Lactate dehydrogenase
C. Lactic acid 3. Pyruvate dehydrogenase
D. Acetvl CO.A 4. Citric acid Synthetase

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 3

Answer:
a) A-4,B -1,C-2,D-3.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 27.
Which one is wrongly matched

Column I Column II
A. NADH +H+ Three ATP
B. Glycolysis Twenty four ATP
C. FAD Two ATP
D. Cytoplasmic NADH+H+ Two ATP

Answer:
B. Glycolysis – Twenty four ATP

II. 2 Marks Questions

Question 1.
Define respiration?
Answer:
Respiration is a biological process in which oxidation of various food substances like carbohydrates, proteins, and fats take place and as a result of this, energy is produced where O2 is taken in and CO2 is liberated.

Question 2.
Name some High energy compounds present in a cell
Answer:

  • ATP → Adenosine Tri Phosphate
  • GTP → Guanosine Tri Phosphate
  • UTP → Uridine Tri Phosphate

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 3.
What do you understand by compensation of point?
Answer:
The point at which CO2 released in respiration is exactly compensated by CO2 fixed in photosynthesis that means no net gaseous exchange takes place, it is called the compensation point.

Question 4.
What is Anaerobic respiration? What are its steps?
Answer:

  • In the absence of molecular oxygen-glucose is incompletely degraded into either ethyl alcohol (or) Lactic acid.
  • It includes two steps (i) Glycolysis (ii) Fermentation

Question 5.
What is anaerobic respiration?
Answer:
In the absence of molecular oxygen-glucose is incompletely degraded into either ethyl alcohol or lactic acid. It includes two steps:

  1. Glycolysis
  2. Fermentation

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 6.
What is Link reaction?
Answer:
In aerobic respiration, Conversion of Pyruvic acid into acetyl coenzyme – A in the mitochondrial matrix with two molecules of NADH + H+ and 2 CO2. This is called Link reaction (or) transition reaction.

Question 7.
Who is Sir Hans Adolf Krebs?
Answer:
Sir Hans Adolf Krebs was born in Germany on 25th August 1900. He was awarded Nobel Prize for his discovery of Citric acid cycle in Physiology in 1953.

Question 8.
Why Kreb cycle is called as citric acid cycle (or) Tri Carboxylic acid Cycle?
Answer:

  • TCA cycle starts with condensation of acetyl COA with oxaloacetate in the presence of water to yield Citri acid (or) Citrate.
  • So it is also known as citric acid cycle (or) Tricarboxylic acid cycle.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 9.
Mention the role of NADH dehydrogenase enzyme in the electron transport system.
Answer:
NADH dehydrogenase contains a flavoprotein (FMN) and associated with non – heme iron Sulphur protein (Fe – S). This complex is responsible for passing electrons and protons from mitochondrial NADH (Internal) to Ubiquinone (UQ).

Question 10.
Which cycle is amphibolic pathway? Why? The Krebs cycle is called an amphibolic pathway.
Answer:

  • Kreb cycle is primarily a catabolic pathway Later it is an anabolic pathway too.
  • Hence it is called amphibolic pathway.

Question 11.
Mention any two electron transport chain inhibitors.
Answer:
Two electron transport chain inhibitors:

  1. 2, 4 DNP (Dinitrophenol) – It prevents synthesis of ATP from ADP, as it directs electrons from Co Q to O2.
  2. Cyanide – It prevents flow of electrons from Cytochrome a3 to O2.

Question 12.
How many ATP molecules are produced in aerobic respiration present in plants?
Answer:
In aerobic respiration net gain of 36 ATP molecules produced in complete oxidation of glucose.

Question 13.
What are the significances of Respiratory Quotient?
Answer:
The significances of Respiratory Quotient:

  1. RQ value indicates which type of respiration occurs in living cells, either aerobic or anaerobic.
  2. It also helps to know which type of respiratory substrate is involved.

Question 14.
Who was awarded the Nobel Prize for coupling of oxidation and phosphorylation in mitochondria?
Answer:
Peter Mitchell, a British Biochemist received Nobel Prize for chemistry in 1978.

Question 15.
Mention any two industrial uses of alcoholic fermentation.
Answer:
Two industrial uses of alcoholic fermentation:

  1. In bakeries, it is used for preparing bread, cakes, biscuits.
  2. In beverage industries for preparing wine and alcoholic drinks.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 16.
Define mixed acid fermentation.
Answer:

  • Formation of Lactic acid, ethanol, formic acid and gases like CO2 and H2 from pyruvic acid.
  • eg. Enterobacteriaceae.

Question 17.
Mention any two internal factors, that affect the rate of respiration in plants.
Answer:
Two internal factors, that affect the rate of respiration in plants:

  1. The amount of protoplasm and its state of activity influence the rate of respiration.
  2. The concentration of respiratory substrate is proportional to the rate of respiration.

Question 18.
Why microorganisms respire an anaerobically?
Answer:

  • Bacteria are prokaryotes and they are devoid of membrane-bound organelle mitochondria.
  • So they are respire anaerobically.

Question 19.
Write down any two significance of the pentose phosphate pathway.
Answer:
Two significance of pentose phosphate pathway:

  1. HMP shunt is associated with the generation of two important products.
  2. Coenzyme NADPH generated is used for reductive biosynthesis and counter damaging the effects of oxygen-free radicals.

Question 20.
Complete the following Picture.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 4
Answer:
A. Compensation point
B. Rate of Respiration

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 21.
Write the missing A and B.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 5
Answer:
A. Ribose
B. Adenine

III. 3 Mark Questions

Question 1.
In the biosphere how do plants and animals are complementary systems, which are integrated to sustain life?
Answer:
In plants, oxygen enters through the stomata and it is transported to cells, where oxygen is utilized for energy production. Plants require carbon dioxide to survive, to produce carbohydrates, and to release oxygen through photosynthesis, these oxygen molecules are inhaled by humans through the nose, which reaches the lungs where oxygen is transported through the blood and it reaches cells. Cellular respiration takes place inside or the cell for obtaining energy.

Question 2.
What is Respiration?
Answer:

  • Breaking of C-C bonds of complex organic compounds through oxidation within the cells.
  • The energy released during respiration is stored in the form of ATP and heat is liberated.
  • It occurs in all the living cells of organisms.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 3.
What are the factors associated with the compensation point in respiration?
Answer:
The two common factors associated with compensation points are CO2 and light. Based on this there are two types of compensation points. They are the CO2 compensation point and light compensation point. C3 plants have compensation points ranging from 40 – 60 ppm (parts per million) CO2 while those of C4 plants range from 1 – 5 ppm CO2.

Question 4.
Differentiate floating respiration and protoplasmic respiration.
Answer:

Floating respiration Protoplasmic respiration
Carbohydrate (or) fat (or) organic acid serves as a respiratory substrate Whereas protein is a respiratory substrate.
It is a common mode of respiration and does not produce any toxic product. It is rare and liberates toxic ammonia.

Question 5.
What is a redox reaction?
Answer:
NAD+ + 2e + 2H+ → NADH + H+
FAD + 2e + 2H+ → FADH2
When NAD+ (Nicotinamide Adenine Dinucleotide – oxidized form) and FAD (Flavin Adenine Dinucleotide) pick up electrons and one or two hydrogen ions (protons), they get reduced to NADH + H+ and FADH2 respectively. When they drop electrons and hydrogen off they go back to their original form. The reaction in which NAD+ and FAD gain (reduction) or lose (oxidation) electrons are called redox reactions (Oxidation-reduction reactions). These reactions are important in cellular respiration.

Question 6.
Define ETS (or) Electron transport chain (or) What is the importance of ETS and oxidative Phosphorylation in respiration.
Answer:

  • Electron transport chain and oxidative phosphorylation remove hydrogen atoms from the products of glycolysis, link reaction, and Kreb cycle.
  • It releases water molecule with energy in the form of ATP molecules in the mitochondrial inner membrane.

Question 7.
Mention the significance of Kreb’s cycle.
Answer:
The significance of Kreb’s cycle:

  1. TCA cycle is to provide energy in the form of ATP for metabolism in plants.
  2. It provides carbon skeleton or raw material for various anabolic processes.
  3. Many intermediates of the TCA cycle are further metabolised to produce amino acids, proteins, and nucleic acids.
  4. Succinyl CoA is the raw material for the formation of chlorophylls, cytochrome, phytochrome, and other pyrrole substances.
  5. α – ketoglutarate and oxaloacetate undergo reductive amination and produce amino acids.
  6. It acts as a metabolic sink which plays a central role in intermediary metabolism.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 8.
Write the differences between ubiquinone and Cytochrome C.
Answer:

Ubiquinone Cytochrome C
It is a small, lipid-soluble electron, proton carrier located within the inner membrane of mitochondria. It is a small protein attached to the outer surface of inner membrane of mitochondria
It is associated with ETS – complex I It is associated with ETS – complex IIII

Question 9.
Write down the characteristic of Anaerobic respiration.
Answer:
The characteristic of Anaerobic respiration:

  1. Anaerobic respiration is less efficient than aerobic respiration.
  2. A limited number of ATP molecules is generated per glucose molecule.
  3. It is characterized by the production of CO2 and is used for Carbon fixation in photosynthesis.

Question 10.
RQ will be less than one in Red colour Parts Present in Plants? Why?
Answer:

  • Red colour parts present in plants is due to the presence of anthocyanin
  • Synthesis of anthocyanin require more O2 than CO2 evolved.
  • So RQ will be less than one.

Question 11.
Write down any three external factors, that affect respiration in plants.
Answer:
Three external factors, that affect respiration in plants:

  1. The optimum temperature for respiration is 30°C. At low temperatures and very high temperatures rate of respiration decreases.
  2. When a sufficient amount of O2 is available the rate of aerobic respiration will be optimum and anaerobic respiration is completely stopped. This is called the Extinction point.
  3. The high concentration of CO2 reduces the rate of respiration.

Question 12.
Define Lactic acid fermentation.
Answer:
Formation of Lactic acid from pyruvic acid is Lactic acid fermentation.
Eg. Bacillus bacteria, fungi, muscles of vertebrates.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 13.
What is the Pentose phosphate pathway?
Answer:

  • It is an alternate pathway for break down of glucose.
  • It takes place in the cytoplasm of mature plant cells.
  • In this pathway glucose 6 phosphate molecule is converted to Ribulose 5 phosphate with CO2 and NADPH + H+.

Question 14.
How alcoholic beverages like beer and wine is made?
Answer:

  • The conversion of pyruvate to ethanol takes place in malted barley and grapes through fermentation.
  • Yeast Carryout this process under anaerobic conditions and this conversion increases ethanol concentration.
  • If the concentration increases It’s toxic effect kills yeast cells and the left out is called beer and wine respectively.

IV. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Ambulate the differences between aerobic and anaerobic respiration.
Answer:

Aerobic respiration Anaerobic respiration
1. It occurs in all living cells of higher organisms. It occurs yeast and some bacteria.
2. It requires oxygen for breaking the respiratory substrate Oxygen is not required for breaking the respiratory substrate.
3. The end products are CO2 and H2O The end products are alcohol and CO2 (or) lactic acid
4. Oxidation of one molecule of glucose produces 36 ATP molecules Only 2 ATP molecules are produced.
5. It consists of four stages – glycolysis, link reaction, TCA cycle and electron transport chain. It consists of two stages – glycolysis and fermentation.
6. It occurs in cytoplasm and mitochondria It occurs only in cytoplasm

Question 2.
Draw the flow chart diagram For Glycolysis (or) EMP pathway.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 7
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 3.
Explain the Pay – off phase of EMP Pathway of Glycolysis (or) Explain the oxidative phase of Glycolysis (or) Triose phase of Glycolysis.
Answer:

  • Two molecules of glyceraldehyde 3 – phosphate oxidatively phosphorylated into two molecules of 1-3
    bisphospho glycerate.
  • During this reaction 2 NAD+ is reduced to 2NADH+ H+ by glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate dehydrogenase.
  • Further reactions are carried out by different enzymes at the end two molecules of pyruvate are produced.
  • In this phase 4 ATPS are produced (at step 7 and step 10)
  • Through Direct transfer of phosphate from substrate molecule to ADP and is converted into ATP is called substrate Phosphotylation. (or) Direct Phosphorylation (or) transphosphorylation.
  • During the reaction (at step 9)2 phospo glycerate dehydrated into phosphoenol pyurvate, a water molecule is removed by the enzyme enolase.
  • As a result enol group is formed within the molecule. This process is called Enolation.

Energy Budge of pay off phase:

  • In the payoff phase totally 4 ATP and 2NADH + H+ molecules are produced.
  • Since 2 ATP molecules are already consumed in the preparatory phase the net products in glycolysis are 2ATP and 2NADH + H+

Question 4.
Explain the preparatory phase of Glycolysis (or) EMP pathway (or) Describe the energonic phase phase of Glycolysis (or) EMP pathway. Describe the hexose phase of Glycolysis (or) EMP pathway.
Answer:
Glycolysis is a linear series of reactions in which 6- carbon glucose split into two molecules of 3 carbon pyruvic acid.
Preparatory phase:

  • Glucose enters glycolysis which is the end product of photosynthesis.
  • Glucose is phosphorylated into glucose 6 phosphate by the enzyme hexokinase and subsequent reactions are carried out by different enzymes.
  • At the end of this phase fructose 1,6 – bisphote is cleaved into glyceraldehyde 3- phosphate and dihydroxyacetone phosphate by the enzyme aldolase.
  • These two are Isomers.
  • Dihydroxyacetone phosphate is isomerised into glyceraldehyde 3- phosphate by the enzyme triose phosphate isomerase.
  • Now two molecules of glyceraldehyde 3 phosphate enter into pay off phase.

During the preparatory phase, two ATP molecules are àonsumed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 9
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 5.
Explain pyruvate oxidation (or) Link reaction of Glycolysis.
Answer:

  • Two molecules of pyruvate formed by glycolysis in the cytosol enter into mitochondnalrnatrxi.
  • In aerobic respiration this pyruvate with coenzyme A is oxidatively decarboxylated into acetyl CoA by pyruvate dehydrogenase complex. .
  • It produces two molecules of NADH + H+ and 2CO2

It is also called transition reaction (or) Link reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 11
The pyruvate dehydrogenase complex consists of three distinct enzymes.

  1. Pyruvate dehydrogenase
  2. Dihydroiipoyil transacetylase
  3. Dihydrolipoyil dehydrogenase and 5 coenzymes TPP (thymine pyrophosphate)
    • NAD+
    • FAD
    • COA and lipoate.

Question 6.
Draw the flow chart diagram for the Kreb cycle (or) Citric acid cycle.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 12

Question 7.
Explain Kreb cycle (or) Citric acid cycle (or) TCA cycle.
Answer:

  • Two molecules of acetyl CoA formed from link reaction now enter into Kreb Cycle.
  • It is named after its discoverer German Biochemist Sir Hans Adolf Kreb (1937).
  • It is takes place in the mitochondrial matrix and inner membrane of mitochondria.
  • The enzymes needed for TCA cycle are found in the mitochondrial matrix except for succinate dehydrogenase which is found in the mitochondrial inner membrane.
  • First step starts with condensation of acetyl CoA with oxaloacetate in the presence of water to yield citric acid (or) citrate.
  • It is followed by the action of different enzymes in cyclic manner.
  • During the conversion of succinyl CoA to succinate by the enzyme succinyl CoA synthetase a molecule of ATP Synthesis from Substrate without entering the electron transport chain is called substrate-level phosphorylation.
  • Kreb Cycle is repeated twice for every glucose molecule.
  • Where two molecules of pyruvic acid produces six molecules of CO2, eight molecules of NADH+H+ two molecules of FADH2 and two molecules of ATP.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 8.
Significance of Kreb Cycle.
Answer:

  • TCA cycle is to provide energy in the form of ATP for metabolism in plants.
  • It provides carbon skeleton or raw material for various anabolic process.
  • many intermediates of TCA cycle are further metabolised to produce amino acids, proteins and nucleic acids.
  • Succinyl CoA is raw material for formation of chlorophyll, cytochrome, phytochrome and other pyrroles
    substances.
  • α – ketoglutarate and oxaloacetate undergo reductive amination and produce amino acids.
  • it acts as metabolic sink which plays a central role in intermediary metabolism.

Question 9.
Write four Electron transport chain in hibitors.
Answer:

  • 2,4 DNP (Dinitrophenol) – It prevents the synthesis of ATP from ADP, as it directs electrons from CoQ to O2
  • Cyanide – It prevents the flow of electrons from Cytochrome a3 to O2
  • Rotenone – It prevents flow of electrons from NADH + H+ / FADH2 to Co Q
  • Oligomycin – It inhibits oxidative phosphorylation

Question 10.
Tabulate Net Products of ATP gained during aerobic respiration per glucose molecule.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 13

Question 11.
Experiment to demonstrate the production of CO2 in aerobic respiration.
Answer:

  • Take small quantity of any seed (groundnut or bean seeds) and allow them to germinate by imbibing them.
  • While they are germinating place them in a conical flask.
  • A small glass tube containing 4 ml of freshly prepared Potassium hydroxide (KOH) solution is hing into the conical flask with the help of a thread and tightly close the one holed cork.
  • Take a bent glass tube, the shorted end of which is inserted into the conical flask through the hole in the cork.
  • The longer end is dipped in a beaker containing water.
  • Observe the position of initial water level in bent glass tube.
  • This experimental setup is kept for two hours.
  • After two hours, the level of water rises in the glass tube. It is because the CO2 evolved during aerobic
    respiration by germinating seeds will be absorbed by KOH solution and the level of water will rise in the glass tube.
  • CO2 + 2KOH → K2CO3 + H2O

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 14

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 12.
Compare Alcoholic fermentation.
Answer:

Alcoholic fermentation Lactic acid fermentation
1. it produces alcohol and releases CO2 from pyruvic acid It produces lactic acid and does not release CO2 from pyruvic acid
2. It takes place in two steps. It takes place in single steps.
3. It involves two enzymes, pyruvate decarboxylase with Mg++ and alcohol dehydrogenase It uses one enzyme, lactate dehydrogenase with Zn++
4. It forms acetaldehyde as an intermediate compound Does not form an intermediate compound.
5. It commonly occurs in yeast. Occurs in bacteria, some fungi, and vertebrate muscles.

Question 13.
Write the Industrial uses of alcoholic fermentation.
Answer:

  • In bakeries, it is used for preparing bread, cakes, biscuits.
  • In beverage industries for preparing wine and alcoholic drinks.
  • In producing vinegar and in tanning, curing of leather.
  • Ethanol is used to make gasohol (a fuel that is used for cars in Brazil).

Question 14.
Tabulate the comparison between glycolysis and fermentation.
Answer:

Glycolysis Fermentation
1. Glucose is converted into pyruvic acid Stars from pyruvic acid and is converted into alcohol or lactic acid.
2. It takes place in the presence or absence of oxygen. it takes place in the absence of oxygen.
3. Net gain is 2ATP. No net gain of ATP molecules.
4. 2NADH + H+ molecules are produced. 2NADH+ H+molecules are utilised
5. It commonly occurs in yeast. Occurs in bacteria, some fungi and vertebrate muscles.

Question 15.
Explain the demonstration of alcoholic fermentation.
Answer:

  • Take a Kuhne’s fermentation tube which consists of an upright glass tube with a side bulb
  • Pour 10% sugar solution mixed with baker’s yeast into the fermentation tube the side tube is filled plug the mouth with lid.
    After some time, the glucose solution will be fermented. The solution will give out an alcoholic smell.
  • The level of the solution in the glass column will fall due to the accumulation of CO2 gas.
  • It is due to the presence of zymase enzyme  yeast which converts the glucose solution into alcohol and CO2
  • Now introduce a pellet of KOH into the tube, the KOH will absorb CO2 and the level of solution will rise in the upright tube.
  • This experiment proves during fermentation CO2 gas is evolved.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 15

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 16.
Write the Factors (Internal and External) which affect the process of respiration.
Answer:
External Factors:

  • The optimum temperature for respiration is 30°C. At low temperatures and very high temperatures rate, respiration decreases.
  • When sufficient amount of O2 is available the rate of aerobic respiration will be optimum and anaerobic respiration  is completely stopped. This is called Extinction point.
  • The high concentration of CO2 reduces the rate of respiration.
  • A plant or tissue transferred from water to salt solution wi li increase the rate of respiration. It is called silt respiration.
  • Light is an indirect factor affecting the rate of respiration.
  • Wounding of plant organs stimulates the rate of respiration in that region.

Internal Factors:

  • The concentration of respiratory substrate is proportional to the rate of respiration
  • The amount of protoplasm and its state of activity influence the rate of respiration.

Question 17.
Write about the alternate pathway for glucose break down (or) Write about pentose phosphate pathway. (or) Phosphogluconate pathway (or) War burg – Dickens Lipmann pathway (or)Hexose Monophosphate pathway (or) HMP Shunt pathway.
Answer:

  • The pentose phosphate pathway was described by Warburg, Dickens, and Lipmann (1938). Hence, it is also called Warburg – Dickens Lipmann pathway.
  • It takes place in the cytoplasm of mature plant cells. It is an alternate way for break4own of glucose.
  • It consists of two phases, oxidative phase, and non-oxidative phase.
  • The oxidative events concert six molecules of six carbon Glucose 6 phosphate to 6 molecules of five-carbon sugar Ribulose -5 phosphate with loss of 12 NADPH + H+ (not NADH).
  • The remaining reactions known as non oxidative pathway, covert Rihulose 5phosphate molecules to various intermediates such as Ribose – 5 – phosphate (5C), Xylulose – 5 – phosphate (5C), Glyceraldehyde – 7 – Phosphate (7C), and Eiythrose -4- phosphate (4C).
  • Finally, five molecules of glucose -6- phosphate is regenerated. The overall reaction is:
    6 x Glucose – 6 – Phosphate + 12NADP+ + 6H2O

    5 x Glucose-6- Phosphate + 6CO2 + Pi + 12NADPH + 12H+
  • The net result of complete oxidation of one glucose-6-phosphate yield 6CO2 and12NADPH+H+

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 18.
Draw the cycle for pentsoe phosphate pathway (or) Draw the flow chart for HMP Shunt.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 14 Respiration 16

Question 19.
Write about the Significance of Pentose Phosphate pathway.
Answer:

  • HMP shunt is associated with the generation of two important products. NADPH and pentsoe sugars, which play a vital role in anaholic reactions.
  • Coenzyme NADPH generated is used by reductive bisynthesìs and counter damaging the effects of oxygen-free radicals.
  • Ribose – 5 – phosphate and its derivatives are used in the synthesis of DNA, RNA, ATP, NAD, FAD and
    Coenzynie A. .
  • Erythrose is used for the synthesis of anthocyanin Jignin and other aromatic compounds.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 14 Classes and Objects Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

11th Computer Science Guide Classes and Objects Text Book Questions and Answers

Book Evaluation

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer
Question 1.
The variables declared inside the class are known as data members and the functions are known as
a) data functions
b) inline functions
c) member functions
d) attributes
Answer:
c) member functions

Question 2.
Which of the following statements about member functions are True or False?
i) A member function can call another member function directly with using the dot operator.
ii) Member function can access the private data of the class.
a) i-True, ii-True
b) i-False, ii-True
c) i-True, ii-False
d) i-False, ii-False
Answer:
b) i-False, ii-True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 3.
A member function can call another member function directly, without using the dot operator called as
a) sub function
b) sub member
c) nesting of member function
d) sibling of member function
Answer:
c) nesting of member function

Question 4.
The member function defined within the class behave like
a) inline functions
b) Non inline function
c) Outline function
d) Data function
Answer:
a) inline functions

Question 5.
Which of the following access specifier protects data from inadvertent modifications?
a) Private
b) Protected
c) Public
d) Global
Answer:
a) Private

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 6.
class x
{
inty;
public:
x(int z)
{
y=z;
}
} x1[4];
intmain( )
{
x x2(10);
return 0;
}
How many objects are created for the above program?
a) 10
b) 14
c) 5
d) 2
Answer:
c) 5

Question 7.
State whether the following statements about the constructor are True or False.
i) constructors should be declared in the private section.
ii) constructors are invoked automatically when the objects are created.
a) True, True
b) True, False
c) False, True
d) False, False
Answer:
c) False, True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 8.
Which of the following constructor is executed for the following prototype ?
add display (add &); // add is a class name
a) Default constructor
b) Parameterized constructor
c) Copy constructor
d) Non Parameterized constructor
Answer:
c) Copy constructor

Question 9.
What happens when a class with parameterized constructors and having no default constructor is used in a program and we create an object that needs a zero- argument constructor?
a) Compile-time error
b) Domain error
c) Runtime error
d) Runtime exception
Answer:
a) Compile-time error

Question 10.
Which of the following create a temporary instance?
a) Implicit call to the constructor
b) Explicit call to the constructor
c) Implicit call to the destructor
d) Explicit call to the destructor
Answer:
b) Explicit call to the constructor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What are called members?
Answer:
The class comprises members. Members are classified as Data Members and Member functions. Data members are the data variables that represent the features or properties of a class. Member functions are the functions that perform specific tasks in a class.

Question 2.
Differentiate structure and class though both are user-defined data types.
Answer:
The only difference between structure and class is the members of the structure are by default public whereas it is private in class.

Question 3.
What is the difference between the class and object in terms of oop?
Answer:
Object:

  • Object is an instance of a class.
  • Object is a real-world entity such as pen, laptop, mobile, chair, etc.
  • Object allocates memory when it is created.

Class:

  • Class is a blueprint or template from which objects are created.
  • Class is a group of similar objects.
  • Class doesn’t allocate memory when it is created.

Question 4.
Why it is considered a good practice to define a constructor though a compiler can automatically generate a constructor?
Answer:
A user-defined constructor is the best method of initialise array of objects and normal objects.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
Write down the importance of the destructor.
Answer:
The purpose of the destructor is to free the resources that the object may have acquired during its lifetime. A destructor function removes the memory of an object which was allocated by the constructor at the time of creating an object.

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
Rewrite the following program after removing the syntax errors if any and underline the errors:
#include<iostream>
#include<stdio.h>
classmystud
{ intstudid =1001;
char name[20];
public
mystud( )
{ }
void register ( ) {cin>>stdid;gets(name);
}
void display ( )
{ cout<<studid<<“: “<<name<<endl;}
}
int main( )
{ mystud MS;
register.MS( );
MS.display( );
}
Answer:
MODIFIED PROGRAM:
#include<iostream>
#include<stdio.h>
class mystud
{
int studid;
char name[20];
public:
mystud( )
{
studid=1001;
}
void register ( )
{
cin>>stdid;
gets(name);
}
void display ( )
{
cout<<studid<<“: “<<name<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
mystud MS;
MS.reqister( );
MS.display( );
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
Write with an example of how will you dynamically initialize objects?
Answer:
Dynamic initialization of Objects:
When the initial values are provided during runtime then it is called dynamic initialization.
Program to illustrate dynamic initialization
#include
using namespace std;
class X
{
int n;
float avg;
public:
X(int p,float q)
{
n=p;
avg=q;
}
void disp( )
{
cout<<“\n Roll numbe:-” <<n;
cout<<“\nAverage :-“<<avg;
}
};
int main( )
{
int a ; float b;
cout<<“\nEnter the Roll Number”;
cin>>a; .
cout<<“\nEnter the Average”;
cin>>b;
X x(a,b); // dynamic initialization
x.disp( );
return 0;
}
Output
Enter the Roll Number 1201
Enter the Average 98.6
Roll number:- 1201
Average :- 98.6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 3.
What are advantages of declaring constructors and destructor under public access ability?
Answer:

When constructor and destructor are declared under public:

  1. we can initialize the object while declaring it.
  2. we can explicitly call the constructor.
  3. we can overload constructors and therefore use multiple constructors to initialize objects automatically.
  4. we can destroy the objects at the end of class scope automatically (free unused memory).

However, some C++ compiler and Dev C++ do not allow to declare constructor and destructor under private section. So it is better to declare constructor and destructor under public section only.

Question 4.
Given the following C++ code, answer the questions (i) & (ii).
Answer:
class TestMeOut
{
public:
~TestMeOut( ) //Function 1
{
cout<<“Leaving the examination hall”<<endl;
}
TestMeOut( ) //Function 2
{
cout<<“Appearing for examination'<<endl;
}
void MyWork( ) //Function 3
{
cout<<“Attempting Questions//<<endl;
}
};
i) In Object-Oriented Programming, what is Function 1 referred to as and when does it get invoked/called?
Function 1 is called a destructor. It will be automatically invoked when the object goes out of scope (ie. at the end of a program).

ii) In Object-Oriented Programming, what is Function 2 referred to as, and when does it get invoked/called?
Function2 is called a constructor. It will be automatically invoked when an object comes into scope.(ie. at the time of object creation).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
Write the output of the following C++ program code:
Answer:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class Calci
{
char Grade; .
int Bonus;
public:
Calci( )
{
Grade=’E’;
Bonus=0;
}//ascii value of A=65
void Down(int G)
{
Grade-=G;
}
void Up(int G)
{
Grade+=G;
Bonus++;
}
void Show( )
{
cout<<Grade<<“#”<<Bonus<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
Calci c;
c.Down(3);
c.Show( );
c.Up(7);
c.Show( );
c.Down(2);
c.Show( );
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain nested class with example.
Answer:
When one class becomes a member of another class then it is called Nested class and the relationship is called containership. When a class is declared within another class, the inner class is called a Nested class (i.e. the inner class) and the outer class is known as the Enclosing class. The nested class can be defined in private as well as in the public section of the Enclosing class.

Classes can be nested in two ways:

  1. By defining a class within another class
  2. By declaring an object of a class as a member to another class
  3. By defining a class within another class

C++ program to illustrate the nested class
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class enclose
{
private:
int x;
class nest
{
private :
int y;
public:
int z;
void prn( )
{
y=3;z=2;
cout<<“\n The product of”
< <y< <‘*'< <z<<“= “< <y*z< <“\n”;
}
}; //inner class definition over
nest m1;
public:
nest n2;
void square( )
{
n2.prn( ); //inner class member function is called by its object
x=2;
n2.z=4;
cout<<“\n The product of” <<n2.z<<‘*'<<n2.z<<“=”n2.z*n2.z<<“/n”;
cout<<“\n The product of” <<x<<‘*'<<x<<“= “<<x*x;
}
}; //outer class definition over
int main( )
{
enclose e;
e.square( ); //outer class member function is called
}
Output
The product of 3*2=6
The product of 4*4=16
The product of 2*2=4

In the above program the inner class nest is defined inside the outer class enclose, nest is accessed by enclose by creating an object of nest

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
Mention the differences between constructor and destructor.
Answer:

CONSTRUCTOR

DESTRUCTOR

The name of the constructor must be same as that of the class. The destructor has the same name as that of the class prefixed by the tilde character
A constructor can have parameter list. The destructor cannot have arguments.
The constructor function can be overloaded. Destructors cannot be overloaded i.e., there can be only one destructor in a class.
Constructor cannot be inherited but a derived class can call the base class constructor. Destructor cannot be inherited.
The constructor is executed automatically when the object is created. The destructor is executed automatically when the control reaches the end of class.
Allocated memory space for the object. Destroy the object.

Question 3.
Define a class RESORT with the following description in C++ :
Answer:
Private members:
Rno // Data member to storeroom number
Name //Data member to store user name
Charges //Data member to store per day charge
Days //Data member to store the number of days
Compute ( ) // A function to calculate total amount as Days * Charges and if the
//total amount exceeds 11000 then total amount is 1.02 * Days *Charges

Public member:
getinfo( ) // Function to Read the information like name , room no, charges and days
dispinfo ( ) // Function to display all entered details and total amount calculated
//using COMPUTE function
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
class RESORT
{
private:
int Rno,Days,Charges;
char Rname[20];
int compute( )
{
if (Days * Charges >11000)
return (Days * Charges * 1.02);
else
return(Days * Charges);
}
public:
getinfo( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter customer name : “;
cin>>Rname;
cout<<‘nEnter charges per day : “;
cin>>Charges;
cout< <‘nEnter Number of days : “;
cin>>Days;
cout<<‘n Enter Room Number : “;
cin>>Rno;
}
dispinfo( )
{
cout<<‘nRoom Number :
“<<Rno;
cout<<‘nCustomer name :
“<<Rname;
cout<<‘nCharges per day :
“<<Charges;
cout<<‘nNumber of days :
“<<Days;
cout<<‘nTotal Amount :
“<<compute( );
}
int main( )
{
RESORT Obj;
Obj,getinfo( );
Obj.dispinfo( );
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 4.
WrIte the output of the following:
Answer:
#include<iostream>
#indude<stdio.h>
using namespace std;
class sub
{
int day, subno;
public :
sub(int,int); // prototype
void printsub( )
{
cout<<” subject number: “<<subno;
cout<<” Days : ” <<day;
}
};
sub::sub(int d=150,int sn=12)
{
cout<<endl<<“Constructing the object
“<<endl;
day=d;
sub no=sn;
}
class stud ‘
{
int rno;
float marks; public:
stud( )
{
cout<< “Constructing the object of
students “<<endl;
rno=0;
marks=0.0;
}
void getval( )
{
cout<<“Enter the roll number and the marks secured”; cin>>rno>>marks;
}
void printdet( )
{
cout<<“Roll no : “<<rno<<“Marks : “<<marks<<endl; .
}
};
class admission
{
sub obj;
stud objone;
float fees; ,
public :
admission ( )
{
cout<< “Constructing the object of admission “<<endl;
fees=0.0;
}
void printdet( )
{
objone.printdet( );
obj.printsub();
cout<<“fees : “<<fees<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
system (“cls”);
admission adm;
cout<<endl<< ?’Back in main ()”;
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
Write the output of the following.
Answer:
#indude<iostream>
#include<stdio,h>
using namespace std;
class P
{
public:
P( )
{
cout<< “\nConstructor of class P }
~P( )
{
cout< < “\nDestructor of class P
}
};
class Q
{
public:
Q( )
{
cout< <“\nConstructor of class Q “;}
~ Q( )
{
cout<< “\nDestructor of class Q
}
};
class R
{
P obj1, obj2;
Q obj3;
public:
R( )
{
cout<< “\nConstructor of class R “;}
~R( )
{
cout<< “\nDestructor of class R
}
};
int main ( )
{
R oR; :
Q oq;
Pop;
return 0;
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

11th Computer Science Guide Classes and Objects Additional Questions and Answers

Choose The Correct Answer (1 Mark)

Question 1.
The most important feature of C++ is ………………..
(a) object
(b) class
(c) public
(d) All the above
Answer:
(b) class

Question 2.
How many features are commonly present in OOP languages?
a) 3
b) 2
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
c) 4

Question 3.
Calling a member function of an object is also known as ……………….. to object.
(a) call function
(b) call by value
(c) call by reference
(d) sending message
Answer:
(d) sending message

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 4.
……………… is a way to bind the data and its associated functions together,
a) Class
b) Array
c) Structure
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Class

Question 5.
When one class become a member of another class, the relationship is called ………………..
(a) containership
(b) partnership
(c) friendship
(d) all the above
Answer:
(a) containership

Question 6.
The body of the class is defined inside the ………………. brackets.
a) Angle < >
b) Square [ ]
c) Curly { }
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Curly { }

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 7.
……………….. can be defined either in private or in the public section of a class.
(a) Object
(b) Data type
(c) Memory
(d) constructor
Answer:
(d) constructor

Question 8.
The members of the structure are by default ………………..
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Public

Question 9.
There are ……………….. ways to create an object using the parameterized constructor.
(a) 3
(b) 2
(c) 1
(d) 4
Answer:
(c) 1

Question 10.
The class body contains ………………….
a) Data members
b) Member functions
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 11.
The class body has………………… access specifiers.
a) Three
b) Four
c) Two
d) Five
Answer:
a) Three

Question 12.
The class body has…………….. access specifiers.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
…………………. is a visibility label.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 14.
……………….. allows preventing the functions of a program to access directly the internal representation of a class type.
a) Data Hiding
b) Data Capturing
c) Data Processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Data Hiding

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 15.
The access restriction to the class members is specified by ……………. section within the class
body.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 16.
A …………………. member is accessible from where outside the class but within a program.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Public

Question 17.
We can set and get the value of public data members using ………………… function.
a) Member
b) Nonmember
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 18.
A …………….. member cannot be accessed from outside the class.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Private

Question 19.
Only the class member functions can access ……………… members.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Private

Question 20.
……………….. members can be accessed in child classes.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Protected

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 21.
If all members of the class are defined as …………….. then the class become frozen.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Private

Question 22.
If all members of the class are defined as ………………….. then the object of the class can not access anything from the class,
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Private

Question 23.
………………. are the data variables that represent the features or properties of a class.
a) Data members
b) Member functions
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Data members

Question 24.
………………… are the functions that perform specific tasks in a class.
a) Data members
b) Member functions
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Member functions

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 25.
Member functions are called as …………………..
a) Methods
b) Attributes
c) Properties
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Methods

Question 26.
Data members are also called as ……………….
a) Methods
b) Attributes
c) Properties
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Attributes

Question 27.
Classes contain a special member function called as ……………………
a) Constructors
b) Destructors
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 28.
The member functions of a class can be defined in ……………….. ways.
a) Two
b) Three
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
a) Two

Question 29.
The member functions of a class can be defined in ………………. way.
a) Inside the class definition
b) Outside the class definition
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 30.
When a member function is defined Inside a class, it behaves like ………………. functions.
a) Inline
b) General
c) Local
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Inline

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 31.
If a function is inline, the compiler places a copy of the code of that function at each point where the function is called at ………………….
a) Run Time
b) Compile time
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Compile time

Question 32.
When Member function defined outside the class, and then it is be called as ………………….
member function.
a) Outline
b) Non-inline
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 33.
When Member function defined outside the class using …………….. operator.
a) Scope resolution
b) Membership
c) Reference
d) Conditional
Answer:
a) Scope resolution

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 34.
The class variables are called ………………….
a) Object
b) Attributes
c) Procedures
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Object

Question 35.
Objects are also called as …………………. of class.
a) Instant
b) Instance
c) Attributes
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Instance

Question 36.
Objects can be created in ………………… methods.
a) Three
b) Four
c) Two
d) Five
Answer:
c) Two

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 37.
Objects can be created as ……………….
a) Global object
b) Local object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 38.
…………….. objects can be used by any function in the program.
a) Global object
b) Local object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Global object

Question 39.
If an object is declared outside all the function bodies or by placing their names immediately after the closing brace of the class declaration then it is called as ……………….
a) Global object
b) Local object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Global object

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 40.
If an object is declared within a function then it is called ……………….
a) Global object
b) Local object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Local object

Question 41.
……………….. object can not be accessed from outside the function.
a) Global
b) Local
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Local

Question 42.
No separate space is allocated for …………………. when the objects are created.
a) Member functions
b) Data members
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Member functions

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 43.
Memory space required for the ……………….
a) Member functions
b) Data members
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Data members

Question 44.
The members of a class are referenced (accessed) by using the object of the class followed by the ………………. operator.
a) Scope resolution
b) Conditional
c) Dot (membership)
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Dot (membership)

Question 45.
Calling a member function of an object is also known as ……………….
a) Sending a message to object
b) Communication with the object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 46.
An array which contains the class type of element is called …………………
a) Array of objects
b) Structure Objects
c) Block of objects
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Array of objects

Question 47.
The ………………… of the outline member function given in a class specification, instructs the compiler about its visibility mode.
a) Name
b) Prototype
C) Data type
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Prototype

Question 48.
A member function can call another member function of the same class directly without using the dot operator is called ………………………
a) Nesting of the member function
b) Invariant Members
c) Variant Members
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Nesting of the member function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 49.
A member function can call another member function of the same class for that you do not
need a(n) …………………..
a) Member function
b) Data Member
c) Object
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Object

Question 50.
A member function can access ………………. functions.
a) Public
b) Private
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 51.
…………………. operator will reveal the hidden file scope(global) variable.
a) Membership
b) Conditional
c) Scope resolution
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Scope resolution

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 52.
When an object is passed by ……………… the function creates its own copy of the object and works on it.
a) Value
b) Reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Value

Question 53.
When an object is passed by …………….. changes made to the object inside the function do not affect the original object.
a) Value
b) Reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Value

Question 54.
When an object is passed by ……………….. its memory address is passed to the function so the called function works directly on the original object used in the function call.
a) Value
b) Reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Reference

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 55.
When an object is passed by ………………………. any changes made to the object inside the function definition are reflected in the original object.
a) Value
b) Reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Reference

Question 56.
Member Functions can ………………….
a) Receive object as an argument
b) Return an object
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 57.
When one class become a member of another class then it is called ……………. class.
a) Nested
b) Inline
c) External
d) Global
Answer:
a) Nested

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 58.
When one class becomes a member of another class then the relationship is called ………………….
a) Containership
b) Nesting
c) Parent-Child
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Containership

Question 59.
Classes can be nested in ……………….. ways.
a) Three
b) Two
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
b) Two
Question 60.
Classes can be nested in ………………..way.
a) By defining a class within another class
b) By declaring an object of a class as a member to another class
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 61.
When a class is declared within another class, the inner class is called a Nested class (ie the inner class) and the outer class is known as …………………… class.
a) Enclosing
b) Abstract
c) Transit
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Enclosing

Question 62.
The nested class can be defined in ………………….. section of the Enclosing class.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Either Private or Public
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either Private or Public

Question 63.
Whenever an object of a class is declared as a member of another class it is known as a _____ class.
a) Abstract
b) Container
c) Literal
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Container

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 64.
Instantiating object is done using ……………….
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Data abstraction
d) Data hiding
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 65.
A(n) ………………..in C++ can be initialized during the time of their declaration.
a) Array
b) Structure
c) Array or Structure
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Array or Structure

Question 66.
Member function of a class can access all the members irrespective of their associated …………………..
a) Access specifier
b) Data type
c) Return type
d) Argument
Answer:
a) Access specifier

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 67.
When an instance of a class comes into scope, a special function called the ……………. gets executed.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Data abstraction
d) Data hiding
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 68.
The constructor function name has the same name as the …………….. name.
a) Object
b) Class
c) Data member
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Class

Question 69.
The constructors return ………………
a) int
b) char
c) float
d) nothing
Answer:
d) nothing

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 70.
…………………. are not associated with any data type
a) Constructor
b) Data member
c) Data abstraction
d) Member functions
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 71.
……………… can be defined either inside class definition or outside the Class definition.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Data abstraction
d) Member functions
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 72.
A constructor can be defined in ……………… section of a class.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Either Private or Public
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either Private or Public

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 73.
If a constructor is defined in ………………… section of a class, then only its object Can be created in any function.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Either Private or Public
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Public

Question 74.
The main function of the constructor is ……………………….
a) To allocate memory space to the object
b) To initialize the data member of the class object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 75.
A constructor that accepts no parameter is called …………………… constructor.
a) Null
b) Default
c) Empty
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Default

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 76.
Identify the correct statement from following with respect to constructor.
a) If a class does not contain an explicit constructor (user defined constructor) the compiler automatically generate a default constructor implicitly as an inline public member.
b) In the absence of user defined constructor the compiler automatically provides the default constructor. It simply allocates memory for the object.
c) Parameterized constructor is achieved by passing parameters to the function.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 77.
A constructor which can take arguments is called ……………….. constructor.
a) Parmeterized
b) Default
c) Empty
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Parmeterized

Question 78.
……………….. type of constructor helps to create objects with different initial values.
a) Parmeterized
b) Default
c) Empty
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Parmeterized

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 79.
Declaring a constructor with arguments hides the ……………………
a) Data members
b) Compiler generated constructor
c) Member functions
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Compiler generated constructor

Question 80.
………………… Constructor is used to creating an array of objects.
a) Default
b) Parameterized
b) Overloaded
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Default

Question 81.
There are ………………. ways to create an object using the parameterized constructor.
a) Three
b) Two
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
b) Two

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 82.
……………… is a way to create an object using the parameterized constructor,
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 83.
In …………….. method, the parameterized constructor is invoked automatically
whenever an object is created.
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Implicit call

Question 84.
In the………………….. method, the name of the constructor is explicitly given to invoking the parameterized constructor.
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Explicit call

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 85.
………………… method is the most suitable method as it creates a temporary object
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Explicit call

Question 86.
The chance of data loss will not arise in ………………….. method.
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Explicit call

Question 87.
A ……………….. object lives in memory as long as it is being used in an expression.
a) Temporary
b) Nested
c) Inline
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Temporary

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 88.
A constructor having a reference to an already existing object of its own class is called ………………….. constructor.
a) Reference
b) Value
c) Copy
d) Move
Answer:
c) Copy

Question 89.
A copy constructor is called ……………..
a) When an object is passed as a parameter to any of the member functions
b) When a member function returns an object
c) When an object is passed by reference to an instance of its own class
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 90.
The constructors are executed in the …………………. of the object declared.
a) Order
b) Reverse order
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Order

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 91.
When the initial values are provided during runtime then it is called ………………….. initialization.
a) Static
b) Dynamic
c) Run time
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Dynamic

Question 92.
…………………. constructor can have parameter list.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 93.
No return type can be specified for ………………….
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 94.
The ……………….. function can be overloaded.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 95.
The compiler generates a ………………… in the absence of a user-defined.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 96.
Compiler generated constructor is ………………….. member function.
a) private
b) protected
c) public
d) None of these
Answer:
c) public

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 97.
The ………………. is executed automatically,
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 98.
The ……………. is executed automatically when the object is created.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 99.
When a class object goes out of scope, a special function called the ………………. gets executed.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Destructor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 100.
The destructor has the same name as the class tag but prefixed with a …………………
a) ~ (tilde)
b) #
c) @
d) None of these
Answer:
a) ~ (tilde)

Question 101.
A …………………… is a special member function that is called when the lifetime of an object ends.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Destructor

Question 102.
The ………………… cannot have arguments,
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Destructor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 103.
There can be ……………… destructor in a class.
a) Two
b) Three
c) Only one
d) Four
Answer:
c) Only one

Question 104.
_____ cannot be inherited.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Very Short Answer (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Define methods of a class and write its types.
Answer:
The class comprises members. Member functions are called methods. The member functions of a class can be defined in two ways.

  1. Inside the class definition
  2. Outside the class definition

Question 2.
Why classes are needed?
Answer:
Classes are needed to represent real-world entities that not only have data type properties but also have associated operations. It is used to create user-defined data types.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 3.
What is called as nesting of member functions?
Answer:
Only the public members of a class can be accessed by the object of that class, using the dot operator. However, a member function can call another member function of the same class directly without using the dot operator. This is called as nesting of member functions.

Question 4.
What are the visibility labels of a class body?
Answer:
The class body has three visibility labels viz., private, public, and protected. The Visibility labels are also called as access specifiers.

Question 5.
What is a parameterized constructor?
Answer:
A constructor which can take arguments is called a parameterized constructor. This type of constructor helps to create objects with different initial values. This is achieved by passing parameters to the function.

Question 6.
What happened if all the members of a class are defined as private?
Answer:
If all members of the class are defined as private, then the class becomes frozen.
The object of the class can not access anything from the class.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 7.
Write about objects.
Answer:
A class specification just defines the properties of a class. To make use of a class specified, the variables of that class type have to be declared. The class variables are called objects. Objects are also called an instance of the class.

For example:
student s;
In the above statement ‘s’ is an instance of the class student.

Question 8.
How many ways objects can be created for a class? Give its types.
Answer:
Objects can be created in two methods:

  1. Global object
  2. Local object

Question 9.
What do you mean by an array of objects?
Answer:
An array which contains the class type of element is called an array of objects. It is declared and defined in the same way as any other type of array.

Example:
class stock
{
int itemno;
float price; public:
}s[5];
Here s[5] is an array of objects.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 10.
What is a nested member function?
Answer:
A member function can cal! another member function of the same class directly without using the dot operator. This is called as nesting of member functions.

Question 11.
How many ways objects can be passed to function argument?
Answer:
Objects can also be passed in both ways

  • Pass By Value
  • Pass By Reference

Question 12.
What is a container class?
Answer:
Whenever an object of a class is declared as a member of another class it is known as a container class. In the container-ship, the object of one class is declared in another class.

Question 13.
What is the need for a constructor in a class?
Answer:
Instantiating object is done using constructor. An array or a structure in C++ can be initialized during the time of their declaration using constructor. The constructor function initializes the class object.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 14.
What are the functions of a constructor?
Answer:
The main functions of the constructor are:

  • To allocate memory space to the object and
  • To initialize the data member of the class object.

Question 15.
What is a default constructor?
Answer:
Default constructor:
A constructor that accepts no parameter is called the default constructor.
For example in the class Data program Data::Data( ) is the default constructor.
Using this constructor objects are created similar to the way the variables of other data types are created.

Example:
int num; //ordinary variable declaration
Data d1; // object declaration
If a class does not contain an explicit constructor the compiler automatically generates a default constructor implicitly as an inline public member.

Question 16.
What is the significance of default constructor?
Answer:
Default constructors are very useful to crate objects without having specific initial value. It is also used to create array of objects.

Question 17.
How many ways a constructor can be invoked?
Answer:
There are two ways to create an object using parameterized constructor:

  1. Implicit call
  2. Explicit call

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 18.
What is copy constructor?
Answer:
A constructor having a reference to an already existing object of its own class is called copy constructor.
In other words Copy Constructor is a type of constructor which is used to create a copy of an already existing object of a class type.

Question 19.
What is the order of constructor invocation?
Answer:
The constructors are executed in the order of the object declared. (If it is in same statement left to right)

For example:
Test t1;
Test t2; // the order of constructor execution is first for t1 and then for t2.
Consider the following example
Sample s1,s2,s3 ; //The order of construction is s1 then s2 and finally s3

Question 20.
What do you mean by dynamic initialization of Object?
Answer:
When the initial values are provided during runtime then it is called dynamic initialization.

Question 21.
Write a note on the destructor.
Answer:

  • When a class object goes out of scope, a special function called the destructor gets executed.
  • The destructor has the same name as the class tag but prefixed with a ~(tilde).
  • The destructor function also returns nothing and it does not associate with any data type

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 22.
What is the need for a destructor in a class?
Answer:
The purpose of the destructor is to free the resources that the object may have acquired during its lifetime. A destructor function removes the memory of an object which was allocated by the constructor at the time of creating an object

Question 23.
Define destructor.
Answer:
A destructor is a special member function that is called when the lifetime of an object ends and destroys the object constructed by the constructor. Normally it is declared under the public visibility of a class.

Short Answers (3 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain the local object with an example.
Answer:
If an object is declared within a function then it is called a local object.
It cannot be accessed from outside the function.
# include
# include
using namespace std
class add  //Global class
{
int a,b; public:
int sum; void
getdata()
{
a = 5; b = 10; sum
= a + b;
}
} a1;
add a2;
int main()
{
add a3;
a1.getdata();  //global object
a2.getdata();  //global object
a3.getdata();
cout << a1 .sum;  //Local object for a global class
cout << a2.sum;
cout << a3.sum;
return 0;   //public data member accessed from outside the class
}
Output:
151515

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
Write about private, protected, and public members of a class.
Answer:
The Public Members:
A public member is accessible from anywhere outside the class but within a program.

The Private Members:
A private member cannot be accessed from outside the class. Only the class member functions can access private members. By default, all the members of a class would be private.

The Protected Members:
A protected member is very similar to a private member but they can be accessed in child classes which are called derived classes (inherited classes).

Question 3.
What is a constructor?
Answer:
The definition of a class only creates a new user-defined data type. The instances of the class type should be instantiated (created and initialized). Instantiating objects is done using the constructor. An array or a structure in C++ can be initialized during the time of their declaration.

The initialization of a class type object at the time of declaration similar to a structure or an array is not possible because the class members have their associated access specifiers (private or protected or public). Therefore Classes include special member functions called constructors. The constructor function initializes the class object.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 4.
Explain memory allocation of objects.
Answer:
Memory allocation of objects:
All the objects belonging to that class use the same member function, no separate space is allocated for member functions when the objects are created.
Memory space required for the member variables are only allocated separately for each object because the member variables will hold different data values for different objects.
Memory for Objects for p1 and p2 is illustrated:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 5

Question 5.
Explain the default constructor with an example.
Answer:
A constructor that accepts no parameter is called the default constructor. For example in the class data program Data::Data() is the default constructor. Using this constructor objects are created similar to the way the variables of other data types are created.

Example:
int num; //ordinary variable declaration
Data d1; // object declaration

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 6.
How will you refer members of the class? Give its syntax and an example.
Answer:
The members of a class are referenced (accessed) by using the object of the class followed by the dot (membership) operator and the name of the member.

The general syntax for calling the member function is:
Object_name.function_name (actual parameter); For example consider the following illustration:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 6

Question 7.
Explain the different methods of passing an object to the function argument.
Answer:
Pass By Value:
When an object is passed by value the function creates its own copy of the object and works on it. Therefore any changes made to the object inside the function do not affect the original object.

Pass By Reference:
When an object is passed by reference, its memory address is passed to the function so the called function works directly on the original object used in the function call. So any changes made to the object inside the function definition are reflected in the original object.

Question 8.
Write about constructor.
Answer:
When an instance of a class comes into scope, a special function called the constructor gets executed. The constructor function name has the same name as the class name. The constructors return nothing. They are not associated with any data type. It can be defined either inside class definition or outside the class definition.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 9.
What is a parameterized constructor?
Answer:
Parameterized Constructors:
A constructor which can take arguments is called a parameterized constructor. This type of constructor helps to create objects with different initial values. This is achieved by passing parameters to the function.

Example:
class simple
{
private:
int a,b;
public:
simple(int m, int n)
{
a= m ;
b= n;
cout< < “\n Parameterized Constructor of class-simple
}
};

Question 10.
What do you mean by the implicit and explicit call of a constructor?
Answer:
Implicit call:
In this method, the parameterized constructor is invoked automatically whenever an object is created.
For example, simple s1(10,20); in this for creating the object si parameterized constructor is automatically invoked

Explicit call:
In this method, the name of the constructor is explicitly given to invoking the parameterized constructor so that the object can be created and initialized.

For example:
simple s1=simple(10,20); //explicit call

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 11.
When copy constructor Is executed? Give examples.
Answer:
A copy constructor is called

  • When an object is passed as a parameter to any of the member functions
    Example: void simple: :putdata(simple x);
  • When a member function returns an object
    Example: simple get data( ) { }
  • When an object is passed by reference to an instance of its own class
    For example: simple1, s2(s1); // s2(s1) calls copy constructor

Explain in Detail (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain how to define class members?
Answer:
Definition of class members:
Class comprises of members. Members are classified as Data Members and Member functions.

  • Data members are the data variables that represent the features or properties of a class.
  • Member functions are the functions that perform specific tasks in a class.
  • Member functions are called methods, and data members are also called attributes.

Example:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 7
Defining methods of a class:
Without defining the methods (functions), class definition will become incomplete. The member functions of a class can be defined in two ways.

  • Inside the class definition
  • Outside the class definition

Inside the class definition:
When a member function is defined inside a class, it behaves like inline functions. These are called Inline member functions.

Outside the class definition:
When Member function defined outside the class just like normal function definition (Function definitions you are familiar with) then it is being called as an outline member function or non-inline member function. Scope resolution operator (::) is used for this purpose.

The syntax for defining the outline member function is:
return_type class_name :: function name (parameter list)
{
function definition
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 8

Class using Inline and Outline member function:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class Box
{
// no access specifier mentioned
double width;
public:
double length;
//inline member function definition
void printWidth( )
{
cout<<“\n The width of the box is…”<<width;
}
//prototype of the function
void setWidth(double w);
};
// outline member function definition
void Box :: setWidth(double w)
{
width=w;
}
int main( )
{
// object for class Box
Box b;
// Use member function to set the width.
b.setWidth(10.0);
//Use member function to print the width.
b.printWidth( );
return 0;
Output
The width of the box is… 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
What are the ways to create an object using the parameterized constructor with an example?
Answer:
There are two ways to create an object using the parameterized constructor:
1. Implicit call: In this method, the parameterized constructor is invoked automatically whenever an object is created. For example, simple s1( 10,20); in this, for creating the object s1 parameterized constructor is automatically invoked.

2. Explicit call: In this method, the name of the constructor is explicitly given to invoking the parameterized constructor so that the object can be created and initialized.

#include
using namespace std;
class simple
{
private:
int a, b;
public:
simple(int m,int n)
{
a = m;
b = n;
cout << “\n Constructor of class – simple invoked for implicit and explicit call” << endl;
}
void putdata()
{
cout << “\n The two integers are…” << a << ‘\t’ << b << endl;
cout << “\n The sum of the variables” << a << “+” << b << “=” << a + b;
}
};
int main()
{
simple s1(10,20); //implicit call
simple s2 = simple(30,45); //explicit call
cout << “\n\t\tObject 1\n”;
s1.putdata();
s2.putdata();
return 0;
}
Output:
Constructor of class – simple invoked for the implicit and explicit call
Constructor of class-simple invoked for the implicit and explicit call

Object 1
The two integers are… 10 20
The sum of the variables 10 + 20 = 30

Object 2
The two integers are… 30 45.
The sum of the variables 30 + 45 = 75

Question 3.
What are the characteristics of a destructor?
Answer:
Characteristics of destructors:

  • The destructor has the same name as that of the class prefixed by the tilde character
  • The destructor cannot have arguments.
  • It has no return type.
  • Destructors cannot be overloaded i.e., there can be only one destructor in a class.
  • In the absence of a user-defined destructor, it is generated by the compiler.
  • The destructor is executed automatically when the control reaches the end of the class scope to destroy the object.
  • They cannot be inherited.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
Define a class in general and in C++’s context.
Answer:
Classes represent real-world entities that not only have data type properties but also have associated operations.
In C++ class is a way to bind the data and its associated functions together. It is a user-defined data type.

Question 2.
What is the purpose of a class specifier?
Answer:
Data hiding is one of the important features of Object Oriented Programming which allows preventing the functions of a program to access directly the internal representation of a class type.
The access restriction to the class members is specified by class specifies like public, private, and protected sections within the class body.

Question 3.
Compare a structure and a class in C++ context.
Answer:
The only difference between structure and class is the members of structure are by default public where as it is private in class.

Question 4.
Compare private and public access specifier.
Answer:
Public members:
A public member is accessible from anywhere outside the class but within a program. We can set and get the value of public data members even without using any member function.

Private members:
A private member cannot be accessed from outside the class. Only the class member functions can access private members. By default all the members of a class would be private.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
What is a non-inline member function? Write its syntax.
Answer:
When Member function defined outside the class just like normal function definition (Function definitions you are familiar with) then it is being called as an outline member function or non-inline member function. Scope resolution operator (::) is used for this purpose.
The syntax for defining the outline member function is:
Syntax:
return_type class_name :: function_name (parameter list)
{
function definition
}
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 9

Activity – 1
State the reason for the invalidity of the following code fragment.

(i)

(ii)

class count
{
int first
int second;
public:
int first
};
class item
{
int prd;
};
int prdno;

Answer:

  • Data member first is duplicated and it is defined with two scopes( both private and public). It is invalid.
  • Object name prefix with the only class name. No data type allowed in between class name and object name.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Activity – 2
class area
{
int s;
public:
void calc( );
};
Write an outline function definition for calc( ); which finds the area of a square
Answer:
int area :: calc( ) .
{
return(s * s);
}

Activity – 3
Identify the error in the following code fragment
class A
{
float x;
void init( )
{
Aa1;
X1.5=1; .
}
};
void main( )
{
A1.init( );
}
Answer:
Error:
Local object can not be accessed from outside the function. Al is the local object, so it can not be accessed in main( );

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Activity – 4
What is the size of the objects s1, s2?
class sum
{
int n1,n2;
public:
void add( )
{
int n3=10;n1=n2=10;
}
} s1,s2;
Answer:
The size of the object SI and S2 is 8 bytes each in Dev C++, In Turbo C++ 4 bytes each.
Program to test the memory requirement:
class sum
{
int n1,n2;
public:
void add( )
{
int n3-10;
n1=n2=10;
}
} s1,s2;
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
int main( )
{
cout<<sizeof(s1)<< “”<<sizeof(s2);
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Activity – 5
i) Write member function called display with no return.
class objects.
ii) Try the output of the above coding with the necessary modifications.
PROGRAM
#indude<iostream>
using namespace std;
class compute
{
int n1, n2;
public :
void init (int a, int b)
{
n1 = a;
n2 = b;
}
int n;
int add ( )
return (n1+n2);;
{
int prd ( )
{
return (n1*n2);
}
};
compute c1, c2;
void display(compute &objl,compute &obj2)
{
c1.init(12,15);
c2.init(8,4);
objlm = obj1.add( );
obj2.n = obj2.add( );
cout<<“\n Sum of object-1 “<<obj1.n;
cout<<“\n Sum of object-2 “<<obj2.n;
cout<<“\n Sum of the two objects are”<<obj1.
n+obj2.n;
c1.init(5,4);
c2.init(2,5);
obj1.n = obj1.prd( );
obj2.n = obj2.prd( );
cout<<“\n Product of object-1 “<<objl.n;
cout<<“\n Product of object-2 “<<obj2.n;
cout<<“\n Product of the two objects are “<<objl.n*obj2.n;
}
int main( )
{
display(c1,c2);
return 0;
}
output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Activity – 6
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class Sample
{
int i,j;
public :
int k;
Sample( )
{
i=j=k=0;//constructor defined inside the class
}
};
int main( )
{
Sample s1;
return 0;
}
Output
In the above program justify your reason for no output.
Answer:
Constructor alone is defined without output statement. When the above program is executed, the constructor executed. But no output on the screen because of missing cout

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Hands-On Practice

Question 1.
Define a class employee with the following specification.
Answer:
private members of class Employee
empno- integer
ename – 20 characters
basic-float
netpay, hra, da, – float
calculate ( ) – A function to find the basic+hra+da with float return type

public member functions of class employee
havedata( ) – A function to accept values for empno, ename, basic, hra,
da and call calculate( ) to compute netpay
dispdata( ) – A function to display all the data members on the screen
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
class Employee
{
private :
int empno;
char ename[20];
float basic,hra,da,netpay;
float calculate( )
{
return (basic+hra+da);
}
public:
void have data( )
{
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter Employee number :”;
cin>>empno;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter Employee name :”;
cin>>ename;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter Basic pay :”;
cin>>basic; ,
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter House Rent Allowance (HRA):”;
cin>>hra; .
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter Dearness Allowance (DA):”;
cin>>da;
netpay = calculate( );
}
void dispdata( )
{
cout<<“\nEMPLOYEE DETAILS\n\n”;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Employee number :”<<empno<<endl;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Employee name :”<<ename<<endl;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Basic pay :”<<basic<<endl;
cout<<setw(35)<<“House Rent Allowance (HRA) :”<<hra<<endl; cout<<setw(35)<<“Dearness Allowance (DA) :”<<da<<endl;
cout<<setw(35)< <“Netpay :”<<netpay<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
Employee e;
e.havedata( );
e.dispdata( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
Define a class MATH with the following specifications.
Answer:
private members:
num1, num2, result – float
init( ) function to initialize num1, num2 and result to zero .

protected members:
add( ) function to add num1 and num2 and store the sum in result
diff( ) function to subtract num1 from num2 and store the difference in the result

public members:
getdata( ) function to accept values for num1 and num2
menu( ) function to display menu
1. Add…
2. Subtract…
invoke add() when the choice is 1 and invoke prod when the choice is 2 and also display the result.
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
class MATH
{
private:
float num1,num2,result;
init( )
{
num1=0;
num2=0;
result=0;
}
protected: void add( )
{
result = num1+num2;
}
void diff( )
{
result = num1 – num2;
}
public:
getdata( )
{
cout<<“\nEntertwo numbers “;
cin>>num1>>num2;
} ‘ menu( )
{
int choice;
cout<<“\n1.Add …”;
cout<<“\n2.Subtract …….”;
cout<<“\nEnter your choice :”; cin>>choice;
switch(choice)
{
case 1: getdata( );
add( );
cout<<“\nAdded value is”<<result;
break;
case 2: getdata( );
diff( );
cout<<“\nSubtracted value is “<<result;
break;
default: cout<<“\End”;
}
}
};
int main( )
{
MATH m;
m. menu( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 13

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 3.
Create a class called Item with the following specifications.
Answer:
private members:
code, quantity- Integer data type
price – Float data type
getdata( )-function to accept values for all , data members with no return

public members:
taxt – float
dispdata( ) member function to display code,quantity,price and tax .The tax is calculated as if the quantity is more than 100 tax is 2500 otherwise 1000.
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
class Item
{
private:
int code,quantity;
float price;
void getdata( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter product code “; cin>>code;
cout<<“\nEnter quantity “; cin>>quantity;
cout<<“\nEnter price “; cin>> price;
}
public:
float tax;
void display( )
{
getdata( );
if(quantity>100)
tax = 2500;
else
tax = 1000;
cout<<endl<<setw(25)<< “Product code : “<<code<<endl<<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Quantity : ” <<quantity<<endl<<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Unit price :” <<price<<endl<<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Total Amount: ” < cout<<setw(25)<<“Net Bill amount : ”
<<quantity* price+tax<<endl<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
Item i; i.display( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 14

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 4.
Write the definition of a class FRAME in C++ with the following description.
Answer:
Private members:
FramelD – Integer data type
Height, Width, Amount – Float data type
SetAmount( ) -Member function to calculate and assign amount as 10*Height*Width

Public members:
GetDetail( ) Afunction to allow user to entervalues of FramelD, Height, Width. This function should also call SetAmount() to calculate the amount.
ShowDetail( ) A function to display the values of all data members.
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
class FRAME
{
private:
int FrameId;
float Height, Width, Amount;
void SetAmount()
{
Amount = 10 * Height * Width;
}
public:
void Getdetails( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter Frame Id : “; cin>> FrameId;
cout<<“\nEnter Frame Height: cin>> Height;
cout<<“\nEnter Frame Width : “; cin>>Width;
SetAmount( );
}
void ShowDetaiis( )
{
cout<<endl<setw(25)<<“Frame Id :” <<FrameId<<endl<<endl; cout<<setw(25)<<“Frame Height:” <<Height<<endl<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Frame Width :”<<Width<<endk<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Total Amount:”
<<Amount< <endl< <endl;
}
int main( )
{
FRAME F;
F.Getdetails( );
F.ShowDetails( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 15

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
Define a class RESORT in C++ with the following description:
Answer:
Private Members:
Rno //Data member to store Room No
RName //Data member to store customer name
Charges //Data member to store per day charges Days //Data member to store a number of days of stay
COMPUTE( ) //A function to calculate and return Amount as
//Days*Chagres and if the value of Days*Charges is more than 5000 then as 1.02*Days*Charges

Public Members:
Getinfo( ) //A function to enter the content Rno, Name, Charges //and Days Displayinfo( ) //A function to display Rno, RName, Charges, Days and
// Amount (Amount to displayed by calling function COMPUTE())
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
class RESORT
{
private:
int Rno,Days,Charges;
char Rname[20];
int compute( )
{
if (Days * Charges >5000)
return (Days * Charges * 1.02);
else
return(Days * Charges);
}
public:
getinfo( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter customer name :”;
cin>>Rname;
cout<<“\nEnter charges per day :”;
cin>>Charges;
cout<<“\nEnter Number of days :”;
cin>>Days;
cout<<“\nEnter Room Number :”;
cin>>Rno;
}
dispinfo( )
{
cout<<“\nRoom Number : “<<Rno;
cout<<“\nCustomer name :
“<<Rname;
cout«”\nCharges per day :
“<<Charges;
cout<<“\nNumber of days :
“<<Days;
cout<<“\nTotal Amount :
“<<compute( );
}
};
int main( )
{
RESORT Obj;
Obj.getinfo( );
Obj.dispinfo( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 16

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 7.
Answer:
struct pno
{
int pin;
float balance;
}
Create a BankAccount class with the following specifications

protected members
pno_obj //array of 10 elements
init(pin) // to accept the pin number and initialize it and initialize
// the balance amount is 0

public members
deposit(pin, amount):
Increment the account balance by accepting the amount and pin. Check the pin number for matching. If it matches increment the balance and display the balance else display an appropriate message withdraw(self, pin, amount):
Decrement the account balance by accepting the amount and pin. Check the pin number for matching and balance is greater than 1000 and amount is less than the balance. If it matches withdraw the amount and display the balance else display an appropriate message
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
struct pno
{
int pin;
float balance;
};
class BankAccount
{
public:
pno pno_obj[10];
void deposit(int pn,float amt)
{
for(int i=0;i<10;i++)
if(pno_obj[i].pin == pn)
{
pno_obj[i].balance = pno_obj[i].balance + amt;
cout<<“\nTransaction successful!
cout<<“\nBalance amount in your account is”<< pno_obj[i].balance; break;
}
void withdraw(int self,int pn,float amt)
{
for(int i=0;i<10;i++)
{
if(pno_obj[i].pin== pn)
{
if (pno_obj[i].balance>1000 && amt < pno_obj[i].balance)
{
pno_obj[i].balance=pno_obj[i]. balance- amt;
cout<<“\nTransaction successful”;
cout<<“\nBalance amount in your account is “<< pno_obj[i].balance; break;
}
} }
}
};
int main( )
{
int pin_no, tamt;
BankAccount b;
// initialization of objects with pin and balance amount as 0
for(int i=0;i<10;i++)
{
b.pno_obj[i].pin=i+l;
}
int choice;
while(choice !=3)
{
cout <<“\n1. Deposit”;
cout <<“\n2.Withdrawal”;
cout<<“\n3.Exit”;
cout<<“\nEnter your choice “; cin >>choice;
switch(choice)
{
case 1:
cout<<“\nEnter PIN
cin>>pin_no;
cout<<“\nEnter Deposit amount”;
cin>>tamt;
b.deposit(pin_no,tamt); break;

case 2:
cout<<“\nEnter PIN cin>>pin_no;
cout<<“\nEnter Withdrawal amount”;
cin>>tamt;
cout<<“\nEnter 1 for Self 2 for Others :”;
int type;
cin>>type;
b.withdraw(type,pin_no,tamt); break;
default: cout<<“\nTransaction completed”;
}
}
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 17

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 8.
Define a class Hotel in C++ with the following description:
Answer:
Private Members:
Rno //Data member to store Room No
Name //Data member t store customer name
Charges //Data member to store per day charges
Days //Data member to store number of days of stay
Calculate() //A function to calculate and return Amount as
//Days*Chagres and if the value of Days*Charges is more than 12000 then as 1.2*Days*Charges

Public Members:
Hotel( ) //to initialize the class members
Getinfo( ) //A function to enter the content Rno, Name, Charges //and Days
Showinfo( ) //A function to display Rno, RName, Charges, Days and
//Amount (Amount to displayed by calling function CALCULATE( ))
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
class Hotel
private:
int Rno,Days,Charges;
char Name[20];
1 int Calculate( )
{
if (Days * Charges >12000)
return (Days * Charges * 1.02);
else
return(Days * Charges);
}
public:
Hotel( )
{
Rno=0;
Days=0;
Charges=0;
strcpy(Name,””);
}
void Getinfo( )
{
cout<<“nEnter customer name :”;
cin>>Name;
cout<<“nEnter charges per day : “;
cin>>Charges;
cout<<“\nEnter Number of days :”;
cin>>Days;
cout<<“\nEnter Room Number :”;
cin>>Rno;
}
void Showinfo( )
{
cout<<“\nRoom Number: “<<Rno;
cout<<“\nCustomer name : “<<Name;
cout<<“\nCharges per day : “<<Charges;
cout<<“\nNumber of days : “<<Days;
cout<<“\nTota! Amount: “<<Calculate( );
}
};
int main( )
{
Hotel obj;
obj.Getinfo( );
obj.Showinfo( )
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 18

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 9.
Define a class Exam in C++ with the following description:
Answer:
Private Members:
Rollno – Integer data type
Cname – 25 characters
Mark – Integer data type

public:
Exam(int,char[],int) //to initialize the object ~Exam() // display message “Result will be intimated shortly”
void Display( ) // to display all the details if the mark is above 60 other wise display “Result Withheld”
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
class Exam
{
private:
int Rollno,Mark;
char Cname[25];
public:
Exam(int r,char n[25],int m)
{
Rollno = r;
Mark = m;
strcpy(Cname,n);
}
~Exam( )
{
cout<<“\n\nResult will be intimated shortly”;
}
void Display( )
{
if (Mark>60)
{
cout<<“\n\nRoll Number : “<<Rollno;
cout<<“\nCandidate name : “<<Cname;
cout<<“\nMark :”<<Mark;
}
else
{
cout<<“\n\nRoll Number : “<<Rollno;
cout<<“\nCandidate name : “<<Cname;
cout<<“\nResult Withheld”;
}
}
};
int main( )
{
Exam obj 1(1011,”SURYA”,78),obj2( 1012,”JOHN”,44);
objl.Display( );
obj2. Display( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 19

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 10.
Define a class Student in C++ with the following specification:
Answer:
Private Members:
A data member Rno(Registration Number) type long
A data member Cname of type string A data member Agg_marks (Aggregate Marks) of type float
A data member Grade of type char
A member function setGrade () to find the grade as per the aggregate marks obtained by the student. Equivalent aggregate marks range and the respective grade as shown below.
Aggregate Marks -Grade
>=90 – A
Less than 90 and >=75 – B
Less than 75 and >=50 – C
Less than 50 – D
Public members:
A constructor to assign default values to data members:
A copy constructor to store the value in another object
Rno=0, Cname=”N.A” Agg_marks=0,0
A function Getdata ( ) to allow users to enter values for Rno.Cname, Aggjnarks and call functionsetGrade ( ) to find the grade.
A function dispResult( ) to allow user to view the content of all the data members.
A destructor to display the message “END”
PROGRAM .
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
#include<iomanip>
class Student
{
private:
long Rno;
char Cname[25],Grade;
float Agg_marks;
void Setgrade()
{
if (Ag g_ma rks >=90)
Grade = ‘A’;
else if(Agg_marks>=75)
Grade = ‘B’;
else if(Agg_marks>=50)
Grade = ‘C’;.
else
Grade = ‘D’;
}
public:
Student( )
{
Rno = 0;
Agg_marks = 0;
strcpy(Cname,””);
Grade=”;
}
Student(Student &s) .
{
Rno = s.Rno;
Agg_marks = s.Agg_marks;
strcpy(Cname,s.Cname);
Grade=s.Grade;

~Student( )
{
cout<<“\nEND”; >
void Getdata( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter Register Number”;
cin>>Rno;
cout<<“\nEnter Candidate Name
cin>>Cname;
cout<<“\nEnter Aggrigate Mark”;
cin>>Agg_marks;
Setgrade( );
}
void dispResult( )
{
cout<<setw(30)<<“Candidate Register Number
“<<Rno<<endl<<endl;
cout< <setw(30)<< “Candidate Name : “<<Cname<<endk<endI;
cout<<setw(30)<<“Aggrigate Mark : “<<Agg_marks«endk<endl;
cout<<setw(30)<<“Grade :
“<<Grade<<endk<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
Student s1;
s1.Getdata( );
Student s2(s1);
COut<<“\nFIRST CANDIDATE DETAIL \n\n”; s1.dispResult( );
cout<<“\nSECOND CANDIDATE DETAIL \n\n”;
s2.dispResult( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 20

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Thermodynamics Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

11th Chemistry Guide Thermodynamics Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textual Questions:

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
The amount of heat exchanged with the surrounding at constant temperature and pressure is given by the quantity
(a) ∆E
(b) ∆H
(c) ∆S
(d) ∆G
Answer:
(b) ∆H

Question 2.
All the naturally occurring processes proceed spontaneously in a direction which leads to
(a) decrease in entropy
(b) increase in enthalpy
(c) increase in free energy
(d) decrease in free energy
Answer:
(d) decrease in free energy

Question 3.
In an adiabatic process, which of the following is true?
(a) q = w
(b) q = 0
(c) ∆E = q
(d) P∆V = 0
Answer:
(b) q = 0

Question 4.
In a reversible process, the change in entropy of the universe is
(a) > 0
(b) ≥ 0
(c) <0
(d) = 0
Answer:
(d) = 0

Question 5.
In an adiabatic expansionof an ideal gas
(a) w = – ∆U
(b) w = ∆U + ∆H
(c) ∆U = 0
(d) w = 0
Answer:
(a) w = – ∆U

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 6.
The intensive property among the quantities below is
(a) mass
(b) volume
(c) enthalpy
(d) mass/volume
Answer:
(d) mass/volume

Question 7.
An ideal gas expands from the volume of 1 × 10-3 m3 to 1 × 10-2 m3 at 300 K against a constant pressure at 1 × 105 Nm-2. The work done is
(a) -900 J
(b) 900 kJ
(c) 270 kJ
(d) – 900 kJ
Answer:
(a) -900 J

Question 8.
Heat of combustion is always
(a) positive
(b) negative
(c) zero
(d) either positive or negative
Answer:
(b) negative

Question 9.
The heat of formation of CO and CO2 are -26.4 kCal and -94 kCal, respectively. Heat of combustion of carbon monoxide will be
(a) + 26.4 kcal
(b) – 67.6 kcal
(c) – 120.6 kcal
(d) + 52.8 kcal
Answer:
(b) – 67.6 kcal

Question 10.
C(diamond) → C(graphite), ∆H = -ve, this indicates that
(a) graphite is more stable than diamond
(b) graphite has more energy than diamond
(c) both are equally stable
(d) stability cannot be predicted
Answer:
(a) graphite is more stable than diamond

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 11.
The enthalpies of formation of Al2O3 and Cr2O3 are – 1596 kJ and – 1134 kJ, respectively.
∆H for the reaction 2Al + Cr2O3 → 2Cr + Al2O3 is
(a) – 1365 kJ
(b) 2730 kJ
(c) – 2730 kJ
(d) -462 kJ
Answer:
(d) -462 kJ

Question 12.
Which of the following is not a thermodynamic function?
(a) internal energy
(b) enthalpy
(c) entropy
(d) frictional energy
Answer:
(d) frictional energy

Question 13.
If one mole of ammonia and one mole of hydrogen chloride are mixed in a closed container to form ammonium chloride gas, then
(a) ∆H > ∆U
(b) ∆H – ∆U=0
(c) ∆H + ∆U=0
(d) ∆H < ∆U
Answer:
(d) ∆H < ∆U

Question 14.
Change in internal energy, when 4 kJ of work is done on the system and 1 kJ of heat is given out by the system is
(a) +1 kJ
(b) -5 kJ
(c) +3 kJ
(d) -3 kJ
Answer:
(c) +3 kJ

Question 15.
The work done by the liberated gas when 55.85 g of iron (molar mass 55.85 g mol-1) reacts with hydrochloric acid in an open beaker at 25°C
(a) – 2.48 kJ
(b) – 2.22 kJ
(c) + 2.22 kJ
(d) + 2.48 kJ
Answer:
(a) – 2.48 kJ

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 16.
The value of ∆H for cooling 2 moles of an ideal monatomic gas from 1250°C to 250°C at constant pressure will be [given Cp = \(\frac{5}{2}\)R]
(a) – 250 R
(b) – 500 R
(c) 500 R
(d) + 250 R
Answer:
(b) – 500 R

Question 17.
Given that C(g) + O2(g) → CO2(g) ∆H° = – a kJ;
2 CO(g) + O2(g) → 2CO2(g) ∆H° = -b kJ; Calculate the ∆H° for the reaction C(g) + ½O2(g) → CO(g)
(a) \(\frac{b+2 a}{2}\)
(b) 2a – b

(c) \(\frac{2 a-b}{2}\)

(d) \(\frac{b-2 a}{2}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{b-2 a}{2}\)

Question 18.
When 15.68 litres of a gas mixture of methane and propane are fully combusted at 0° C and 1 atmosphere, 32 litres of oxygen at the same temperature and pressure are consumed. The amount of heat of released from this combustion in kJ is (∆HC(CH4)) = – 890 kJ mol and ∆HC(C3H8) = – 2220 kJ mol-1)
(a) -889 kJ
(b) -1390 kJ
(c) -3180 kJ
(d) -632.68 kJ
Answer:
(d) -632.68 kJ

Question 19.
The bond dissociation energy of methane and ethane are 360 kJ mol-1 and 620 kJ mol-1 respectively. Then, the bond dissociation energy of C-C bond is
(a) 170 kJ mol-1
(b) 50 kJ mol-1
(c) 80 kJ mol-1
(d) 220 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(c) 80 kJ mol-1

Question 20.
The correct thermodynamic conditions for the spontaneous reaction at all temperature is
(a) ∆H < 0 and ∆S > 0
(b) ∆H < 0 and ∆S < 0
(c) ∆H > 0 and ∆S = 0
(d) ∆H > 0 and ∆S > 0
Answer:
(a) ∆H < 0 and ∆S > 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 21.
The temperature of the system, decreases in an
(a) Isothermal expansion
(b) Isothermal Compression
(c) adiabatic expansion
(d) adiabatic compression
Answer:
(c) adiabatic expansion

Question 22.
In an isothermal reversible compression of an ideal gas the sign of q, ∆S and w are respectively
(a) +, -, –
(b) -, +, –
(c) +, -, +
(d) -, -, +
Answer:
(d) -, -, +

Question 23.
Molar heat of vapourisation of a liquid is 4.8 kJ mol-1 If the entropy change is 16 J mol-1 K-1. the boiling point of the liquid is
(a) 323 K
(b) 27°C
(c) 164 K
(d) 0.3 K
Answer:
(b) 27°C

Question 24.
∆S is expected to be maximum for the reaction
(a) Ca(S) + 1/2 O2(g) → CaO(S)
(b) C(S) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
(c) N2(g) + O2(g) → 2NO(g)
(d) CaCO3(S) → CaO(S) + CO2(g)
Answer:
(d) CaCO3(S) → CaO(S) + CO2(g)

Question 25.
The values of ∆H and ∆S for a reaction are respectively 30 kJ mol-1 and 100 JK-1 mol-1. Then the temperature above which the reaction will become spontaneous is
(a) 300 K
(b) 30 K
(c) 100 K
(d) 20°C
Answer:
(a) 300 K

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

II. Write brief answers to the following questions:

Question 26.
State the first law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
The first law of thermodynamics, known as the law of conservation of energy, states that the total energy of an isolated system remains constant though it may change from one foim to another.
The mathematical statement of the First Law as:
∆U = q + w
where q – the amount of heat supplied to the system; w – work done on the system.

Question 27.
Define Hess’s law of constant heat summation.
Answer:
The heat changes in chemical reactions are equal to the difference in internal energy (∆U) or heat content (∆H) of the products and reactants, depending upon whether the reaction is studied at constant volume or constant pressure. Since ∆U and ∆H are functions of the state of the system, the heat evolved or absorbed in a given reaction depends only on the initial state and final state of the system and not on the path or the steps by which the change takes place.

Question 28.
Explain intensive properties with two examples.
Answer:
The property that is independent of the mass or the size of the system is called an intensive property. Refractive index, Surface tension, density, temperature, Boiling point, Freezing point, molar volume.

Question 29.
Define the following terms:
(a) isothermal process
(b) adiabatic process
(c) isobaric process
(d) isochoric process
Answer:
a. An isothermal process is defined as one in which the temperature of the system remains constant, during the change from its initial to final state. The system exchanges heat with its surrounding and the temperature of the system remains constant. For an isothermal process dT = 0.

b. An adiabatic process is defined as one in which there is no exchange of heat (q) between the system and surrounding during the process. Those processes in which no heat can flow into or out of the system are called adiabatic processes.

c. An isobaric process is defined as one in which the pressure of the system remains constant
during its change from the initial to final state.
For an isobaric process dP = 0.

d. An isochoric process is defined as the one in which the volume of system remains constant during its change from initial to final state. Combustion of a fuel in a bomb calorimeter is an example of an isochoric process.
For an isochoric process, dV= 0.

Question 30.
What is the usual definition of entropy? What is the unit of entropy?
Answer:
Entropy is a measure of the molecular disorder (randomness) of a system.
The thermodynamic definition of entropy is concerned with the change in entropy that occurs as a result of a process.
It is defined as, dS = dqrev /T

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 31.
Predict the feasibility of a reaction when
(i) both ∆H and ∆S positive
(ii) both ∆H and ∆S negative
(iii) ∆H decreases but ∆S increases
Answer:
(i) ∆Hr = + ve, ∆S = + ve; non-spontaneous at low temperature spontaneous at high temperature
(ii) ∆Hr = – ve, ∆S = – ve; spontaneous at low temperature non-spontaneous at high temperature
(iii) ∆H decreases but ∆S increases = Spontaneous at all temperature.

Question 32.
Define is Gibb’s free energy.
Answer:
G is expressed as G = H – TS, free energy change of a process is given by the relation
∆G = ∆H – T∆S.

Question 33.
Define enthalpy of combustion.
Answer:
The heat of combustion of a substance is defined as “The change in enthalpy of a system when one mole of the substance is completely burnt in excess of air or oxygen”. It is denoted by ∆HC.

Question 34.
Define molar heat capacity. Give its unit.
Answer:
The heat capacity for 1 mole of substance, is called molar heat capacity (cm). It is defined as “The amount of heat absorbed by one mole of the substance to raise its temperature by 1 kelvin”.
The SI unit of molar heat capacity is JK-1 mol-1

Question 35.
Define the calorific value of food. What is the unit of calorific value?
Answer:
The calorific value is defined as the amount of heat produced in calories (or joules) when one gram of the substance is completely burnt. The SI unit of calorific value is J kg-1. However, it is usually expressed in cal g-1.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 36.
Define enthalpy of neutralization.
Answer:
The heat of neutralisation is defined as “The change in enthalpy when one gram equivalent of an acid is completely neutralised by one gram equivalent of a base or vice versa in dilute solution”.
HCl(aq) + NaOH(aq) → NaCl(aq) + H2O1
∆H = – 57.32 kJ

Question 37.
What is lattice energy?
Answer:
Lattice energy is defined as the amount of energy required to completely remove the constituent ions from its crystal lattice to an infinite distance. It is also referred as lattice enthalpy.

Question 38.
What are state and path functions? Give two examples.
Answer:
State function:
A state function is a thermodynamic property of a system, which has a specific value for a given state and does not depend on the path (or manner) by which the particular state is reached.
Example:
Pressure (P), Volume (V), Temperature(T), Internal energy (U), Enthalpy (H), free energy (G) etc.
Path functions:
A path function is a thermodynamic property of the system whose value depends on the path by which the system changes from its initial to final states.
Example:
Work (w), Heat (q).

Question 39.
Give Kelvin statement of second law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
It is impossible to construct a machine that absorbs heat from a hot source and converts it completely into work by a cyclic process without transferring a part of heat to a cold sink.

Question 40.
The equilibrium constant of a reaction is 10, what will be the sign of ∆G? Will this reaction be spontaneous?
Answer:
∆G = -2.303 RT logKeq
Substituting the known values of R, T and Keq
R = 8.314(JK-1 mol-1)
T = 300 K
Keq = 10
∆G = –2.303 8.314(JK-1) 300(K) log 10
= -5744.14 J/mol
= -5.744 KJ/mol
∆G < 0, then it is spontaneous.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 41.
Enthalpy of neutralization is always a constant when a strong acid is neutralized by a strong base: account for the statement.
Answer:
It is because in dilution solution all strong acids and strong bases are completely ionized. The neutralization of strong acid and strong bases are completely ionized. The neutralization of a strong acid and strong base simply involves the combination of H+ ions (from acid) and OH ions (from base) to form unionized water molecules with the evolution of 57.1 kJ heat.
H+(aq) + OH(aq) → H2O(l),
2H° = -57.1 kJ
Since the same reaction takes place during neutralization of all strong acids and strong bases, the value of enthalpy of neutralization is constant.

Question 42.
State the third law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
The third law of thermodynamics states that the entropy of pure crystalline substance at absolute zero is zero. Otherwise it can be stated as it is impossible to lower the temperature of an object to absolute zero in a finite number of steps. Mathematically,
limT→0 S = 0 for a perfectly ordered crystalline state.

Question 43.
Write down the Born-Haber cycle for the formation of CaCl2.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 1
Step 1:
Solid calcium is converted to gaseous state (Enthalpy of atomization)
Ca(S) → Ca(g) Ca(g)                         ∆H°a = 178 KJ/mol
Step 2:
The calcium is converted to ionic form
(divalent cation): (Ionisation enthalpy)
Ca → Ca+ + e                          ∆H°IE = 590 kJ
Ca → Ca2+ + e                        ∆H°IE = 590 KJ
Step 3:
Atomisation of chlorine molecule to chlorine atom: (Atomisation enthalpy)
\(\frac{1}{2}\)Cl2 → Cl               ∆H°Cl-Cl = 121 KJ
For two chlorine atoms required, atomistion energy = 2 × 121 = 242 KJ/mol
Step 4:
Convrsion of chlorine atom into ion:(Electron affinity)
Cl + e → Cl;                           ∆H°ea = – 364KJ
Step 5:
Finally the two ions join together by lattice energy as: (here two Cl ions are involved)
Ca2+ + 2Cl → CaCl2

Hence Lattice energy = Heat of formation – heat of atomization – dissociation energy – (sum of ionization energies) – (sum of electron affinities)
Since, heat of formation (i.e standard enthalpy of formation ) of CaCl2 = – 796KJ/mol
Lattice energy = -796 -178 -242 -(590 + 1145) – (2 × – 364) = -2223KJ/mol

Question 44.
Identify the state and path functions out of the following: (a) Enthalpy (b) Entropy (c) Heat (d) Temperature (e) Work (f) Free energy.
Answer:
State function:
Enthalpy, Temperature, Free energy, Entropy
Path function:
Work, Heat.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 45.
State the various statements of second law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
Entropy statement:
The second law of thermodynamics can be expressed in terms of entropy, i.e “the entropy of an isolated system increases during a spontaneous process”.

Kelvin-Planck statement:
It is impossible to construct a machine that absorbs heat from a hot source and converts it completely into work by a cyclic process without transferring a part of heat to a cold sink.

Clausius statement:
It is impossible to transfer heat from a cold reservoir to a hot reservoir without doing some work.

Question 46.
What are spontaneous reactions? What are the conditions for the spontaneity of a process?
Answer:

  1. A reaction that occurs under the given set of conditions without any external driving force is called a spontaneous reaction.
  2. The spontaneity of any process depends on three different factors.
  3. If the enthalpy change of a process is negative, then the process is exothermic and may be spontaneous. (∆H is negative)
  4. If the entropy change of a process is positive, then the process may occur spontaneously. (∆S is positive)
  5. The gibbs free energy which is the combination of the above two (∆H – T∆S) should be negative for a reaction to occur spontaneously, i.e. the necessary condition for a reaction to be spontaneous is ∆H – T∆S < 0
  6. For spontaneous process,
    ∆Stotal > 0, ∆G < 0, ∆S < 0

Question 47.
List the characteristics of internal energy.
Answer:
The internal energy of a system is an extensive property. It depends on the amount of the substances present in the system. If the amount is doubled, the internal energy is also doubled.

The internal energy of a system is a state function. It depends only upon the state variables (T, P, V, n) of the system. The change in internal energy does not depend on the path by which the final state is reached.

The change in internal energy of a system is expressed as ∆U = Uf – Ui.
In a cyclic process, there is no internal energy change. ∆U(cyclic) = 0

If the internal energy of the system in the final state (Uf) is less than the internal energy of the system in its initial state (Ui), then ∆U would be negative.
∆U = Uf – Ui = -ve(Uf < Ui)

If the internal energy of the system in the final state (Uf) is greater than the internal energy of the system in its initial state (Ui), then ∆U would be positive.
∆U = Uf – Ui = + ve(Uf > Ui).

Question 48.
Explain how heat absorbed at constant volume is measured using bomb calorimeter with a neat diagram.
Answer:
Calorimeter is used for measuring the amount of heat change in a chemical or physical change. In calorimetry, the temperature change in the process is measured which is directly proportional to the heat capacity. By using the expression C = \(\frac{q}{m \Delta T}\), we can calculate the amount of heat change in the process. Calorimetric measurements are made under two different conditions
(i) At constant volume (qV)
(ii) At constant pressure (qp)
(A) ∆U Measurements:
For chemical reactions, heat evolved at constant volume, is measured in a bomb calorimeter.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 2

The inner vessel (the bomb) and its cover are made of strong steel. The cover is fitted tightly to the vessel by means of metal lid and screws.

A weighed amount of the substance is taken in a platinum cup connected with electrical wires for striking an arc instantly to kindle combustion. The bomb is then tightly closed and pressurized with excess oxygen. The bomb is immersed in water, in the inner volume of the calorimeter. A stirrer is placed in the space between the wall of the calorimeter and the bomb, so that water can be stirred, uniformly. The reaction is started by striking the substance through electrical heating.

A known amount of combustible substance is burnt in oxygen in the bomb. Heat evolved during the reaction is absorbed by the calorimeter as well as the water in which the bomb is immersed. The change in temperature is measured using a Beckman thermometer. Since the bomb is sealed its volume does not change and hence the heat measurements is equal to the heat of combustion at a constant volume (∆U)c.

The amount of heat produced in the reaction (∆U)c is, equal to the sum of the heat abosrbed by the calorimeter and water.
Heat absorbed by the calorimeter
q1 = k.∆T
where k is a calorimeter constant equal to mc Cc ( me is mass of the calorimeter and Cc is heat capacity of calorimeter)
Heat absorbed by the water q2 = mw Cw ∆T
where mw is molar mass of water
Cw is molar heat capacity of water (4,184 kJ K-1 mol-1)
Therefore ∆Uc = q1 + q2
= k.∆T + mw Cw ∆T
= (k + mw Cw)∆T

Calorimeter constant can be determined by burning a known mass of standard sample (benzoic acid) for which the heat of combustion is known (-3227 kJ mol-1). The enthalpy of combustion at constant pressure of the substance is calculated from the equation
∆H°c (pressure) = ∆U°c (Vol) + ∆ngRT

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 49.
Calculate the work involved in expansion and 1 compression process.
Answer:
Work involved in expansion and compression processes:
In most thermodynamic calculations we are dealing with the evaluation of work involved in the expansion or compression of gases. The essential condition for expansion or compression of a system; is that there should be difference between external pressure (Pext) and internal pressure (Pint).

For understanding pressure-volume work, let us consider a cylinder which contains V moles of an ideal gas fitted with a frictionless piston of cross sectional area A. The total volume of the gas inside is V and pressure of the gas inside is Pint. If the external pressure Pext is greater than Pint, the piston moves inward till the pressure inside becomes equal to Pext. Let this change be achieved in a single step
and the final volume be Vf.In this case, the work is done on the system (+w). It can be calculated as follows
w = -F.∆x ……….(1)
where dx is the distance moved by the piston during the compression and F is the force acting on the gas.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 3

F = PextA ……….(2)
Substituting (2) in (1)
w = – Pext. A. ∆x
A .∆x = change in volume = Vf – Vi
w = -Pext.{Vf – Vi) ……….(3)
w = -Pext. (-∆V) …………(4)
= Pext.∆V

Since work is done on the system, it is a positive quantity.
If the pressure is not constant, but changes during the process such that it is always infinitesimally greater than the pressure of the gas, then, at each stage of compression, the volume decreases by an infinitesimal amount, dV. In such a case we can calculate the work donp on the gas by therelation
Wrev = – \(\int_{V_{i}}^{v_{f}}\) pext dV.
In a compression process, Pext the external pressure is always greater than the pressure of the system.
i.e., Pext = (Pint + dP)
In an expansion process, the external pressure is always less than the pressure of the system
i.e., Pext = (Pint – dP)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 4

When pressure is not constant and changes in infinitesimally small steps (reversible conditions) during compression from Vi to Vf. the P-V plot looks like in figure. Work done on the gas is represented by the shaded area.
In general case we can write,
Pext = (Pint ± dP). Such processes are called reversible processes. For a compression process work can be related to internal pressure of the system under reversible conditions by writing equation
Wrev = – \(\int_{V_{i}}^{v_{f}}\) Pint dV
For a given system with an ideal gas
Pint V = nRT
pint = \(\frac{n R T}{V}\)
Wrev = – \(\int_{V_{i}}^{v_{f}}\) \(\frac{n R T}{V}\) dV
Wrev = – nRTln(\(\frac{V_{f}}{V_{i}}\))
Wrev= -2.303nRTlog\(\frac{V_{f}}{V_{i}}\) ………….(5)

If Vf > Vi (expansion), the sign of work done by the process is negative.
If Vf < Vi (compression) the sign of work done on the process is positive.

Question 50.
Derive the relation between ∆H and ∆U for an ideal gas. Explain each term involved in the equation.
Answer:
When the system at constant pressure undergoes changes from an initial state with H1, U1 and V1 to a final state with H2, U2 and V2 the change in enthalpy
∆H, can be calculated as follows:
H =U + PV
In the initial state
H1 = U1 + PV1 ………………(1)
In the final state
H2 = U2 + PV2 ……………..(2)
change in enthalpy is (2) – (1)
(H2 – H1) = (U2 – U1) + P(V2 – V1)
∆H = ∆U + P∆V ………………..(3)
As per first law of thermodynamics,
∆U = q + w
Equation (3) becomes
∆H = q + w+P∆V
w = -P∆V
∆H = qp – P∆V + P∆V
∆H = qp ………….(4)
qp – is the heat absorbed at constant pressure and is considered as heat content.
Consider a closed system of gases which are chemically reacting to form gaseous products at constant temperatureand pressure with Vi and Vf,as the total volumes of the reactant and product gases respectively, and niand nfas the number of moles of gaseous reactants and products, then,
For reactants (initial state):
PVi = niRT ………..(5)
For products (final state):
PVf = nfRT ……………..(6)
(6) – (5)
P{Vf – Vi) = (nf – ni)RT
P∆V = ∆n(g) RT ………..(7)
Substituting in (7) in (3)
∆H = ∆U+ ∆n(g)RT …………….(8)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 51.
Suggest and explain an indirect method to calculate lattice enthalpy of sodium chloride crystal.
Answer:
The formation of NaCl can be considered in five steps. The sum of the enthalpy changes of these steps is equal to the enthalpy change for the overall reaction from which the lattice enthalpy of NaCl is calculated.
Let us calculate the lattice energy of sodium chloride using Bom-Haber cycle
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 5
∆H = heat of formation of sodium chloride = -411.3 kJmol-1
∆H1 = heat of sublimation of Na(s) = 108.7 kJmol-1
∆H2 = ionisation energy of Na(s) = 495. kJ mol-1
∆H3 = dissociation energy of Cl2(g) = 244 kJ mol-1
∆H4 = Electron affinity of Cl(g) = -349 kJ mol-1
U = lattice energy of NaCl
∆Hf = ∆H1 + ∆H2 + ∆H3 + ∆H4 + U
∴ U = (∆Hf ) – (∆H1 + ∆H2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)∆H3 + ∆H4)
=» U = (-411.3) – (108.7 + 495.0 + 122 – 349)
U = (-411.3) – (376.7)
∴ U = -788kJ mol-1

Question 52.
List the characteristics of Gibbs free energy.
Answer:
(i) G is defined as (H-TS) where H and S are the enthalpy and entropy of the system respectively. T = temperature. Since H and S are state functions, G is a state function.
(ii) G is an extensive property while ∆G = (G2 – G1) which is the free energy change between the initial (1) and final (2) states of the system becomes the intensive property when mass remains constant between initial and final states (or) when the system is a closed system.
(iii) G has a single value for the thermodynamic state of the system.
(iv) G and ∆G values correspond to the system only. There are three cases of ∆G in predicting the nature of the process. When, ∆G < 0 (negative), the process is spontaneous and feasible; ∆G = 0. The process is in equilibrium and ∆G > 0 (positive), the process is nonspontaneous and not feasible.
(v) ∆G = ∆H – T∆S. But according to I law of thermodynamics,
∆H = ∆G + P∆V and ∆U = q + w
∴ ∆G = q + w + P∆V – T∆S
But ∆S = \(\frac{T}{q}\) and T∆S = q = heat involved in the process.
∴ ∆G = q + w + P∆V – q = w + P∆V
(or) – ∆G = – w – P∆V = network.
The decrease in free energy – ∆G, accompanying a process taking place at constant temperature and pressure is equal to the maximum obtainable work from the system other than work of expansion.
This quantity is called as the “net work” of the system and it is equal to (- w – P∆V).
∴ Network = – w – P∆V
-∆G represents all others forms of work obtainable from the system such as electrical, chemical or surface work etc other than P-V work.

Question 53.
Calculate the work done when 2 moles of an ideal gas expands reversibly and isothermally from a volume of 500 ml to a volume of 2 L at 25°C and normal pressure.
Solution:
Given
n = 2 moles
Vi = 500 ml = 0.5 lit
Vf = 2 lit
T = 25°C = 298 K
w = -2303 nRTIog (\(\frac{V_{f}}{V_{i}}\))
w = -2.303 × 2 × 8.314 × 298 × log (4)
w = -2.303 × 2 × 8.314 × 298 × 0.6021
w = -6871 J
w = -6.871 kJ.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 54.
In a constant volume calorimeter, 3.5 g of a gas with molecular weight 28 was burnt in excess oxygen at 298 K. The temperature of the calorimeter was found to increase from 298 K to 298.45 K due to the combustion process. Given that the calorimeter constant is 2.5kJ K-1. Calculate the enthalpy of combustion of the gas in kJ mol-1.
Solution: Given
Ti = 298 K
Tf = 298.45 K
k = 2.5 kJ K-1
m = 3.5g
Mm = 28
heat evolved = k∆T
= k(Tf – Ti)
= 2.5KJ K-1 (298.45 – 298)K = 1.125 kJ
∆Hc = \(\frac{1.125}{3.5}\) × 28 kJ mol-1

∆Hc = 9 kJmol-1

Question 55.
Calculate the entropy change in the system, and surroundings, and the total entropy change in the universe during a process in which 245 J of heat flow out of the system at 77°C to the surrounding at 33°C.
Solution:
Given
Tsys = 77° C = (77 + 273) = 350 K
Tsurr = 33°C = (33 + 273) = 360 K
q = 245J

∆Ssys = \(\frac{q}{T_{s y}}=\frac{-245}{350}\) = -0.7 JK-1

∆Ssurr = \(\frac{q}{T_{s \mathrm{sr}}}=\frac{+245}{306}\) = +0.8 JK-1

∆Suniv = ∆Ssys + ∆Ssurr

∆Suniv = -0.7 JK-1 + 0.8 JK-1

∆Suniv = 0.1 JK-1

Question 56.
1 mole of an ideal gas, maintained at 4.1 atm and at a certain temperature, absorbs heat 3710/and expands to 2 litres. Calculate the entropy change in expansion process.
Solution:
Given
n = 1 mole
P = 4.1 atm
V = 2 Lit
T = ?
q = 3710 J
∆S = \(\frac{q}{T}\)

∆S = \(\frac{q}{\frac{p v}{n R}}\)

∆S = \(\frac{n R q}{P V}\)

∆S = \(\frac{1 \times 0.082 \text { lit atm } K^{-1} \times 3710 J}{4.1 \text { atm } \times 2 \text { lit }}\)

∆S = 37.10 JK-1

Question 57.
30.4 kJ is required to melt one mole of sodium chloride. The entropy change during melting is 28.4 JK-1 mol-1. Calculate the melting point of sodium chloride.
Answer:
Given,
∆Hf(NaCl) = 30.4 kJ = 30400 J mol-1
∆Sf(NaCl) = 28.4 JK-1 mol-1
∆S-1 = \(\frac{\Delta H_{f}}{T_{f}}\)

Tf = \(\frac{\Delta H_{f}}{\Delta S_{f}}\)

Tf = \(\frac{30400 J m o l^{-1}}{28.4 J K^{-1} m o l^{-1}}\)

Tf = 1070.4 K

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 58.
Calculate the standard heat of formation of propane, if its heat of combustion is -2220.2 kJ mol-1. The heats of formation of CO2(g) and H2O(1) are -393.5 and -285.8 kJ mol-1 respectively.
Solution:
Given:
C3H8 + 5O2 → 3CO2 + 4H2O
∆H°C = 2220.2kJ mol-1 ……………..(1)
C + O2 → CO2
∆H°f = -393.5 kf mol-1 ……….(2)
H2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2 → H2O
∆H°f = -285.8 kJ mol-1 ……………(3)
3C + 4H2 → C3H8
∆H°c =?
(2) × (3)
⇒ 3C + 3O2 → 3CO2
∆H°f = -1180.5 kJ ………..(4)
(3)× (4)
⇒ 4H2 + 2O2 → 4H2O
∆H°f = 1143.2 kJ ……..(5)
(4) + (5) – (1)
⇒ 3C + 3O2 + 4H2 + 2O2 + 3CO2 + 4H2O → 3CO2 + 4H2O + C3H8 + 5O2
∆H°f = -1180.5 – 1143.2 – (-2220.2) kJ
3C + 4H2 → C3H8
∆H°f = -103.5 kJ
Standard heat of formation of propane is ∆H°f(C3H8) = -103.5 kJ

Question 59.
You are given normal boiling points and standard enthalpies of vapourisation. Calculate the entropy of vapourisation of liquids listed below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 6
Answer:
For ethanol
Given:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 7

Question 60.
For the reaction Ag2O(s) → 2Ag(s)+12O2(g) ∆H = 30.56 kJ mol-1 and ∆S = 6.66JK-1 mol-1 (at 1 atm). Calculate the temperature at which G is equal to zero. Also predict the direction of the reaction (I) at this temperature and (ii) below this temperature.
Solution:
Given,
∆H = 30.56 kJ mol-1
∆S = 6.66 x 10-3 kJK-1 mol-1
T = ? at which ∆G =0
∆G = ∆H – T∆S
0 = ∆H – T∆S
T = \(\frac{\Delta H}{\Delta S}\)

T = \(\frac{30.56 \mathrm{~kJ} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{66.6 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~kJ} K^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
T = 4589 K

(i) At 4589K;
∆G = 0 the reaction is in equilibrium.
(ii) at temperature below 4598 K
∆H > T∆S
∆G = ∆H – T∆S > 0, the reaction in the forward direction, is non spontaneous. In other words the reaction occurs in the backward direction.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 61.
What is the equilibrium constant Keq for the following reaction at 400K.
2NOCl(g) ⇌ 2NO(g) + Cl2(g), given that ∆H° = 77.2 kJ mol-1 ∆S° = 122 JK-1 mol-1
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 8

Question 62.
Cyanamide (NH2CN) is completely burnt in excess oxygen in a bomb calorimeter, ∆U was found to be -742.4 kJ mol-1, calculate the enthalpy change of the reaction at 298K.
NH2CN(s) + \(\frac{3}{2}\)O2(g) → N2(g) + CO2(g) + H2O (l) ∆H = ?
Solution:
Given
T = 298 K;
∆U = -742.4 kJ mol-1
∆H =?
∆H = ∆U + ∆n(g)RT
∆H = ∆U + (np – nr)RT
∆H = 742.4 + 2 – \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 8.314 × 10-3 × 298
= -742.4 + (0.5 × 8.314 ×10-3 × 298)
=-742.4 + 1.24
= -741.16 kJ mol-1

Question 63.
Calculate the enthalpy of hydrogenation of ethylene from the following data. Bond energies of C – H, C – C, C = C and H – Hare 414, 347, 618 and 435 kJ mol-1.
Solution:
Given
EC-H= 414 kJ mol-1
EC-C= 347 kJ mol-1
EC-C= 6l8 kJ mol-1
EH-H = 435 kJ mol-1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 9
∆Hr = Σ(Bond energy)r – Σ(Bond energy)p
∆Hr = (EC=C + 4EC-H + EH-H) – (EC-C + 6EC-H)
∆Hr = (618 + (4 × 414) + 315) – (347 + (6 ×414))
∆Hr = 2709 – 2831
∆Hr = -122 kJ mol-1

Question 64.
Calculate the lattice energy of CaCl2 from the given data
Ca(s) + Cl2(g) → CaCl2(s) ∆H°f = – 795 kJ mol-1
Atomisation:
Ca(s) → Ca(g) ∆H°1 = -795 kJ mol-1

Ionisation:
Ca(g) → Ca2+(g) + 2e-1
∆H°2 = 2422 kJ mol-1

Dissociation:
Cl2(g) → 2Cl(g)
∆H°3 = + 242.8 kJ mol-1

Electron Affinity:
Cl(g) + e → Cl-1
∆H°4 = -355 kJ mol-1
Answer:
∆Hf = ∆H1 + ∆H2 + ∆H3+∆H4 + u
-795 = 121 + 2422 + 242.8 + (2 × -355) + u
-795 = 2785.8 – 710 + u
-795 = 2075.8 + u
u = -795 – 2075.8
u = -2870.8 kJ mol-1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 65.
Calculate the enthalpy change for the reaction Fe203 + 3C0 – 2Fe + 3C02 from the following data.
2Fe + \(\frac{3}{2}\)O2 → Fe2O3; ∆H = -741 kJ
C + \(\frac{3}{2}\)O2 → CO; ∆H=-137kJ
C + O2 → CO2; ∆H = – 394.5 kJ
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 10

Question 66.
When 1-pentyne (A) is treated with 4N alcoholic KOH at 175°C, it is converted slowly into an equilibrium mixture of 1.3% 1-pentyne(A), 95.2% 2-pentyne(B), and 3.5% of 1,2 pentadiene (C) the equilibrium was maintained at 175°C, calculate ∆G° for the following equilibria.
B ⇌ A; ∆G°1 =?
B ⇌ C; ∆G°2 =?
Solution:
Given
T = 175°
C = 175 + 273 = 448 K
Concentration of 1-pentyne [A] = 1.3%
Concentration of 2-pentyne [B] = 95.2%
Concentration of 1, 2-pentadiene [C] = 3.5%
At equilibrium
B ⇌ A
95.2% 1.3% ⇒
B ⇌ C
95.2% 3.5% ⇒
K2 = \(\frac{3.5}{95.2}\) = 0.0367
⇒ ∆G°1 = -2.303 RTlogK
∆G°1 = – 2.303 × 8.314 × 448 × log 0.0136
∆G°1 = +16010 J
∆G°1 = +16 kJ

⇒ ∆G°2 = – 2.303 RT log K2
∆ G°2 = -2.303 × 8.314 × 448 × log 0.0367
∆ G°2 = +12312J
∆G°2 = +12.312 kJ

Question 67.
At 33K, N2O4 is fifty percent dissociated. Calculate the standard free energy change at this temperature and at one atmosphere.
Solution:
Given
T= 33 K
N2O4 ⇌ 2NO2
Initial concentration: 100%  0
Concentration dissociated 50% – Concentration remaining at equilibrium 50% 100%
Keq = \(\frac{100}{50}\) = 2
∆G° = -2.303 RT log Keq
∆G°= -2.303 × 8.314 × 33 × log 2
∆G° = -190.18 Jmol-1

Question 68.
The standard enthalpies of formation of SO2 and SO3 are – 297 kJ mol-1 and – 396 kJ mol-1 respectively. Calculate the standard enthalpy of reaction for the reaction: SO +4-0 — SO
Solution:
Given
∆H°f(SO2) = – 297 kJ mol-1
∆H°f(SO3) = – 396 kJ mol-1
SO2 + 12O2 → SO3;
∆H°r =?
∆H°r = (∆H°f)compound – Σ( ∆Hf)elements
∆H°r =∆H°r(SO3) – ∆H°f
∆H°r = 396 kJ mol-1– (- 297 kJ mol-1 + 0)
∆H°r = – 396 kJ mol-1 + 297
∆H°r = -99 kJ mol-1

Question 69.
For the reaction at 298 K: 2A + B → C
∆H = 400 Jmol-1; ∆S = 0.2 JK∆ mol-1 Determine the temperature at which the reaction would be spontaneous.
Solution:
Given,
T = 298 ∆T
∆H = 400 J mol-1 = 400 J mol-1
∆S = 0.2 JK-1 mol-1
∆G = ∆H – T∆S
if T = 2000 K
∆G = 400 – (0.2 × 2000) = 0
if T > 2000 K
∆G will be negative. The reaction would be spontaneous only beyond 2000 K

Question 70.
Find out the value of equilibrium constant for the following reaction at 298K,
2NH3 + CO2 ⇌ NH2CONH2 (aq) + H2O (l) Standard Gibbs energy change, ∆G°r at the given temperature is -13.6 kJ mol-1.
Solution:
Given:
T = 298 K
∆G°r = -13.6 kJ mol-1
= – 13600 J mol-1
∆G° = – 2.303 RT log Keq
log Keq = \(\frac{-\Delta G^{0}}{2.303 R T}\)

log Keq = \(\frac{13.6 \mathrm{~kJ} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{2.303 \times 8.314 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{JK}^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 298 \mathrm{~K}}\)

log Keq = 2.38
Keq = antilog (2.38)
Keq = 239.88

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 71.
A gas mixture of 3.67 lit of ethylene and methane on complete combustion at 25°C and at 1 atm pressure produce 6.11 lit of carbondioxide. Find out the amount of heat evolved in kJ, during this combustion. (∆HC(CH4)) = -890 kJmol-1 and ∆HC(C2H4) = -1423 kJ mol-1
Solution:
Given
∆HC(CH4) = – 890 kJ mol-1
∆HC(C2H4) = -1423 kJ mol-1
Let the mixture contain x lit of CH4 and (3.67 – x) lit of ethylene.
CH4 + 2O2 → CO + 2H2O
x lit               x lit
C2H4 + 3O2 → 2 CO2 + 2H2O
(3.67 -x) lit 2 (3.67 -x) lit
Volume of Carbondioxide formed = x + 2(3.67 – x) = 6.11 lit
x + 7.34 – 2x = 6.11
7.34 – x = 6.11
x = 1.23 lit
Given mixture contains 1.23 lit of methane and 2.44 lit of ethylene, hence
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics 11

11th Chemistry Guide Thermodynamics Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
_______is a part of universe which is separated from the rest of the universe by real or imaginary boundaries.
(a) Surroundings
(b) boundary
(c) system
(d) matter
Answer:
(c) system

Question 2.
Which one of the following is a closed system?
(a) Hot water in a closed beaker
(b) Hot water in a thermos flask
(c) Hot water in a open beaker
(d) Chemical reactions
Answer:
(a) Hot water in a closed beaker

Question 3.
Which of the following is/are extensive properties?
1. volume
2. Surface tension
3. mass
4. internal energy
(a) 1, 2 and 4
(b) 1, 3 and 4
(c) 1 and 3
(d) 1, 2 and 3
Answer:
(b) 1, 3 and 4

Question 4.
Which of the following is/are intensive properties?
1. refractive index
2. density
3. number of moles
4. molar volume
(a) 1, 2 and 4
(b) 1, 3 and 4
(c) 1, 2 and 3
(d) 2, 3 and 4
Answer:
(b) 1, 3 and 4

Question 5.
For an isothermal process _______.
(a) dT = 0
(b) dV = 0
(c) dq = 0
(d) dP = 0
Answer:
(a) dT = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 6.
Which of the following is/are state function?
1. Pressure
2. work
3. internal energy
4. Free energy
5. heat
(a) 1, 2 and 4
(b) 1, 3 and 4
(e) 1, 2 and 3
(d)2, 3 and 4
Answer:
(b) 1, 3 and 4

Question 7.
Which of the following is/are path function?
1. pressure
2. work
3. internal energy
4. Free energy
5. heat
(a) 1, 2 and 4
(b) 1, 3 and 4
(c) 2 and 5
(d) 2, 3 and 4
Answer:
(c) 2 and 5

Question 8.
Which is the correct about internal energy, U?
(a) It is an extensive property
(b) It is a state function
(c) For a cyclic process. ∆U = 0.
(d) Change in internal energy is ∆U = Ui – Uf
Answer:
(a) It is an extensive property

Question 9.
Work done by’ a given system with an ideal gas in a reversible process is wrev =
(a) – nRln (Vf/Vi)
(b) – nRTln (Vi/Vf)
(c) – nRTln (Vf/Vi)
(d) – nTln (Vf/Vi)
Answer:
(c) – nRTln (Vf/Vi)

Question 10.
For a cyclic process involving isothermal expansion of an ideal gas
(a) ∆U = 0
(b) ∆U = q
(c) ∆U = q + w
(d) ∆U = q – w
Answer:
(a) ∆U = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 11.
Choose the correct statement about enthalpy
(a) Enthalpy is a path function
(b) Enthalpy change ∆H = ∆U + V∆P
(c) In an endothermic process, ∆H = 0.
(d) In an exothermic process. ∆H is negative
Answer:
(d) In an exothermic process. ∆H is negative

Question 12.
Which ofthc following reactions correctly indicates the process of atomization?
(a) CH4 → CH3(g) + H(g)
(b) CH4(g) → CH(g) + 4H(g)
(c) CH(g) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
(d) N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NN3(g)
Answer:
(b) CH4(g) → CH(g) + 4H(g)

Question 13.
A reaction has both H and S negative. The rate of reaction
(a) increases with increase of temperature
(b) increases with decrease of temperature
(e) remains unaffected by change of temperature
(d) cannot be predicted for change in temperature
Answer:
(b) increases with decrease of temperature

Question 14.
Evaporation of water is
(a) an exothermic change
(b) an endothermic change
(e) a process where no heat changes occur
(d) a process accompanied by chemical reaction
Answer:
(b) an endothermic change

Question 15.
The entropy change for a non spontaneous reaction is 140 JK-1 mol at 298 K. The reaction is
(a) reversible
(b) irreversible
(c) exothermic
(d) endothermic
Answer:
(d) endothermic

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 16.
The enthalpy and entropy change for the reaction: Br2(l) +Cl2(g) → 2BrCl(g) are 30 kJ mol-1 and 105 kJ mol-1 respectively. The temperature at which the reaction will be in
equilibrium is
(a) 300 K
(b) 285.7 K
(c) 273 K
(d) 450 K
Answer:
(b) 285.7 K

Question 17.
Three moles ofan ideal gas expanded spontaneously into vaccum. The work done will be
(a) Infinite
(b) 3 JouIes
(c) 9 Joules
(d) zero
Answer:
(d) zero

Question 18.
If the enthalpy change for the transition of liquid water to steam is 30 kJ mol-1 at 27°C, the entropy change for the process would be
(a) 10 J mol-1K-1
(b) 1.0 J mol-1K-1
(c) 0.1 J mol-1K-1
(d) 100 J mol-1K-1
Answer:
(d) 100 J mol-1K-1

Question 19.
Enthalpy change for the reaction,
4H(g) → 2H2(g) is – 869.6 kJ
The dissociation energy of H-H bond is
(a) -434.8 kJ
(b) -869.6 kJ
(c) + 434.8 kJ
(d) +217.4 kJ
Answer:
(c) + 434.8 kJ

Question 20.
Which of the following is correct option for free expansion of an ideal gas under adiabatic condition?
(a) q = 0, ∆T ≠ 0, w = 0
(b) q ≠ 0, ∆T = 0, w = 0
(c) q = 0, ∆T = 0, w = 0
(d) q = 0, ∆T < 0, w ≠ 0
Answer:
(b) q ≠ 0, ∆T = 0, w = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 21.
The total entropy change for a system and its surroundings increases, if the process is
(a) reversible
(b) irreversible
(c) exothermic
(d) endothermic
Answer:
(b) irreversible

Question 22.
∆S is positive for the change
(a) mixing of two gases
(b) boiling of liquid
(c) melting of solid
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 23.
If w1, w2, w3 and w4 are work done in isothermal, adiabatic, isobaric and isochoric reversible processes, the correct order (for expansion) will be
(a) w1 > w2 > w3 > w4
(b) w3 > w2 > w1 > w4
(c) w3 > w2 > w4 > w1
(d) w3 > w1 > w2 > w4
Answer:
(d) w3 > w1 > w2 > w4

Question 24.
The subject matter of thermodynamics comprises
(a) energy transformations in a system
(b) mass changes in molecular reactions
(c) total energy of system
(d) rates of chemical reactions
Answer:
(a) energy transformations in a system

Question 25.
A hydrogen bond is very useful in determining the structures and properties of compounds. Its energy varies between
(a) 12 – 20 kJ /mol
(b) 50 – 100 kJ/mol
(c) 10 – 100 kJ/mol
(d) 75 – 200 kJ/mol
Answer:
(c) 10 – 100 kJ/mol

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 26.
In which of the enlisted cases, Hess’s law is not applicable?
(a) Determination of lattice energy
(b) Determination of resonance energy
(c) Determination of enthalpy of transformation of one allotropic form to another
(d) Dtermination of entropy
Answer:
(d) Dtermination of entropy

Question 27.
The amount of energy required to completely remove the constituent ions from its crystal lattice to an infinite distance is called
(a) lattice energy
(b) ionization energy
(c) internal energy
(d) free energy
Answer:
(a) lattice energy

Question 28.
Statement -1:
The allotropes of carbon, namely, graphite and diamond differ each other.
Statement -2:
They possess different internal energies and have different structures.
In the above statement/s
(a) 1 alone is correct
(b) 2 alone is correct
(c) both 1 and 2 are correct
(d) both 1 and 2 are incorrect
Answer:
(c) both 1 and 2 are correct

Question 29.
Which of the following statement is incorrect? According to thermodynamics, work
(a) is a path function
(b) appears only at the boundary of the system
(c) appears during the change in the state of the system.
(d) surroundings is so large that macroscopic changes occurs in the surroundings
Answer:
(d) surroundings is so large that macroscopic changes occurs in the surroundings

Question 30.
The work done by a force of one Newton through a displacement of one meter is called
(a) joule
(b) calorie
(c) erg
(d) tesla
Answer:
(a) joule

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 31.
The enthalpy of neutralization of strong acid vs strong base is approximately equal to ________(in kJ).
(a) 57.32
(b) – 57.32
(c) 5.98
(d) – 5.98
Answer:
(b) – 57.32

Question 32.
The maximum efficiency of an automobile engine working between the temperatures 816°C and 21°C is
(a) 73 %
(b) 45%
(c) 67%
(d) 78%
Answer:
(b) 45%

Question 33.
A reaction that occurs under the given set of conditions without any external driving force is called a reaction.
(a) Reversible
(b) spontaneous
(c) irrversible
(d) cyclic
Answer:
(b) spontaneous

Question 34.
Which one of the following spontaneous reaction is endothermic?
(a) combustion of methane
(b) dissolution of ammonium nitrate
(c) acid-base neutralization reaction
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) dissolution of ammonium nitrate

Question 35.
The available energy in the system to do work is called
(a) Gibbs free energy
(b) internal energy
(c) potential energy
(d) kinetic energy
Answer:
(a) Gibbs free energy

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 36.
Which one of the following is incorrect about Gibbs free energy?
(a) Extensive property
(b) path function
(c) ∆G < 0 for a spontaneous process (d) ∆G > 0 for a non-spontaneous process
Answer:
(b) path function

Question 37.
Match the following:

(A) Adiabatic (i) dp = 0
(B) Isothermal (ii) dV = 0
(C) Isobaric (iii) dq = 0
(D) Isochoric (iv) dT = 0

(a) A – iii, B – iv, C – i, D – ii
(b) A – ii, B – iv, C – iii, D – i
(c) A – iv, B – iii, C – i, D – ii
(d) A – i, B – iv, C – ii, D – iii
Answer:
(a) A – iii, B – iv, C – i, D – ii

Question 38.
For a cyclic process involving isothermal expansion of an ideal gas, q =
(a) 0
(b) P∆V
(c) w
(d) – w
Answer:
(d) – w

Question 39.
In Calorimeter, the expression used to calculate the amount of heat change in the process is
(a) C = qm∆T
(b) C = m/q∆T
(c) C = q/m∆T
(d) C = q∆T/m
Answer:
(c) C = q/m∆T

Question 40.
“It is impossible to transfer heat from a cold reservoir to a hot reservoir without doing some work”. This statement is given by
(a) Clausius
(b) Kelvin
(c) Gibbs
(d) Joule
Answer:
(a) Clausius

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

II. Very short question and answers (2 Marks):

Question 1.
Define isolated system.
Answer:
A system which can exchange neither matter nor energy with its surroundings is called an isolated system. Here boundary is sealed and insulated.

Question 2.
What is a homogeneous system? Give an example.
Answer:
A system is called homogeneous if the physical state of all its constituents is the same. Example: a mixture of gases.

Question 3.
Illustrate Closed system with an example.
Answer:
Hot water contained in a closed beaker is an example for a closed system. In this system energy (heat) is transferred to the surroundings but no matter (water vapour) can escape from this system. A gas contained in a cylinder fitted with a piston constitutes a closed system.

Question 4.
Define irreversible process.
Answer:
The process in which the system and surrounding cannot be restored to the initial state from the final state is called an irreversible process. All the processes occurring in nature are irreversible processes.

Question 5.
Define standard entropy change.
Answer:
The absolute entropy of a substance at 298 K and one bar pressure is called the standard entropy S°.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 6.
What is Zeroth law of thermodynamics?
Answer:
The law states that’ If two systems are separately in thermal equilibrium with a third one, then they tends to be in thermal equilibrium with themselves’.

Question 7.
Define enthalpy.
Answer:
The enthalpy (H), is a thermodynamic property of a system, is defined as the sum of the internal energy (U) of a system and the product of pressure and volume of the system.
H = U + PV

Question 8.
Define specific heat capacity of a system.
Answer:
The heat absorbed by one kilogram of a substance to raise its temperature by one Kelvin at a specified temperature.

Question 9.
What is a reversible process?
Answer:
The process in which the system and surrounding can be restored to the initial state from the final state without producing any changes in the thermodynamic properties of the universe is called a reversible process.

Question 10.
What is a thermodynamic process? Give two examples.
Answer:
The method of operation which can bring about a change in the system is called thermodynamic process.
Examples: Heating, Cooling, expansion.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 11.
Distinguish between state function and path function.
Answer:
A state function is a thermodynamic property of a system, which has a specific value for a given state and does not depend on the path by which the particular state is reached. A path function is a thermodynamic property of the system whose value depends on the path by which the system changes from its initial to final states.

Question 12.
Write any two characteristics of internal energy.
Answer:

  1. The internal energy of a system is an extensive property.
  2. The internal energy of a system is a state function.

Question 13.
Write the importance of internal energy.
Answer:
The internal energy possessed by a substance differentiates its physical structure. For example, the allotropes of carbon, namely, graphite C (graphite) and diamond C (diamond), differ from each other because they possess different internal energies and have different structures.

Question 14.
Write notes on heat.
Answer:
The heat (q) is regarded as an energy in transit across the boundary separating a system from its surrounding. Heat changes lead to temperature differences between system and surrounding. Heat is a path function.

Question 15.
Write the thermodynamic significance of work.
Answer:
The work

  1. is a path function.
  2. appears only at the boundary of the system.
  3. appears during the change in the state of the system.
  4. in thermodynamics, surroundings is so large that macroscopic changes to surroundings do not happen.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 16.
What is meant by pressure-volume work?
Answer:
In elementary thermodynamics the only type of work generally considered is the work done in expansion (or compression) of a gas. This is known as pressure-volume work, PV work or expansion work.

Question 17.
What is specific heat capacity of a system?
Answer:
The heat absorbed by one kilogram of a substance to raise its temperature by one Kelvin at a specified temperature is called specific heat capacity of a system.

Question 18.
Distinguish between Cv and Cp.
Answer:
The molar heat capacity at constant volume (Cv) is defined as the rate of change of internal energy with respect to temperature at constant volume. The molar heat capacity at constant pressure (Cp) can be defined as the rate of change of enthalpy with respect to temperature at constant pressure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

III. Short Question and Answers (3 Marks):

Question 1.
What is internal energy?
Answer:
The internal energy of a system is equal to the energy possessed by all its constituents namely atoms, ions and molecules. The total energy of all molecules in a system is equal to the sum of their translational energy (Ut), vibrational energy (Uv), rotational energy (Ur), bond energy (Ub), electronic energy (Ue) and energy due to molecular interactions (Ui).
Thus:
U = Ut + Uv + Ur + Ub + Ue + Ui
The total energy of all the molecules of the system is called internal energy.

Question 2.
Give applications of bomb calorimeter.
Answer:

  1. Bomb calorimeter is used to determine the amount of heat released in combustion reaction.
  2. It is used to determine the calorific value of food.
  3. Bomb calorimeter is used in many industries such as metabolic study, food processing, explosive testing etc.

Question 3.
What is Molar heat of fusion?
Answer:
The molar heat of fusion is defined as “the change in enthalpy when one mole of a solid substance is converted into the liquid state at its melting point”.
For example, the heat of fusion of ice
H2O(s) → H2O(l)
∆H(fusion) = +5.98 kJ

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

Question 4.
Write any three statements of first law of thermodynamics.
Answer:

  1. Whenever an energy of a particular type disappears, an equivalent amount of another type must be produced.
  2. The total energy of a system and surrounding remains constant (or conserved)
  3. “Energy can neither be created nor destroyed, but may be converted from one form to another”.

Question 5.
Describe the need for the second law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
From the first law of thermodynamics, the energy of the universe is conserved. Let us consider the following processes:
A glass of hot water over time loses heat energy to the surrounding and becqmes cold.
When you mix hydrochloric acid with sodium hydroxide, it forms sodium chloride and water with evolution of heat.

In both these processes, the total energy is conserved and are consistent with the first law of thermodynamics. However, the reverse process i.e. cold water becoming hot water by absorbing heat from surrounding on its own does not occur spontaneously even though the energy change involved in this process is also consistent with the first law. However, if the heat energy is supplied to cold water, then it will become hot. i.e. the change that does not occur spontaneously and an be driven by supplying energy.

Question 6.
Write notes on entropy statement of second law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
The second law of thermodynamics can be expressed in terms of entropy, i.e “the entropy of an isolated system increases during a spontaneous process”.
For an irreversible process such as spontaneous expansion of a gas,
Stotal > 0
Stotal > Ssystem + Ssurrounding
i.e., Suniverse > Ssystem + Ssurrounding
For a reversible process such as melting of ice,
Ssystem = Ssurrounding
Suniverse = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 7 Thermodynamics

IV. Long Question and Answers(5 Marks):

Question 1.
Explain steps to write thermochemical equations.
Answer:
A thermochemical equation is a balanced stoichiometric chemical equation that includes the enthalpy change (∆H). The following conventions are adopted in thermochemical equations:

  1. The coefficients in a balanced thermochemical equation refer to number of moles of reactants and products involved in the reaction.
  2. The enthalpy change of the reaction ∆Hr has to be specified with appropriate sign and unit.
  3. When the chemical reaction is reversed, the value of ∆H is reversed in sign with the same magnitude.
  4. The physical states (gas, liquid, aqueous, solid in brackets) of all species are important and must be specified in a thermochemical reaction, since ∆H depends on the physical state of reactants and products.
  5. If the thermochemical equation is multiplied throughout by a number, the enthalpy change is also multiplied by the same number.
  6. The negative sign of ∆Hr indicates that the reaction is exothermic and the positive sign of ∆Hr indicates an endothermic reaction.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 13 Photosynthesis Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

11th Bio Botany Guide Photosynthesis Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part-I

Questions 1.
Assertion (A): Increase in Proton gradient inside lumen responsible for ATP synthesis.
Reason (R): Oxygen evolving complex of PS I located on the thylakoid membrane facing Stroma, releases H+ ions.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are True.
(b) Assertion is True and Reason is False.
(c) Reason is True and Assertion is False.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are False.
Answer:
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are True.

Question 2.
Which chlorophyll molecule does not have a phytol tail?
a) Chl – a
b) Chl – b
c) Chl – c
d) Chl – d
Answer:
(c) Chl – c

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 3.
The correct sequence of flow of electrons in the light reaction is:
(a) PS II, plastoquinone, cytochrome, PS I, ferredoxin.
(b) PS I, plastoquinone, cytochrome, PS II ferredoxin.
(c) PS II, ferredoxin, plastoquinone, cytochrome, PS I.
(d) PS I, plastoquinone, cytochrome, PS II, ferredoxin.
Answer:
(a) PS II, plastoquinone, cytochrome, PS I, ferredoxin.

Question 4.
For every CO2 molecule entering the C3 cycle, the number of ATP & NADPH required
a) 2ATP + 2NADPH
b) 2ATP + 3NADPH
c) 3ATP + 2NADPH
d) 3ATP + 3NADPH
Answer:
(c) 3ATP + 2NADPH

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 5.
Identify true statement regarding light reaction of photosynthesis?
(a) Splitting of water molecule is associate with PS I.
(b) PS I and PS II involved in the formation of NDPH + H+.
(c) The reaction center of PS I is Chlorophyll a with absorption peak at 680 nm.
(d) The reaction center of PS II is Chlorophyll a with absorption peak at 700 nm.
Answer:
(b) PS I and PS II involved in the formation of NDPH + H+.

Question 6.
Two groups (A&B) of bean plants of similar size and same leaf area were placed in identical conditions. Group A was exposed to light of wavelength 400 – 450 nm & Group B to light of wavelength of 500 – 550nm. Compare the photosynthetic rate of the 2 groups giving reasons.
Answer:
‘A’ group of plants exposed to light of 400 – 450nm. Chlorophyll a shows maximum absorption peak at 450nm (blue region). Hence rate of photosynthesis was high.
‘B’ group of plants exposed to light of 500 – 550nm. This wavelength refers to green region of the spectrum. Chlorophyll does not absorb light in the green region but reflects green. So plants appear green rate of photosynthesis was negligible in these plants.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 7.
A tree is believed to be releasing oxygen during nighttime. Do you believe the truthfulness of this statement? Justify your answer by giving reasons?
Answer:
Yes, a tree is believed to be releasing O2 during nighttime because at night CAM plants fix CO2 with the help of phospho Enol Pyruvic acid and produce oxala acetic acid, which is converted into malic acid-like C4 cycle.

Question 8.
Grasses have an adaptive mechanism to compensate for photorespiratory losses – Name and describe the mechanism.
Answer:
The photorespiratory losses are checked by certain grasses by having physiological adaptation. The process of photosynthesis occurs in mesophyll cells and bundle sheath cells.

Mesophyll cells:

  • Initially, CO2 is taken up by Phosphoenolpyruvate (PEPA) (3C) and changed to oxaloacetate (4C) in the presence of PEP carboxylase.
  • Oxaloacetate is reduced to Malate/Aspartate. The product formed reaches the bundle sheath.

Bundle Sheath:

  • The oxidation of Malate and Aspartate occurs with the release of carbon dioxide and the formation of Pyruvate (3C)
  • Due to increased CO2 concentration RUBISCO functions as a carboxylase and not as Oxygenase.
  • The photosynthetic losses are prevented.
  • RUBP operates now under the Calvin cycle and pyruvate transported back to Mesophyll cells is changed into Phosphoenolpyruvate to keep the cycle going.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 9.
In Botany class, teacher explains, Synthesis of one glucose requires 30 ATPs in C4 plants and only 18 ATPs in C3 plants. The same teacher explains C4 plants are more advantageous than C3 plants. Can you identify the reason for this contradiction?
Answer:
C4 Plants are more advantageous than C3 plants because of the following reasons:

C4 Plants C3 Plants
CO2 fixation occurs in mesophyll cells only CO2 fixation occurs in mesophyll and bundle sheath cells
RUBP is the only CO2 acceptor PEPA Phosphoenol pyruvate in mesophyll is the acceptor in the first phase
Fixation of CO2 occurs if the atmospheric concentration of C02 is 50 ppm only It can fix carbon dioxide even if the atmospheric concentration of CO2 is below 10 ppm
Optimum temperature is 20° to 25°C Optimum temperature is 30° to 45°C and is thus effective in tropical regions.
 RUBP carboxylase enzyme also functions as oxygenase if the 0, concentration is higher than carbon dioxide PEP carboxylase enzyme functions even at low carbon – dioxide concentrations.
Higher rate of photorespiration and hence rate of photosynthesis is reduced. Minimal rate of photorespiration is seen is C4 plants.

Question 10.
When there is plenty of light and higher concentration of O2, what kind of pathway does the plant undergo? Analyse the reasons.
Answer:
The rate of photosynthesis decreases when there is an increase in oxygen concentration. This Inhibitory effect of oxygen was first discovered by Warburg (1920) using green algae, Chlorella.

Part-II.

11th Bio Botany Guide Photosynthesis Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose the Correct Answers

Question 1.
Photosynthesis is the major:
(a) endothermic reaction
(b) exothermic reaction
(c) endergonic reaction
(d) exergonic reaction
Answer:
(c) endergonic reaction

Question 2.
The physiological unit of photosynthesis is
a) 150-250 Chlorophyll molecules
b) 200-300 chlorophyll molecules
c) 440-660 chlorophyll molecules
d) 450- 650 chlorophyll molecules
Answer:
b) 200-300 chlorophyll molecules

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 3.
How many million tonnes of dry matter produced annually by photosynthesis?
(a) 1700 million tonnes
(b) 1900 million tonnes
(c) 1400 million tonnes
(d) 2000 million tonnes
Answer:
(a) 1700 million tonnes

II. Match Correctly & Choose The Right Answer

Question 4.
I) Black Mann – A) the importance of Chlorophyll
II) Warburg – B) Law of limiting factor
III) Dustrochet – C) C4 cycle
IV) Hatch & Slack – Chlorella
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 1
Answer:
c) B-D-A-C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 5.
Thylakoid disc diameter is:
(a) 0.35 to 0.75 microns
(b) 0.25 to 0.8 microns
(c) 0.45 to 0.8 microns
(d) 0.50 to 0.9 microns
Answer:
(b) 0.25 to 0.8 microns

Question 6.
The pigment responsible for the yellowing of leaves during autumn season is
a) Violaxanthin
b) Fucoxanthin
c) Phycobillin
d) Lycopene
Answer:
d) Lycopene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 7.
The no of quanta of light required for the release of one oxygen molecule
a) 18 quanta
b) 8 quanta
c) 81 quanta
d) 19 quanta
Answer:
b) 8 quanta

Question 8.
Each pyrrole ring comprises of:
(a) six carbons and one nitrogen atom
(b) three carbons and one nitrogen atom
(c) four carbons and one nitrogen atom
(d) four carbons and two nitrogen atom
Answer:
(c) four carbons and one nitrogen atom

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 9.
RUBISCO – Constitute …………. of chloroplast protein
a) 17%
b) 20%
c) 18%
d) 16%
Answer:
d) 16%

Question 10.
Pheophytin resembles chlorophyll ‘a’ except that it lacks:
(a) Fe atom
(b) Mn atom
(c) Mg atom
(d) Cu atom
Answer:
(c) Mg atom

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 11.
According to Emerson the fall in quantum yield about 680 nm is called
a) Phoisynthtic drop
b) Emerson drop
c) Airburg effect
d) Red drop
Answer:
d) Red drop

Question 12.
Which one of the photosynthetic pigments is called shield pigment:
(a) carotenes
(b) chlorophyll ‘b’
(c) pheophytin
(d) carotenoids
Answer:
(d) carotenoids

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 13.
Which of the following equation correctly sums up photosynthesis
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 2
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 3

Question 14.
Photosynthetic rate of red light (650 nm) is equal to:
(a) 42.5
(b) 10.0
(c) 43.5
(d) 40.8
Answer:
(c) 43.5

Question 15.
Which photosystem is found to be located on the outer surface of the thylakoid?
a) PS I
b) P.S II
c) P. 890
d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
a) P.S I

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 16.
Phosphorylation taking place during respiration is called as:
(a) Photophorylation
(b) Oxidative phosphorylation
(c) Reductive phosphorylation
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Oxidative phosphorylation

Question 17.
The term Quantosome was coined by
a) Emerson
b) Liebig
c) Calvin & Melvin
d) Park & Biggins
Answer:
d) Park & Biggins

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 18.
In bioenergetics of light reaction, to release one electron from pigment system it requires:
(a) two quanta of light
(b) four quanta of light
(c) one quantum of light
(d) eight quanta of light
Answer:
(a) two quanta of light

Question 19.
Photosynthesis produces
a) 1700 million tonnes of dry matter/year by fixing 75 x 1012 kg of carbon every year
b) 7100 million tonnes of dry matter/year by fixing 75 x 1012 kg of carbon every year
c) 1600 million tonnes of dry matter/week by fixing 56 x 1210 kg of carbon every week
d) 6100 million tonnes of dry matter/month by fixing 100 x 1012 kg of carbon every month
Answer:
a) 1700 million tonnes of dry matter/year by fixing 75 x 1012 kg of carbon every year

Question 20.
In C4 plants, how many ATPs and NADPH + H+ are utilised for the release of one oxygen molecule:
(a) 3 ATPs and 2 NADPH + H+
(b) 4 ATPs and 3 NADPH + H+
(c) 2 ATPs and 2 NADPH + H+
(d) 5 ATPs and 2 NADPH + H+
Answer:
(d) 5 ATPs and 2 NADPH + H+

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 21.
Products of light reaction in photosynthesis are
a) ATP & NADPH2
b) ADP & glucose
c) Ferredoxin and cytochrome b6
d) Cytochrome
Answer:
a) ATP & NADPH2

Question 22.
In the sugarcane plant, the dicarboxylic acid pathway was first discovered by:
(a) Hatch and Slack
(b) Kortschak, Hart and Burr
(c) Calvin and Benson
(d) Mitchell and Root
Answer:
(b) Kortschak, Hart and Burr

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 23.
Photosynthetic pigments in chloroplasts lie embedded in
a) Chloroplast envelope
b) Plastogloblue
c) matrix
d) thylakoids
Answer:
d) thylakoids

Question 24.
Indicate the correct answer:
(a) C4 plants are adapted to only rainy conditions
(b) C4 plants are partially adapted to drought condition
(c) C4 plants are exclusively adapted to desert condition
(d) C4 plants are adapted to aquatic condition
Answer:
(b) C4 plants are partially adapted to drought condition

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 25.
Carotenoids and Xanthophylls are also known as
a) Respiratory pigments
b) Accessory pigments
c) Photosynthetic pigments.
d) Photolytic pigments
Answer:
b) Accessory pigments

Question 26.
Which metal ion is a
a) Iron
b) cobalt
c) Magnesium
d) Zinc
Answer:
c) Magnesium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 27.
The important external factors affecting photosynthesis are:
(a) light, chlorophyll, temperature
(b) light, stomatal opening, oxygen
(c) light, protoplasmic factor, oxygen
(d) light, CO2 and oxygen
Answer:
(d) light, CO2 and oxygen

Question 28.
The process of photophosphorylation was discovered by
a) Priestly
b) Calvin
c) Amon
d) Warburg
Answer:
c) Arnon

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 29.
Which of the following is a C4 plant
a) Potato
b) Sugarcane
c) Pea
d) Papaya
Answer:
b) Sugarcane

Question 30.
Splitting of water molecule (photolysis) produces:
(a) hydrogen and oxygen
(b) electrons, protons and oxygen
(c) electrons and oxygen
(d) hydrogen, carbon dioxide and oxygen
Answer:
(b) electrons, protons and oxygen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 31.
Dimorphism in chloroplasts is seen in
a) C4 plants
b) C2 plants
c) CAM – plants
d) C3 plants
Answer:
a) C4 plants

Question 32.
Energy required for ATP synthesis in PSII comes from
a) Proton gradient
b) Electron gradient
c) Reduction of glucose
d) Oxidation of glucose
Answer:
a) Proton gradient

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 33.
The by-product of Photosynthesis is
a) O2
b) CO2
c) Carbohydrate
d) H2O
Answer:
a) O2

Question 34.
Which of the following process is called reverse of Glycolysis?
a) CO2 reduction
b) RUBP carboxylation
c) RUBP regeneration
d) ATP synthesis
Answer:
a) CO2 reduction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 35.
The Dark reaction of Photosynthesis occurs in
a) Matrix
b) Grana
c) Stroma
d) Cytoplasm
Answer:
c) Stroma

Question 36.
A granal chloroplasts are characteristics of
a) Mesophyll of pea leaves
b) Bundle sheath of Mango leaves
c) Mesophyll of maize leaves
d) Bundle sheath of sugar cane leaves
Answer:
d) Bundle sheath of Sugar cane leaves

Question 37.
Which of the following plant is a better photosynthesis?
a) Mango
b) Sugarcane
c) Wheat
d) Rice
Answer:
b) Sugarcane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 38.
The enzyme that is not found in a C3 plant is
a) RUBP carboxylase
b) PEP carboxylase
c) NADP reductase
d) ATP synthase
Answer:
b) PEP carboxylase

Question 39.
Which of the following factors affect the rate of photosynthesis?
I. Light
II. Protoplasmic factor
III. Hormones Codes
IV. Haemoglobin
a) only III
b) I and II
c) only IV
d) I, II, and III
Answer:
d) I, II and III

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 40.
Match the following columns

Column I Column II
I. The 5C sugar that A. RUBIS Co
II. 3 C sugar that gives Calvin cycle  its nickname B. Glyceraldehyde 3 phosphate
III. Activated form of  3 PGA C. 3 phosphoglyceric acid
IV. Huge enzyme complex that brings CO2 and 5C sugar together. D. RUBP

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 4

Question 41.
One complete light reaction involves light energy.
a) 30 quanta
b) 48 quanta
c) 40 quanta
d) 25 quanta
Answer:
b) 48 quanta

Question 42.
During photosynthesis which of the following event does not take place?
a) oxidation of CO2
b) Reduction of CO2
c) oxidation of H2O
d) Light absorption
Answer:
a) Oxidation of CO2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 43.
The site of light trapping in the chloroplast is
a) Thylakoid membrane
b) Stroma
c) Plasma fluid
d) Stromal lamellae
Answer:
a) Thylakoid membrane

Question 44.
Kranz anatomy is traced in the Leaves of
a) Wheat
b) Potato
c) Mustard
d) Sugarcane
Answer:
d) Sugarcane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 45.
The intermediate got from Kreb’s cycle that is used for chlorophyll synthesis is
a) Citric acid
b) Isocitric acid
c) Succinic acid
d) Fumaric acid
Answer:
c) Succinic acid

Question 46.
The existence of light and dark reaction of photosynthesis was proved by
a) Blackman
b) Emerson
c) Warburg
d) Arnon
Answer:
a) Blackman

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 47.
Choose the wrong match.
a) Hatch & Slack – Dicarboxylic acid pathway
b) Decker – PCO cycle
c) Ruben, Kamen – CAM cycle
d) Calvin Benson – PCR cycle
Answer:
c) Ruben, Kamen – CAM cycle

Question 48.
I) Primary CO, acceptor – PEPA
II) 4C compound produced 1 st – OAA
III) 1st carboxylation occurs in – Bundle sheath cells
IV) 2nd carboxylation occurs in – Mesophy 11 cells
a) I & II
b) II & III
c) III & IV
d) I & IV
Answer:
c) III & IV

Question 49.
Say True or False with respect to C2 cycle
I) RUBISCO has the most abundant protein on earth.
II) Photorespiration does not yield any free energy in the form of ATP
III) The end product is a 2 – c compound. So the cycle is known as C2 cycle
IV) Under certain conditions 50% of the photosynthetic potential is lost because of photorespiration.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 5
Answer:
b) True – True – False – True

Question 50.
Say True or False and choose the right option from the given choice.
I) PAR is between – 400 – 700 mil.
II) Heliophytes (Beans) require higher light intensity than sccophytes (oxalis)
III) Red light induces lowest rate of photosynthesis.
IV) Green light induces highest rate of photosynthesis.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 6
Answer:
c) True – True – False – False

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 51.
Choose the wrongly matched pair
a) Stephen hales – Father of plant physiology
b) Lavoisier – Purifying gas oxygen is produced in sun light
c) Vonmayer – Green plants convert solar energy into chemical energy
d) Emerson &Amoid – C4 cycle
Answer:
d) Emerson & Arnold – C4 cycle

Question 52.
Choose the rightly matched pair
a) Chlorophyll a – Accessory pigments and trap solar energy
b) Chlorophyll b – Differs from Chlorophyll a in having CH3 instead of CHO – at 3rd C atom
c) Chlorophyll c – Differs from Chlorophyll a by lacking a phytol tail
d) Chlorophyll d – It has CHO at 3rd at the 3rd carbon atom at 11 – pyrrole ring
Answer:
c) Chlorophyll c – Differs from chlorophyll a by lacking a phytol tail.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 53.
Choose the right matched pairs from the given options.
I) Green non sulphur bacteria – Clostridium & Lynbya
II) Green sulphur bacteria – Chlorobacterium & Chlorobium
III) Purple sulphur bacteria – Thiospirillum & Chromatium
IV) Purple non sulphur bacteria – Rhodopseudomonas & Rhodospirillum
a) I, II, & III
b) II, III & IV
C) I, II & IV
d) I, III & IV
Answer:
b) II, III & IV

II. Assertion (A) & Reason (R)

a) Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and Reason (R) is the correct explanation of Assertion
b) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true – Reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion.
c) Assertion (A) is false but Reason (R) is true.
d) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are false.

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Chlorophyll appears green.
Reason (R): It absorbs light mainly in the region of green part of light spectrum.
Answer:
c) Assertion (A) is False but Reason (R) is true.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Red of spectrum contains high energy.
Reason (R): Green light of Visible spectrum contain low energy than red light.
Answer:
c) Assertion (A) is False but Reason (R) is true.

Question 3.
Assetion (A): Non cyclic photo phosphorylation occurs in the stroma of chloroplasts
Reason (R): There is a continuous flow of electrons in this process.
Answer:
d) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are false.

Question 4.
Assetion (A): Carotenes and Xanthophylls are soluble in either
Reason (R): These are accessory pigments of photosynthesis
Answer:
b) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true, Reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion

Question 5.
Assetion (A): Carotenoids are accessory pigments
Reason (R): Absorbed light energy is transferred to reaction centre by carotenoids.
Answer:
a) Assertion (A) and Reason (R) True and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion.

III. 2 Marks Questions

Question 1.
What is the function of the plant in the universe?
Answer:
Plants are the major machinery which produces organic compounds like carbohydrates,lipids, proteins, nucleic acids and other biomolecules.

Question 2.
What is PAR?
Answer:
It refers to Photosynthetically Active Radiation, which is between 400 – 700 nm photosynthetic rate is maximum in blue and red light – Green light induces lowest rate of photosynthesis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 3.
What is the site of photosynthesis?
Answer:
Chloroplasts are the main site of photosynthesis and both the energy-yielding process (Light reaction) and fixation of carbon dioxide (Dark reaction) that takes place in the chloroplast.

Question 4.
Name the photosynthetic pigments of Algae?
Answer:

  • Chlorophyll b – Green Algae
  • Chlorophyll c – Dianoflagellates, Diatoms & Brown Algae
  • Chlorophyll d – Red Algae
  • Chlorophyll e – Xantho phycean Algae.

Question 5.
Endosymbiotic hypothesis says that chloroplasts evolved from bacteria. Substantiate the statement.
Answer:
Presence of 70S ribosome and DNA gives them status of semi-autonomy and proves endosymbiotic hypothesis which says chloroplast evolved from bacteria.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 6.
Write down the significance of photorespiration.
Answer:

  • Glycine and Serine synthesized during this process are precursors of many biomolecules like Chlorophyll, Proteins, Nucleotides.
  • It consumes excess NADH + H+ generated.
  • Glycolate protects cells from Photooxidation.

Question 7.
What are the conclusions of Hill’s Reaction?
Answer:

  • During Photosynthesis oxygen is evolved from water.
  • Electrons for the reduction of CO2 are obtained from water.
  • A reduced substance produced, later helps to reduce CO2
  • 2H2O + 2A→ 2 AH2 + O2

Question 8.
What are Xanthophylls?
Answer:
Yellow (C40H56O2) pigments are like carotenes but contain oxygen. Lutein is responsible for yellow colour change of leaves during autumn season. Examples: Lutein, Violaxanthin and Fueoxanthin.

Question 9.
Notes on Phycobillins.
Answer:

  • They are proteinaceous pigments.
  • They are soluble in water.
  • Lack ‘Mg’ and phytol tail.
  • There are 2 forms 1. Phycocyanin 2. Phycoerythrin.
  • Phycocyanin occur in Cyanobacteria.
  • Phyco erythrin occur in Rhodophycean Algae.

Question 10.
Define absorption spectrum.
Answer:
Pigments absorb different wavelengths of light. A curve obtained by plotting the amount of absorption of different wavelengths of light by a pigment is called its absorption spectrum.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 11.
Why do we call carotenoids shield pigments?
Answer:

  • Carotenoids are yellow to orange pigments mostly tetraterpens and absorb light strongly in the blue to violet region of the visible spectrum.
  • These pigments protect chlorophyll from photosynthetic oxidative damage.

Question 12.
What is known as substrate-level phosphorylation?
Answer:
Phosphorylation taking place during respiration is called oxidative phosphorylation and ATP produced by the breakdown of substrate is known as substrate-level phosphorylation.

Question 13.
What are Quantosomes?
Answer:

  • They are physiological photosynthetic units, located on the inner membrane of thylakoid lamellae of size 180A X 160 A length & breadth.
  • It was named by Park &Pickins( 1964).
  • One quantosome contains about 230 chlorophyll molecules.
  • It constitutes a photosynthetic unit responsible for the production of one O2 molecule or reduction of one CO2 molecule.

Question 14.
What is Bioluminescence?
Answer:
It is the special aspect of few living organism, in which there are some biochemical substances production is responsible for the emission of light by a living organism.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 15.
What is the significance of photorespiration?
Answer:
Significance of photorespiration:

  1. Glycine and Serine synthesized during this process are precursors of many biomolecules like chlorophyll, proteins, nucleotides.
  2. It consumes excess NADH + H+ generated.
  3. Glycolate protects cells from Photooxidation.

Question 16.
Explain water oxidizing clock or S state mechanism.
Answer:
The splitting of water molecule, mechanism was studied by KoK et, al (1970).
It consists of a series of 5 states so, s1, s2, s3, s4.
Each sate acquires positive charge by a photon (hv) and after the state s4 – if acquires 4 positive charges 4 electron and evolution of oxygen.

Two molecules of water go back to the so.
At the end of photolysis 4H+, 4e and O2 are evolved from water.
4H2O → 4H++ + 40H
40H–  → 2H2O+O2+4e
2H2O → 4H++ O2 + 4e.

Question 17.
Distinguish between photophosphorylation and oxidative phosphorylation.
Answer:

Photophosphorylation Phosphorylation
1. It is the process of synthesis of ATP from ADP by the addition of phosphate takes place with the help of photosynthesis light generated electron, which is known as photophosphorylation. It is of two types Cyclic and Non-cyclic photophosphorylation. 1. The process of production of ATP via terminal oxidation of reduced coenzymes during respiration is known as oxidative phosphorylation.

Question 18.
What are the air pollutants, that affect the rate of photosynthesis?
Answer:
Pollutants like SO2, NO2, O3 (Ozone) and Smog affect the rate of photosynthesis.

Question 19.
What are the conditions for the occurrence of Non-cyclic photophosphorylation?
Answer:

  • Non-Cyclic Photo Phosphorylation occurs, when.
  • There is the availability of NADP+ for reduction.
  • Two molecules of water go back to the so.
  • When there is the splitting of water molecules.
  • When both PSI and PS II are activated.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 20.
Name any three photosynthetic bacteria.
Answer:
Three photosynthetic bacteria:

  1. Chlorobacterium
  2. Thiospirillum
  3. Rodhospirillum

Question 21.
What are the 2 phases of light reaction?
Answer:
The light reaction has 2 phases

  1. Photooxidation phase
  2.  Photochemical phase.

I) Photooxidation phase (POP):

  •  Absorption of light energy.
  • Transfer of energy from accessory pigments to the reaction centre.
  • Activation of chlorophyll ‘a’ -molecule.

II) Photochemical phase (PCO):

  • Photolysis of water and evolution of oxygen.
  • Electron transport and synthesis of assimilatory power.

Question 22.
Greenlight induces lowest rate of photosynthesis justifies.
Answer:

  • Yes green light induces the lowest rate of photosynthesis because it is not coming under photosynthetically
  • Active reduction – (400 – 700 nm) known as PAR.
  • PAR – (Photosynthetic rate is maximum in blue and red light not in green Light.

Question 23.
What will be the quanta requirement for the complete light reaction which releases 6 oxygen molecules?
Answer:

  • Complet light reaction releases 6 oxygen molecules.
  • If one molecule of oxygen evolution requires 8 quanta means for 6 oxygen molecules (6 x 8 = 48) quanta of light reaquired for a complete light reaction.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 24.
Give the balance sheet of Calvin or C3 cycle.
Answer:
One molecule of CO2 is fixed in one turn of the Calvin or C3 cycle.
So 6 turns of cycle will be required to fix 6 molecules of C02 – (i.e) to form one molecule of Glucose C6H12O6

In Out
6CO2 1 Glucose
18 ATP 18 ADP
12 NADPH 12 NADP

IV. 3 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Mention any three significance of photosynthesis.
Answer:
Three significance of photosynthesis:

  1. Photosynthetic organisms provide food for all living organisms on earth either directly or indirectly.
  2. It is the only natural process that liberates oxygen in the atmosphere and balances the oxygen level.
  3. Photosynthesis balances the oxygen and carbon cycle in nature.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 2.
What are the properties of light.
Answer:

  • Light is a transverse electromagnetic wave.
  • It consists of ocillating electric and magnetic fields that are perpendicular to each other and perpenticular to the direction of propagation of the light.
  • Light moves at a speed of 3 x 108 ms-1
  • Wave length is the distance between successive crests of the wave.
  • Light as a particle is called photon. Each photon contains an amount of energy known as quantum.
  • The energy of a photon depends on the frequency of the light.

Question 3.
Distinguish between Absorption spectrum & Action Spectrum.
Answer:

Absorption spectrum Action spectrum
A curve obtained by plotting the amount of absorption of different wavelengths of light by a pigment is called the Absorption spectrum. The curve showing the rate of photosynthesis at different wavelengths of light is called the action spectrum.

Question 4.
Distinguish between fluorescence and phosphorescence.
Answer:

Fluorescence Phosphorescence
1. Immediate emission of absorbed radiations in the form of radiation energy (light) in the red region. 1. This is the delayed emission of absorbed radiations in the form of light in the red region.
2. The electrons move from S1 →SO 2. The electrons pathway is from S2 →S1 →T1→ SO

Question 5.
What is meant by the ground state?
Answer:
The action of photon plays a vital role in the excitation of pigment molecules to release an electron. When the molecules absorb a photon, it is in an excited state. When the light source turned off, the high-energy electrons return to their normal low-energy orbitals as the excited molecule goes back to its original stable condition known as the ground state.

Question 6.
Write down the significance of Photosynthesis.
Answer:

  • Photosynthetic organisms provide food for all living organisms on earth either directly or indirectly All other organism depend on them for energy.
  • It liberates oxygen in the atmosphere and balances.
  • Fuels such as coal, petroleum, and other fossil fuels are preserved forms got only from photosynthetic plants.
  • It also provides fodder, fibre, firewood, timber useful medicinal products and these sources come by the act of photosynthesis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 7.
What is DCMU?
Answer:

  • It is a chemical herbicide having an inhibiting effect on photosynthesis.
  • It is Dichloro phenyl D1 Methyl Urea.
  • It can inhibit electron flow during light reactions of photosynthesis.
  • It is a herbicide that blocks the plastoquinone binding site of P.S II and inhibits electron flow from plastoquinone to cytochrome.

Question 8.
State black man’s law of limiting factor.
Answer:
It is a modified law proposed by Liebig’s law of minimum.

Definition:
According to Blackman at any given point of time, the lowest factor among essentials will limit the rate of Photosynthesis.

Example:
When in a condition, if light intensity is low also C02 concentration low, in this situation among the two factors which ever is the lowest is considered as the limiting factor here among the essentials CO2 concentration is the limiting factor.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 9.
What is meant by dicarboxylic acid pathway?
Answer:
C4 pathway is completed in two phases, first phase takes place in the stroma of mesophyll cells, where the CO2 acceptor mblecule is 3 – Carbon compound, phosphoenolpyruvate (PEP) to form 4 – carbon Oxalo acetic acid (OAA). The first product is a 4 – carbon and so it is named as C4 cycle. Oxalo acetic acid is a dicarboxylic acid and hence this cycle is also known as a dicarboxylic acid pathway.

Question 10.
State some interesting facts about C4 cycle.
Answer:

  • C4 cycle is an alternative path way for CO2 fixation.
  • It occur in nearly 1000 plant species 300 dicots but mostly 700 monocots (tropical and sub tropical grasses)
  • It represent about 5% earths biomass and 1% of its known plants
  • 30% terrestrial carbon fixation on earth is due to C4 So, if C4 plants on earth is increased, then by carbon sequestration by thus strategy severe climate change would be avoided in the near future.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 11.
What is Kranz Anatomy or what is meant by Dimorphism of Chloropiasts in C4 plants.
Answer:

C3 plants C4 plants
C3 plants kranz Anatomy not seen C4 plants show kranz Anatomy
C3 plants only one type of chloroplasts seen both in bundle sheath and mesophyll cells. C4 plants Bundle sheath surrounding the vascular bundles have larger chloroplast and have thylakoids are free, not arranged in granum.
Thylakoids are arranged in granum as coins. Mesophyll cells have smaller chloroplasts thylakoid arranged in granum

Question 12.
what is the significance of the CAM cycle?
Answer:
The significance of the CAM cycle:

  1. It is advantageous for succulent plants to obtain CO2 from malic acid when stomata are closed.
  2. During daytime, stomata are closed and CO2 is not taken but continues their photosynthesis.
  3. Stomata are closed during the daytime and help the plants to avoid transpiration and water loss.

Question 13.
Compare the C3 and C4 on the basis of ATP production.
Answer:

C3 plants C4 plants
The evolution of one oxygen molecule (4 electrons required) requires 8 quanta of light
C3 plants utilise 2 ATPs and 2 NAD PH+H+ to evolve one oxygen molecule C4 plants utilise 5 ATPs and 2NADPH + H+ to evolve one oxygen molecule
To evolve 6 molecules of oxygen or 1 molecule of Glucose 8 ATPs and 12 NADPH + H+ are utilised. To evolve 6 molecules of oxygen 30 ATPs and 12 NADPH + H+ are utilised.

Question 14.
What will be the quanta requirement for the complete light reaction which releases 6 oxygen molecules?
Answer:
The complete light reaction releases 6 oxygen molecules if one molecule of oxygen evolution, requires 81 quanta means for 6 oxygen molecules 6 x 8 = 48 quanta of light required for the complete light reaction.

Question 15.
Draw the Graphical representation of any 3 factors affecting photosynthesis.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 7

1. Light Intensity
2. CO2 Concentration
3. Temperature

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

V. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between Photosystem – I and photosystem – II
Answer:
Photosystem – I:

  1. The reaction centre is P700.
  2. PS I is involved in both cyclic and non – cyclic.
  3. Not involved in the photolysis of water and evolution of oxygen.
  4. It receives electrons from PS II during non – cyclic photophosphorylation.
  5. Located in unstacked region granum facing chloroplast stroma.
  6. Chlorophyll and Carotenoid ratio is 20 to 30 : 1.

Photosystem – II:

  1. Reaction centre is P680.
  2. PS II participates in Non – cyclic pathway.
  3. Photolysis of water and evolution of oxygen take place.
  4. It receives electrons by photolysis of water.
  5. Located in stacked region of thylakoid membrane facing lumen of thylakoid.
  6. Chlorophyll and Carotenoid ratio is 3 to 7 : 1.

Question 2.
Structure of Chloroplast.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 8

Question 3.
Notes on photosystem and Reaction centre.
Answer:

  • Thylakoid membrane contains photosystem I (PSI) and photosystem II (PSII)
  • PS I is unstacked region of granum tàcing stroma ofchÍoroplast.
  • PS II is found in stacked region of thylakoid membrane facing lumen of thylakoid.
  • Each photosystem consists of central core complex (CC) and light harvesting complex (LHC) or Antenna molecules.
  • The core complex consists of respective reaction centre associated with proteins, electron donors and acceptors.
  • PSI – CCI consists of reaction centre P 700 and LHC – I
  • PS II- CC II consists of reaction centre P680 and LHC – II
  • Light harvesting complex consists of several chiorophylls, carotenoids and xanthophyll molecules.
  • The main function of LHC is to harvesting light energy and transfer it to their respective reaction centre.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 4.
Difference between photosystem I and Photosystem II.
Answer:

Photosystem I Photosystem II
1. The reaction centre is P700 1. Reaction centre is P 680.
2. PSI is involved in Photolysis of water and evolution. 2. PS II participates in Non – Cyclic pathway
3. Not involved in photolysis of water and evolution of oxygen. 3. Photolysis of water and evolution of oxygen take place.
4. It receives electrons from PSII during non – cyclic photophosphorylation. 4. It receives electrons by photolysis of water.
5. Located in unstacked region granum racing chloroplast stroma. 5. Located in stacked region of thylakoid membrane facing lumen of thylakoid.
6. Chlorophyll and carotenoid ratio is 20 to 30:1 6. Chlorophyll and carotenoid ratio is 3 to 7:1

Question 5.
Differences between Cyclic Photophosphorylation and Non – cyclic photophosphorylation.
Answer:

Cyclic Photophosphorylation Non – Cyclic Photophosphorylation
1. PSI only involved 1. PS I and PS II involved.
2. Reaction centre is P 700 2. Reaction centre is P 680.
3. Electrons released are cycled back 3. Electron released are not cycled back.
4. Photolysis of water does not take place 4. Photolysis of water takes place
5. Only ATP Synthesized 5. ATP and NADPH + H+ are synthesized.
6. Phosphorylation takes place at two places 6. Phosphorylation takes place at only one place
7. It does not require an external electron donor. 7. Requires external electron donor like H2O or H2S
8. It is not sensitive to dichloro dimethyl urea (DCMU) 8. It is sensitive to DCMU and inhibits electron flow

Question 6.
Compare and contrast the photosynthetic processes in C3 and C4 plants.
Answer:
Contrast the photosynthetic processes in C3 and C4 plants:
C3 Plants:

  • CO2 fixation takes place in mesophyll cells only.
  • CO2 acceptor is RUBP only.
  • First product is 3C – PGA.
  • Kranz anatomy is not present.
  • Granum is present in mesophyll cells.
  • Normal Chloroplast.
  • Optimum temperature 20° to 25° C.
  • Fixation of CO2 at 50 ppm.
  • Less efficient due to higher photorespiration.
  • RUBP carboxylase enzyme used for fixation.
  • 18 ATPs used to synthesize one glucose.
  • Efficient at low CO2.
  • eg: Paddy, Wheat, Potato and so on.

C4 Plants:

  • CO2 fixation takes place mesophyll and bundle sheath.
  • PEP in mesophyll and RUBP in bundle sheath cells.
  • First product is 4C – OAA.
  • Kranz anatomy is present.
  • Granum present in mesophyll cells and absent in bundle sheath.
  • Dimorphic chloroplast.
  • Optimum temperature 30° to 45° C.
  • Fixation of CO2 even less than 10 ppm.
  • More efficient due to less photorespiration.
  • PEP carboxylase and RUBP carboxylase used.
  • 30 ATPs to produce one glucose.
  • Efficient at higher CO2.
  • eg: Sugar cane, Maize, Sorghum, Amaranthus and so on.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 7.
Explain Non cyclic photophosphorylation.
Answer:
When PS II (P680) gets activated, electrons from a high energy state pass through a series of electron carriers like pheophytin, plastoquinone cytochrome complex, plastocyanin, and finally accepted by PS I (P700).

During this flow ATP is generated:

  • PS. I (P 700) is activated by light electrons moved to high energy state and accepted by electron acceptor (FRS) Ferredoxin Reducing Substance, during downhill passes through Ferredoxin. During this process NADPH is reduced by H+ formed during photolysis.
  • Electrons released from PS II are not cycled back but used in the reduction of NADPH+ into NADPH+H+.
  • During electron transport, it generates ATP and this type of Phophorylation is called.

Non Cyclic Photophosphorylation:
The electron flow looks like the letter ‘Z’ so known as Z scheme. It has 3 stages.

  1. Electron transport from water to P 680: Electrons lost by the PS II are replaced by electrons from splitting of the water molecule, producing electron, protons, and oxygen.
  2. Electron transport from P680 to P 700: The flow, through various electron carrier molecules, like pheophytin, plastoquinone (PQ) cytochrome b6 – F complex, plastocyanin (PC) finally reaches P 700 (P.S.I)
  3. Electron transport from P 700 to NADP+: PSI (P700) is excited now and the electrons pass through ferredoxin, NADP is reduced to NADPH + H+

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 9

Question 8.
Explain Calvin cycle or C3 cycle?
Answer:

  • It follows a light reaction.
  • Utilises ATP and NADPH + H+ produced during the light reaction, and reduce carbon dioxide carbohydrate.
  • These reactions do not require light so named as Dark reactions.
  • The first formed product is a 3 carbon compound (Phospho Glyceric Acid) and so-known as C3 cycle.
  • It was found by Melvin, Calvin, and Benson – so known as the Calvin cycle.
  • Occur in the stroma of the chloroplast.
  • It is temperature-dependent, and so it is also called a thermochemical reaction.

Phase I carboxylation (Carbon fixation):

  • The 5 C compound Ribulose 1 – 5 Bisphosphate (RUBP) with the help of (RUBISCO) enzyme accepts one molecule of carbon dioxide → 6 carbon compound (unstable)
  • The 6c compound is broken into → 2 molecules of 3 c compound.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 19

Phase II – Glycolytic Reversai/Reduction :
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 10

Phase III – Regeneration:

  • The regeneration of RUBP involves several intermediate compounds of 6c, 5c, 4c, and 7c compounds.
  • Fixation of one CO2 require 3 ATPs + 2NADPH+ + H+
  • Fixation of six CO2 require I8 ATPs+ 12NADPH+ + H+
  • 6 c compound is the net gain to form hexose sugar.Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 13

Question 9.
Draw the flow Chart of C4 pathway?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 14

Question 10.
Explain CAM Cycle?
Answer:

  • It is one of the carbon path ways in succulent plants growing in semi arid or xerophytic condition.
  • The stomata are closed during day (scoto active) and open during night.
  • This reverse rhythm help to conserve water loss through transpiration and will stop the fixation of CO2 during day.
  • At night time CAM plants fix CO, with help of (PEP) phospho Enol Pyruvic acid and produce (OAA) Oxalo Acetic Acid.
  • Subsequently OAA is converted into a Malic acid-like C4 cycle and get accumulated in the vacuole, increasing the acidity.
  • During daytime stomata, are closed and Malic acid is decarboxylated into pyruvic acid resulting in the decrease of acidity.
  • CO2 thus formed enters into the Calvin cycle and produces carbohydrates.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 15

Question 11.
Give the flow chart of Photo respiration or C2 cycle.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 16

Question 12.
Differentiate Photorespiration and Dark respiration.
Answer:

Photorespiration Dark respiration
1. It takes place in photosynthetic green cells It takes place in all living cells
2. It takes place only in the presence of light It involves only Mitochondria
3. It involves Chloroplast, Peroxisome, and Mitochondria It involves only Mitochondria
4. It does not involve Glycolysis, Kreb’s cycle, and ETS It involves Glycolysis, Kreb’s cycle and ETS
5. Substrate is Glycolic acid Substrate is Carbohydrates protein or fats
6. It is not essential for survival Essential for survival
7. No phosphorylation and yield of ATP Phosphorylation produces ATP energy
8. NADH2 is oxidised to NAD+ NAD+ is reduced to NADH2
9. Hydrogen peroxide is produced Hydrogen peroxide is not produced
10. End products are CO2 and PGA End products are CO2 and water

Question 13.
Give any 5 External factors affecting photosynthesis.
Answer:
1. Carbon dioxide:
330ppm or 0.3% of CO2 is available in the atomsphere If there is an increase in CO2 concentration the rate of Photosynthesis increases -If it increases beyond 500 PPm rate of photosynthesis will be inhibited.

2. Oxygen:
When there is increase in oxygen concentration there is unhibition of photosynthesis Warburg – studied this in chlorellain 1920. This effect is known as Warburg effect.

3. Temperature:

  • Optimum temperature for photosynthesis vary from plant to plant
  • Normally it is 25°C to 3 5°C
  • In Opuntia, it is 55°C
  • In Lichens it is 20°C
  • In Algae growing in hot spring it is 75°C
  • At high and low temperature the stomata will close also the enzymes get inactivated.

4. Water:

  • Pholysis of water provide electrons and protons for the reduction of NADP – directly.
  • Affect stomatal movement and hydration of protoplasm – indirectly.
  • During water stress, supply of NADPH + H+ affected

5. Minerals:

Deficiency Effect
Mg, Fe and N Synthesis of chlorophyll
P phosphorylation reactions
Mn, Cl- photolysis of water
CU Formation of plastocyanin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis

Question 14.
Explain the test tube funnel experiment.
Answer:
AIM: To proove that oxygen is evolved during Photosynthesis.
Procedure:
Take some hydrilla plant and place them at the bottom of a beaker containing water – Add, little NaHCO3 in to the water. Cover plant with an inverted funnel Invert a test tube over the funnel keep this set up in sun light.

Observation: Air bubbles are released from Hydrilla plant and collected in the test tube by downward displace ment of water. Take the test tube carefully by closing with a finger and then introduce a burning match stick, it bum brightly.
Inference: Hydrilla plant perform photosynthesis and oxygen is liberated during photosynthesis.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 17

Question 15.
Explain the experiment to determine rate of photosynthesis by Witmott’s bubbler.
Answer:
Procedure:

  • Wilmott’s bubbler consists of a wide mouth bottle fitted with a single holed cork, a glass tube with lower and having wider opening to insert hydrilla plant.
  • The upper end is fitted to a narrow bottle with water.
  • Fill the bottle with water and insert hydrilla living into wider part of the tube.
  • Hydrilla plant should be cut inside the water to avoid entry of
    air bubbles.
  • Fix the tube with jar which acts as water reservoir.
  • Keep the apparatus in sunlight count the bubbles when they are in same size.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 13 Photosynthesis 18

Question 16.
Differentiate photosynthesis in plants and Bacterial photosynthesis.
Answer:

Photosynthesis Bacterial photosynthesis
1. Cyclic and Non – Cyclic phosphorylation takes place Only cyclic phosphorylation takes place
2. Photosystem I and II involved Photosystem I only involved
3.  Electron donor is water Electron donor is H9S
4.  Oxygen is evolved Oxygen is not evolved
5. Reaction centres are P700 and P680 Reaction centre is P890
6.  Reducing agent is NADPH + H+ Reducing agent is NADH + H+
7. PAR is 400 to 700 nm PAR is above 700nm
8.  Chlorophyll, Carotenoid and Xanthophyll Bacterio chlorophyll and Bacterio viridin
9. Photosynthetic apparatus – chloroplast It is chromosomes and Chromatophores

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 15 Polymorphism Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 15 Polymorphism

11th Computer Science Guide Polymorphism Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer :

Question 1.
Which of the following refers to a function having more than one distinct meaning?
a) Function Overloading
b) Member overloading
c) Operator overloading
d) Operations overloading
Answer:
a) Function Overloading

Question 2.
Which of the following reduces the number of comparisons in a program?
a) Operator overloading
b) Operations overloading
c) Function Overloading
d) Member overloading
Answer:
c) Function Overloading

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 3.
void dispchar(char ch=’$’,int size=10) ‘
{
for(int i=1;i<=size;i++)
cout<<ch;
}

How will you invoke the function dispchar() the following input?
To print $ for 10 times
a) dispchar();
b) dispchar(ch,size);
c) dispchar($,10);
d) dispcharC$’, 10 times);
Answer:
a) dispchar();

Question 4.
Which of the following is not true with respect to function overloading?
a) The overloaded functions must differ in their signature.
b) The return type is also considered for overloading a function.
c) The default arguments of overloaded functions are not considered for Overloading.
d) Destructor function cannot be overloaded.
Answer:
b) The return type is also considered for overloading a function.

Question 5.
Which of the following is an invalid prototype for function overloading?
a) void fun (int x);
void fun (char ch);.
b) void fun (int x);
void fun (int y);
c) void fun (double d);
void fun (char ch);
d) void fun (double d);
void fun (int y);
Answer:
b) void fun (int x);
void fun (int y);

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 6.
Which of the following function(s) combination cannot be considered as overloaded function(s) in the given snippet?
void print(char A,int B); // F1
void printprint(int A, float B); // F2
void Print(int P=10); // F3
void print(); // F4
a) F1,F2,F3,F4
b) F1,F2,F3
c) F1,F2,F4
d) F1,F3,F4
Answer:
b) F1,F2,F3

Question 7.
Which of the fallowing operator is by default overloaded by the compiler?
a) *
b) +
c) +=
d) ==
Answer:
c) +=

Based on the following program answer the questions (8) to (10)
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class Point
{
private:,
int x, y;
public:
Point(int x1,int y1)
{
x=x1;
y=y1;
}
void operator+(Point &pt3);
void show()
{
cout << “x = ” << x << “, y = “<<y;
}
};
void Point: :operator+(Point &pt3)
{
x += pt3.x;
y += pt3.y;
}
int main()
{
Point pt1(3,2),pt2(5,4);
pt1+pt2;
pt1.show();
return 0;
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 8.
Which of the following operator is overloaded?
a) +
b) operator
c) ::
d) =
Answer:
a) +

Question 9.
Which of the following statement invoke operator overloading?
a) pt1+pt2;
b) Point pt1(3,2),pt2(5,4);
c) pt1.show();
d) return 0;
Answer:
a) pt1+pt2;

Question 10.
What is the output for the above program?
a) x=8, y=6
b) x=14, y=14
c) x=8, y=6
d) x=5, y=9
Answer:
a) x=8, y=6

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is function overloading?
Answer:
The ability of the function to process the message or data in more than one form is called function overloading. In other words, function overloading means two or more functions in the same scope share the same name but their parameters are different.

Question 2.
List the operators that cannot be overloaded.
Answer:
The following operators can not be overloaded:

  • scope operator::
  • sizeof
  • member selector.
  • member pointer selector *
  • ternary operator ?:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 3.
class add
{
int x;
public:
add(int);
};

Write an outline definition for the constructor.
Answer:
OUTLINE CONSTRUCTOR DEFINITION
add :: add(int a)
{
x = a;
cout<<“\nParameterized constructor”;
}

Question 4.
Does the return type of function help in overloading a function?
Answer:
No. The return type of overloaded functions is not considered for overloading the same data type.

Question 5.
What is the use of overloading a function?
Answer:

  • Function overloading is not only implementing polymorphism but also reduces the number of comparisons in a program and makes the program to execute faster.
  • It also helps the programmer by reducing the number of function names to be remembered.
  • Program complexity is reduced.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the rules for function overloading?
Answer:
Rules for function overloading:

  1. The overloaded function must differ in the number of its arguments or data types.
  2. The return type of overloaded functions is not considered for overloading the same data type.
  3. The default arguments of overloaded functions are not considered as part of the parameter list in function overloading.

Question 2.
How does a compiler decide as to which function should be invoked when there are many functions? Give an example.
Answer:
The number and types of a function’s parameters are called the function’s signature. When we call an overloaded function, the compiler determines the most appropriate definition to use, by comparing the argument types we have used to call the function with the parameter types specified in the definitions. The process of selecting the most appropriate overloaded function or operator is called overload resolution.

Example:
float area (float radius);
float area (float half, float base, float height);
float area (float length , float breadth);
According to the input passed, the respective function is called.

For example:
x= area(5); // calls area() with one input.
x= area(5,6); // calls area() with two input.
x= area(0.5,5,6);// calls area() with three input.

Question 3.
What is operator overloading? Give some example of operators which can be overloaded.
Answer:
The term operator overloading refers to giving additional functionality to the normal C++ operators.
Example:
The following operators can be overloaded +,++,-,—,+=,-=,*.<,>, etc.

Question 4.
Discuss the benefit of constructor overloading.
Answer:
Function overloading can be applied for constructors, as constructors are special functions of classes. A class can have more than one constructor with a different signature. Constructor overloading provides the flexibility in creating multiple types of objects for a class.

  1. Memory is allocated for the objects.
  2. Initialisation for the objects.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 5.
class sale
{
int cost, discount;
public:
sale(sale &);
};
Write a non-inline definition for the constructor specified;
Answer:
Non-inline definition for constructor:
sale :: sale(sale &s)
{
cost = s.cost;
discount = s.discount;
}

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
What are the rules for operator overloading?
Answer:
Following are some rules to be followed while implementing operator overloading.

  1. The precedence and associativity of an operator cannot be changed.
  2. No new operators can be created, only existing operators can be overloaded.
  3. Cannot redefine the meaning of an operator’s procedure. You cannot change how integers are added. Only additional functions can be to an operator.
  4. Overloaded operators cannot have default arguments.
  5. When binary operators are overloaded, the left-hand object must be an object of the relevant class.

Question 2.
Answer the question (i) to (v) after going through the following class.
Answer:
classBook
{
int BookCode ;
char Bookname[20];
float fees;
public:
Book() //Function 1
{
fees =1000;
BookCode=1;
strcpy (Bookname,”C++”);
}
void display(float C) //Function 2
{
cout< < BookCode < < “:”< < Boo kname<<“:”<<fees<<endl;
}
~Book() //Function 3
{
cout<<“End of Book
Object”<<endl;
}
Book (int BC,char S[ ],float F); //
Function 4
};

i) In the above program, what are Function 1 and Function 4 combined together referred to?
ii) Which concept is illustrated by Function3? When is this function called/ invoked?
iii) What is the use of Function3?
iv) Write the statements in main to invoke function1 and function2
v) Write the definition for Function4
Answer:
i) Constructor
ii) Destructor. It will be executed automatically when object goes out of scope.
iii) To remove the memory space of the object allocated at the time of creation.
iv) a) Book b; // object b automatically call the constructor function Book(); (Function 1)
b) display(4.5); // Invokes the display function by passing 4.5. (Function 2)
v) Definition of Function 4:
Book (int BC,char S[ ],float F)
{
fees=F;
BookCode=BC;
strcpy (Bookname,S);
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 3.
Write the output of the following program.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class Seminar
{
int Time;
public:
Seminar()
{
Time=30;cout<<“Seminar starts now”<<endl;
}
void Lecture()
{
cout<<“Lectures in the seminar on”<<endl;
}
Seminar(int Duration)
{
Time=Duration;cout <<“Welcome to Seminar “<<endl;
}
Seminar(Seminar &D)
{
Time=D.Time;cout<<“Recap of Previous Seminar Content “<<endl;
}
~Semina r()
{
cout<<“Vote of thanks”<<endl;
}
};
int main()
{
Seminar s1,s2(2),s3(s2);
s1.LectureQ;
return 0;
}
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 4.
Debug the following program.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class String
{
public:
charstr[20];
public:
void accept_string
{
cout<<“\n Enter String :
cin>>str;
}
display_string()
{
cout<<str;
}
String operator *(String x) //Concatenating String
{
String s;
strcat(str,str);
strcpy(s.str,str);
gotos;
}
}
int main()
{
String str1, str2, str3;
str1.accept_string();
str2 .accept_string();
Cout<<“\n\n First String is : “;
str1.display_string();
cout<<“\n\n Second String is : “;
str2.display_string();
str3=str1+str2;
cout<<“\n\n Concatenated String is :”;
str3.display_string();
return 0;
}

Correct Program :

using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
class String
{
public:
char str[20];
public:
void accept_string ()
{
cout<<“\n Enter String :”;
cin>>str;
}
void display__string()
{
cout<<str;
}
String operator+(String x)//
Concatenating String
{
Strings;
strcat(str,x.str);
strcpy(s.str,str);
return(s);
}
};
int main()
{
String str1, str2, str3;
str1.accept_string();
str2 .accept_stri ng();
Cout<<“\n\n First String is : “;
str1.display_string();
cout<<“\n\n Second String is : “;
str2.display_string();
str3=str1+str2;
cout<<“\n\n Concatenated String is :”;
str3.display_string();
return 0;
}

Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 5.
Answer the questions based on the following program.
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
using namespace std;
class comp
{
public:
chars[10];
void getstring(char str[10])
{
strcpy(s,str);
}
void operator==(comp);
};
void comp::operator==(comp ob)
{
if(strcmp(s,ob.s)==0)
cout<<“\nStrings are Equal”;
else
cout<<“\nStrings are not Equal”;
}
int main()
{
comp ob, ob1;
char stringl[10], string2[10];
cout<<“Enter First String:”;
cin>>string1;
ob.getstring(stringl);
cout<<“\nEnter Second String:”;
cin>>string2;
ob1.getstring(string2);
ob==ob1;
return 0; ‘
}

i) Mention the objects which will have the scope till the end of the program.
ii) Name the object which gets destroyed in between the program.
iii) Name the operator which is overloaded and write the statement that invokes it.
iv) Write out the prototype of the overloaded member function
v) What types of operands are used for the overloaded operator?
vi) Which constructor will get executed? Write the output of the program
Answer:
i) Objects ob and obi in the main( )will have the scope till the end of the program.
ii) Object ob in the operator== function will be destroyed when exit from it.
iii) The operator overloaded is ==.
The statement invoke the operator
overloaded function is ob == ob1;
iv) Prototype of the overloaded member function is as follows:
void comp::operator==(comp);
v) User-defined data type class (comp) objects are used.
vi) No explicit constructor is not defined in the class. So, a compiler-generated default constructor is created and executed.
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism 3 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

11th Computer Science Guide Polymorphism Additional Questions and Answers

Choose The Correct Answer: (1 Mark)

Question 1.
The number and types of a function’s parameters are called the …………………
(a) overload resolution
(b) function’s signature
(c) function overloading
(d) operator overloading
Answer:
(b) function’s signature

Question 2.
In C++, polymorphism is achieved through _________ overloading.
a) Function
b) Operator
c) Operand
d) Either A or B
Answer:
d) Either A or B

Question 3.
The return type of overloaded functions is not considered for overloading same …………………
(a) polymorphism
(b) prototype
(c) data type
(d) overloading
Answer:
(c) data type

Question 4.
The number and types of a function’s parameters are called the function’s________.
a) Signature
b) Syntax
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Signature

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 5.
The mechanism of giving special meaning to an operator is known as …………………
(a) operator overloading
(b) parameter
(c) function overloading
(d) polymorphism
Answer:
(a) operator overloading

Question 6.
______ overloading is not only implementing polymorphism but also reduces the number of comparisons in a program and makes the program execute faster.
a) Function
b) Operator
c) Operand
d) Either A or B
Answer:
a) Function

Question 7.
The overloaded operator is given using the keyword ………………… followed by an operator symbol.
(a) operator
(b) data type
(c) object
(d) function
Answer:
(a) operator

Question 8.
The ______ of overloaded functions are not considered as part of the parameter list in function overloading.
a) arguments
b) default arguments
c) data
d) None of these
Answer:
b) default arguments

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 9.
The ______ of overloaded functions are not considered for overloading the same data type.
a) return type
b) arguments
c) data
d) None of these
Answer:
a) return type

Question 10.
The overloaded function must differ in ______
a) the number of its arguments
b) data types
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 11.
_________ overloading provides the flexibility of creating multiple types of objects for a class,
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Member function
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 12.
Compiler identifies a given member function is a constructor by its ________
a) name
b) return type
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 12.
Compiler Identifies a given member function is a constructor by its ______
a) name
b) return type
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 13.
The term overloading refers to giving additional functionality to the normal C++ operators.
a) Function
b) Operator
c) Operand
d) Either A or B
Answer:
b) Operator

Question 14.
__________ operator can not be overloaded.
a) scope operator::
b) sizeof
c) member selector.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 15.
________ operator can not be overloaded.
a) Member pointer selector
b) Ternary operator ?:
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 16.
can be Overloaded.
a) User-defined types (objects)
b) Literals
c) Identifiers
d) None of these
Answer:
a) User-defined types (objects)

Very Short Answers (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Give the syntax for operator overloading.
Answer:
RetumType classname :: Operator Operator Symbol (argument list)
{

\\ Function body

}
Example: Deposit Deposit: : operator + (Deposit dl);

Question 2.
How polymorphism is applied in C++?
Answer:
In C++, polymorphism is achieved through function overloading and operator overloading.

 

Question 4.
What is a function signature?
Answer:
The number and types of a function’s parameters are called the function’s signature.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Short Answers (3 Marks)

Question 1.
How does the compiler determine the appropriate function in overloading?
Answer:
When you call an overloaded function, the compiler determines the most appropriate definition to use, by comparing the argument types you have used to call the function with the parameter types specified in the definitions. The process of selecting the most appropriate overloaded function or operator is called overload resolution.

Question 2.
Explain overload resolution.
Answer:
When you call an overloaded function, the compiler determines the most appropriate definition . to use, by comparing the argument types you have used to call the function with the parameter types specified in the definitions. The process of selecting the most appropriate overloaded function or operator is called overload resolution.

Question 3.
Write operator overloading syntax.
Answer:
Operator Overloading Syntax
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism 5

Question 4.
Write a program to implement function overloading.
Answer:
Program:
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
void print(int i)
{
cout<< ” It is integer” << i <<endl;
}
void print(double f)
{
cout<< ” It is float” << f <<endl;
void print(string c)
{
cout<< ” It is string ” << c <<endl;
}
int main()
{
print(10);
print(10.10);
print(‘Ten”);
return 0;
}
Output:
It is integer 10
It is float 10.1
It is string Ten

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Explain in Detail (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Write a program to implement function overloading.
Program
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
long add(long, long);
long add(long,long,long);
float add(float, float);
intmain()
{
long a, b, c,d;
float e, f, g;
cout << “Enter three integers\n”;
cin >> a >> b>>c;
//number of arguments different but same
data type
d=add(a,b,c);
cput << “Sum of 3 integers: ” << d << endl;
cout << “Enter two integers\n”;
cin >> a >> b;
//two arguments data type same with above function call and different with below function call
c = add(a, b);
cout << “Sum of 2 integers: ” << c << endl;
cout << “Enter two floating point numbers\n”;
cin >> e >> f;
//two arguments similar to the above function call but data type different
g = add(e, f);
cout << “Sum of floats: ” << g << endl;
}
long add(long c, long g)
{
long sum;
sum = c + g;
return sum;
}
float add(float c, float g)
{
float sum;
sum = c + g;
return sum;
}
long add(long c, long g,long h)
{
long sum;
sum = c + g+h;
return sum;
}

Output:
Enter three integers
3 4 5
Sum of 3 integers: 12 Enter two integers
4 6
Sum of 2 integers: 10
Enter two floating-point numbers
2.1 3.1
Sum of floats: 5.2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 2.
Write the coding for the following output using constructor overloading.
Output:
Constructor without parameters..
Parameterized constructor…
Copy Constructor…
Enter data… 20 30
Object a:
The numbers are..20 30
The sum of the numbers are.. 50
Object b:
The numbers are..10 20
The sum of the numbers are.. 30
Object c:
The numbers are..10 20
The sum of the numbers are.. 30
Answer:
#include
using namespace std;
class add
{
int num1, num2, sum;
public:
add()
{
cout << “\n Constructor without parameters…”;
num1 = 0;
num2 = 0;
sum = 0;
}
add (int s1, int s2 )
{
cout << “\n Parameterized constructor…”;
num1= s1;
num2=s2;
sum=0;
}
add (add &a)
{
cout << “\n Copy Constructor…”; ‘
num1 = a.num1;
num2 = a.num2;
sum = 0;
}
void getdata()
{
cout << “\n Enter data …”; cin>>num 1 >> num2;
}
void addition()
{
sum=num 1 + num2;
}
void putdata()
{
cout << “\n The numbers are..”;
cout < cout << “\n The sum of the numbers are..” << sum; }
};
int main()
{
add a, b (10, 20), c(b);
a. getdata();
a. addition();
b. addition();
c. addition();
cout << “\n Object a : “;
a. putdata();
cout << “\n Object b : “;
b. putdata();
cout << “\n Object c..”;
c. putdata();
return 0;
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 3.
Write a program to find complex number addition and subtraction using binary operator overloading.
Answer:
Program:
//Complex number addition and subtraction
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class complex
{
int real,img;
public:
void read()
{
cout<<“\nEnter the REAL PART :”;
cin>>real;
cout<<“\nEnter the IMAGINARY
PART : “;
cin>>img;
}
complex operator+(complex c2)
{
complex c3;
c3.real=real+c2.real;
c3.img=img+c2.img;
return c3;
}
complex operator-(complex c2)
{
complex c3;
c3.real=real-c2.real;
c3.img=img-c2.img;
return c3;
}
void display()
{
cout<<real<<“+”<<img<<“i”;
}
};
int main()
{
complex c1,c2,c3;
int choice, cont;
do
{
cout<<“\t\tCOMPLEX NUMBERS\n\
n1.ADDITION\n\n2.SUBTRACTION\n\n”;
cout<<“\nEnter your choice :”;
cin>>choice;
if(choice==1|| choice==2)
{
cout<<“\n\nEnter the First Complex
Number”;
cl.read();
cout<<“\n\nEnter the Second Complex
Number”;
c2.read();
}
switch(choice)
{
// binary + overloaded
case 1 : c3=c1+c2;
cout<<“\n\nSUM = “;
c3.display();
break;
case 2 : c3=c1-c2; // binary -overloaded
cout<<“\n\nResult = “;
c3.display();
break;
default: cout<<“\n\nUndefined Choice”;
}
cout<<“\n\nDo You Want to Continue?(1-Y,0-N)”;
cin>>cont;
}while(cont==1);
return 0;
}

Output :
COMPLEX NUMBERS
1.ADDITION
2.SUBTRACTION
Enter your choice : 1
Enter the First Complex Number
Enter the REAL PART : 3
Enter the IMAGINARY PART: 4
Enter the Second Complex Number
Enter the REAL PART: 5
Enter the IMAGINARY PART: 8
SUM = 8+12i,
Do You Want to Continue?(1-Y,0-N)1
COMPLEX NUMBERS
1.ADDITION
2.SUBTRACTION
Enter your choice: 2
Enter the First Complex Number
Enter the REAL PART: 8
Enter the IMAGINARY PART: 10
Enter the Second Complex Number
Enter the REAL PART: 4
Enter the IMAGINARY PART: 5
Result = 4+5i
Do You Want to Continue? (1-Y,0-N)0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Question 4.
Write a program for concatenation of string using operator overloading.
Answer:
program:
#include<string.h>
# i ncl ude < iostream >
using namespace std;
class strings
{
public:
char s[20];
void getstring(char str[])
{
strcpy(s,str);
}
void operator+(strings);
};
void strings: :operator+(strings ob)
{
strcat(s,ob.s);
cout<<“\nConcatnated String is:”<<s;
>
int main()
{
strings ob1, ob2;
char stringl[10], string2[10];
cout<<“\nEnter First String:”;
cin>>string1;
ob1.getstring(string1);
cout<<“\nEnter Second String:”;
cin>>string2;
ob2.getstring(string2);
//Calling + operator to Join/Concatenate strings
ob1+ob2;
return 0;
}

Output :
Enter First String: COMPUTER
Enter Second String: SCIENCE
Concatenated String is: COMPUTER SCIENCE

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism

Case Study

Suppose you have a Kitty Bank with an initial amount of Rs.500 and you have to add some more amount to it. Create a class ‘Deposit’ with a data member named ‘amount’ with an initial value of Rs.500. Now make three constructors of this class as follows:

1. without any parameter – no amount will be added to the Kitty Bank
2. has a parameter which is the amount that will be added to the Kitty Bank
3. whenever an amount is added an additional equal amount will be deposited automatically
Create an object of the ‘Deposit’ and display the final amount in the Kitty Bank.
Program:
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
class Deposit
{
public:
int amount;
Deposit()
{
amount = 500;
}
Deposit(int a)
{
amount = 500 + a;
}
Deposit(int a, int b)
{
amount = 500 + a + b;
}
void display()
{
cout<<amount;
}
};
int main()
{
Deposit D1;
int amt;
cout<<“\nEnter amount to deposit”;
cin>>amt;
cout<<“\nInitial Amount in the Bank
Rs.”<<D1.amount;
Deposit D2(amt);
cout<<“\nAmount in the Bank after deposit the amount is Rs.”<<D2.amount;
Deposit D3(amt,amt);
cout<<“\nAmount in the Bank after deposit with addition equal amount deposit
RS.”<<D3. amount;
}
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 15 Polymorphism 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 16 Inheritance Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 16 Inheritance

11th Computer Science Guide Inheritance Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1.
Which of the following is the process of creating new classes from an existing class?
a) Polymorphism
b) Inheritance
c) Encapsulation
d) superclass
Answer:
b) Inheritance

Question 2.
Which of the following derives a dass student from the base class school?
a) school: student
b) class student: public school
c) student: public school
d) class school: public student
Answer:
b) class student: public school

Question 3.
The type of inheritance that reflects the transitive nature is
a) Single Inheritance
b) Multiple Inheritance
c) Multilevel Inheritance
d) Hybrid Inheritance
Answer:
c) Multilevel Inheritance

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 4.
Which visibility mode should be used when you want the features of the base class to be available to the derived class but not to the classes that are derived from the derived dass?
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All of these
Answer:
a) Private

Question 5.
Inheritance is the process of creating new class from
a) Base class
b) abstract
c) derived class
d) Function
Answer:
a) Base class

Question 6.
A class is derived from a class which is a derived class itself, then this is referred to as
a) multiple inheritances
b) multilevel inheritance
c) single inheritance
d) double inheritance
Answer:
b) multilevel inheritance

Question 7.
Which amongst the following is executed in the order of inheritance?
a) Destructor
b) Member function
c) Constructor
d) Object
Answer:
b) Member function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 8.
Which of the following is true with respect to inheritance?
a) Private members of base class are inherited to the derived class with private
b) Private members of base class are not inherited to the derived class with private accessibility
c) Public members of base class are inherited but not visible to the derived class
d) Protected members of base class are inherited but not visible to the outside class
Answer:
b) Private members of base class are not inherited to the derived class with private accessibility

Question 9.
Based on the following dass decoration answer the questions (from 9.1 o 9.5 )

class vehicle
{
int wheels;
public:
void input_data(float,float);
void output_data();
protected:
int passenger;
};
class heavy_vehicle: protected vehicle
{
int diesel_petrol;
protected:
int load;
protected:
int load;
public:
void read_data(float,float)
void write_data(); };
class bus: private heavy_vehicle
{
char Ticket[20];
public:
void fetch_data(char);
void display_data(); >;
};

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 9.1.
Which is the base class of the class heavy, vehicle?
a) Bus
b) heavy_vehicle
c) vehicle
d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
c) vehicle

Question 9.2.
The data member that can be accessed from the function displaydata()
a) passenger
b) load
c) Ticket
d) All of these
Answer:
d) All of these

Question 9.3.
The member function that can be accessed by an objects of bus Class is
a) input_data()
b) read_data() ,output_data()write_data()
c) fetch_data(),display_data()
d) All of these
Answer:
c) fetch_data(),display_data()

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 9.4.
The member function that is inherited as public by Class Bus
a) input_data()
b) read_data(),output_data(),write_data()
c) fetch_data(), display_data()
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Question 10.
class x
{
int a;
public :
x()
{}
};
class y
{
x x1;
public:
y()
{}
};
class z : public y,x
{
int b;
public:
z()
{}
}z1;

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

What is the order of constructor for object z to be invoked?
a) z,y,x,x
b) x,y,z,x
c) y,x,x,z
d) x,y,z
e) x,y,x,z
Answer:
e) x,y,x,z

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is inheritance?
Answer:
Inheritance is one of the most important features of Object-Oriented Programming. In object-oriented programming, inheritance enables a new class and its objects to take on the properties of the existing classes.

Question 2.
What is a base class?
Answer:
The class to be inherited is called a base class or parent class.

Question 3.
Why derived class is called a power-packed class?
Answer:

  • Multilevel Inheritance: In multilevel inheritance, the constructors will be executed in the order of inheritance.
  • Multiple Inheritance: If there are multiple base classes, then it starts executing from the leftmost base class.

Question 4.
In what multilevel and multiple inheritances differ though both contains many base class?
Answer:
In case of multiple inheritance derived class have more than one base classes (More than one parent). But in multilevel inheritance derived class have only one base class (Only one parent).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 5.
What is the difference between public and private visibility mode?
Answer:
Private visibility mode:
When a base class is inherited with private visibility mode the public and protected members of the base class become ‘private’ members of the derived class.

Public visibility mode:
When a base class is inherited with public visibility mode, the protected members of the base class will be inherited as protected members of the derived class and the public members of the base class will be inherited as public members of the derived class.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the points to be noted while deriving a new class?
Answer:

The following points should be observed for defining the derived class:

  1. The keyword class has to be used.
  2. The name of the derived class is to be given after the keyword class.
  3. A single colon.
  4. The type of derivation (the visibility mode), namely private, public or protected. If no visibility mode is specified, then by default the visibility mode is considered private.
  5. The names of all base classes (parent classes) separated by a comma.

class derivedclass_name :visibility_mode
base_class_name
{
// members of derived class
};

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 2.
What is differences between the members present in the private visibility mode and the members present in the public visibility mode?
Answer:
Private visibility mode:
When a base class is inherited with private visibility mode the public and protected members of the base class become ‘private’ members of the derived class.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 1
Private visibility members can not be inherited further. So, it can not be directly accessed by its derived classes.
Public visibility mode:
When a base class is inherited with public visibility mode, the protected members of the base class will be inherited as protected members of the derived class and the public members of the base class will be inherited as public members of the derived class.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 2
Public visibility members can be inherited by its child and can access in it.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 3.
What is the difference between polymorphism and inheritance though are used for the reusability of code?
Answer:
Polymorphism:

  • Reusability of code is implemented through functions (or) methods.
  • Polymorphism is the ability of a function to respond differently to different messages.
  • Polymorphism is achieved through overloading.

Inheritance:

  • Reusability of code is implemented through classes.
  • Inheritance is the process of creating derived classes from the base class or classes.
  • Inheritance is achieved by various types of inheritances namely single, multiple, multilevel, hybrid and hierarchical inheritances.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 4.
What do you mean by overriding?
Answer:
When a derived class member function has the same name as that of its base class member function, the derived class member function shadows/hides the base class’s inherited function. This situation is called function overriding and this can be resolved by giving the base class name followed by :: and the member function name.

Question 5.
Write some facts about the execution of constructors and destructors in inheritance.
Answer:

  1. Base class constructors are executed first, before the derived class constructors execution.
  2. Derived class cannot inherit the base class constructor but it can call the base class constructor by using Base_class name: :base_class_constructor() in the derived class definition
  3. If there are multiple base classes, then it starts executing from the leftmost base class
  4. In multilevel inheritance, the constructors will be executed in the order of inheritance The destructors are executed in the reverse order of inheritance.

IV. Explain In Brief (Five Marks)

Question 1.
Explain the different types of inheritance.
Answer:
Types of Inheritance;
There are different types of inheritance viz., Single Inheritance, Multiple inheritance, Multilevel inheritance, hybrid inheritance and hierarchical inheritance.

1. Single Inheritance:
When a derived class inherits only from one base class, it is known as single inheritance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 3

2. Multiple Inheritance;
When a derived class inherits from multiple base classes it is known as multiple inheritance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 4

3. Hierarchical inheritance:
When more than one derived classes are created from & single base class known as Hierarchical inheritance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 5

4. Multilevel Inheritance
The transitive nature of inheritance is itself reflected by this form of inheritance. When a class is derived from a class which is a derived class – then it is referred to as multilevel inheritance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 6

5. Hybrid inheritance:
When there is a combination of more than one type of inheritance, it is known as hybrid inheritance. Hence, it may be a combination of Multilevel and Multiple inheritances or Hierarchical and Multilevel inheritance or Hierarchical, Multilevel and Multiple inheritances.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 2.
Explain the different visibility modes through pictorial representation.
Answer:
Private visibility mode:
When a base class is inherited with private visibility mode the public and protected members of the base class become ‘private’ members of the derived class.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 8

Protected visibility mode:
When a base class is inherited with protected visibility mode the protected and public members of the base class become ‘protected members’ of the derived class.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 9

Public visibility mode:
When a base class is inherited with public visibility mode, the protected members of the base class will be inherited as protected members of the derived class and the public members of the base class will be inherited as public members of the derived class.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 10

Question 3.
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
#include<stdio.h>
using name spacestd;
class publisher
{
char pname[15];
char hoffice[15];
char address[25];
double turnover;
protected:
char phone[3][10];
void register();
public:
publisher();
publisher();
void enter data();
void disp data();
};
class branch
{
char bcity[15];
char baddress[25];
protected:
int no_of_emp;
public:
char bphone[2][10];
branch();
~branch();
void havedata();
void givedata();
};
class author: public branch, publisher
{
int aut_code;
charaname[20];
float income;
public:
author();
~author();
void getdata();
void putdata();
};

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Answer The Following Questions Based On The Above Given Program:

3.1. Which type of Inheritance is shown in the program?
3.2. Specify the visibility mode of base classes.
3.3 Give the sequence of Constructor/Destructor Invocation when object of class author is created.
3.4. Name the base class(/es) and derived class (/es).
3.5 Give number of bytes to be occupied by the object of the following class:
(a) publisher
(b) branch
(c) author
3.6. Write the names of data members accessible from the object of class author.
3.7. Write the names of all member functions accessible from the object of class author.
3.8 Write the names of all members accessible from member functions of class author.
Answer:
3.1 Multiple Inheritance
3.2 public
3.3 Constructors branch, publisher and author are executed.
Destructors author, publisher and branch will be executed.
3.4 Base classes : branch and publisher Derived class : author
3.5 a) publisher class object requires 93 bytes
b) branch class object requires 64 bytes
c) author class object requires 181 bytes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 4.
Consider the following C++ code and answer the questions.
class Personal
{
int Class, Rno;
char Section;
protected:
char Name[20];
public:
personal();
void pentry();
void Pdisplay();
};
class Marks:private Personal
{
float M{5};
protected:
char Grade[5];
public:
Marks();
void Mentry();
void Mdisplay();
};
class Result:public Marks
{
float Total,Agg;
public:
char FinalGrade, Commence[20];
Result();
void Rcalculate();
void Rdisplay();
};

4.1. Which type of Inheritance is shown in the program?
4.2. Specify the visibility mode of base classes.
4.3 Give the sequence of Constructor/Destructor Invocation when object of class Result is created.
4.4. Name the base class(/es) and derived class (/es).
4.5 Give number of bytes to be occupied by the object of the following class:
(a) Personal
(b) Marks
(c) Result
4.6. Write the names of data members accessible from die object of class Result.
4.7. Write the names of all member functions accessible from the object of class Result.
4.8 Write the names of all members accessible from member functions of class Result.
Answer:
4.1 Multilevel Inheritance
4.2 For Marks class – private visibility
For Result class – public visibility
4.3 Constructors Personal, Marks and Result be executed.
Destructors Result, Marks and Personal will be executed.
4.4 Base classes : Personal and Marks
Derived classes : Marks and Result

4.5 a) Personal class object requires 28 bytes (using Dev C++)
b) Marks class object requires 53 bytes (using Dev C++)
c) Result class requires 82 bytes (using Dev C++)

4.6 Data members FinalGrade, Commence(Own class members) alone can be accessed.
No members inherited under public, so base class members can not be accessed.

4.7 Member functions
Rcalculate( ), Rdisplay (own class member functions)
Mentry, Mdisplay (derived from Marks class) alone can be accessed.
Personal class public member functions can not be accessed because Marks class inherited under private visibility mode.

4.8 1) Data members

  • Total, Agg, Final Grade and Commence of its own class
  • M, Grade from Marks class can be accessed.

Personal class data members can not be accessed because Marks class inherited under private visibility mode.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

2) Member functions
Mentry and Mdisplay from Marks class can be invoked from Result class member
Personal class member-functions can not be accessed because Marks class inherited under private visibility mode.

Question 5.
Write the output of the following program.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class A
{
protected:
int x;
public:
void show()
{
cout<<“x = “<<x<<endl;
}
A()
{
cout<<endl<<” I am class A “<<endl;
}
~A()
{
cout<<endl<<” Bye”;
}
};
class B : public A
{
protected:
int y;
public:
B(int x, int y)
{
//this -> is used to denote the objects datamember this->x = x;
//this -> is used to denote the objects datamember this->y = y;
}
B()
{
cout<<endl<<“I am class B”<<endl;
}
~B()
{
cout<<endl<<” Bye”;
}
void show()
{
cout<<“x = “<<x<<endl;
cout<<“y = “<<y<<endl;
}
};
int main()
{
A objA;
B objB(30, 20);
objB.show();
return 0;
}
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance

Question 6.
Debug the following program.
Output:
—————
15
14
13

Program :
%include(iostream.h)
#include<conio.h>
Class A
{
public;
int al,a2:a3;
void getdata[]
{
a1=15;
a2=13;a3=13;
}
}
Class B:: public A()
{
PUBLIC
voidfunc()
{
int b1:b2:b3;
A::getdata[];
b1=a1;
b2=a2;
a3=a3;
cout<<b1<<‘\t'<<b2<<‘t\'<<b3;
}
void main()
{
clrscr()
B der;
derl:func();
getch();
}
Answer:
Modified Error Free Program :
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<conio.h>
class A
{
public:
int a1,a2,a3;
void getdata()
{
a1=15;
a2=14;
a3=13;
}
};
class B : public A
{
public:
void func()
{
int b1,b2,b3;
A::getdata();
b1=a1;
b2=a2;
b3=a3;
cout<<b1<<‘\n'<<b2<<‘\n'<<b3;
}
};
int main()
{
B der;
der.func();
getch();
return 0;
}
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 16 Inheritance 12

11th Computer Science Guide Inheritance Additional Questions and Answers

Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1.
When a derived class inherits only from one base class, it is known as ………………
(a) multiple inheritances
(b) multilevel inheritance
(c) hierarchical inheritance
(d) single inheritance
Answer:
(d) single inheritance

Question 2.
_____ enables new class and its objects to take on the properties of the existing classes.
a) Inheritance
b) Encapsulation
c) Overriding
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Inheritance

Question 3.
When more than one derived classes are created from a single base class, it is called ………………
(a) inheritance
(b) hybrid inheritance
(c) hierarchical inheritance
(d) multiple inheritances
Answer:
(c) hierarchical inheritance

Question 4.
A class that inherits from a superclass is called a _______ class.
a) Sub
b) Base class
c) Derived
d) Sub or Derived
Answer:
d) Sub or Derived

Question 5.
The ……………… are invoked in reverse order.
(a) constructor
(b) destructor
(c) pointer
(d) operator
Answer:
(b) destructor

Question 6.
There are ________ types of inheritance,
a) Two
b) Three
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
d) Five

Question 7.
_________ inheritance is a type of inheritance.
a) Single or Hybrid
b) Multilevel / Hierarchical
c) Multiple
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 8.
When a derived class inherits only from one base class, it is known as ________ inheritance.
a) Single
b) Multilevel / Hierarchical
c) Multiple
d) Hybrid
Answer:
a) Single

Question 9.
When a derived class inherits from multiple base classes it is known as _________ inheritance.
a) Single
b) Multilevel / Hierarchical
c) Multiple
d) Hybrid
Answer:
c) Multiple

Question 10.
When more than one derived classes are created from a single base class, it is known
as_________inheritance.
a) Single
b) Hierarchical
c) Multiple
d) Hybrid
Answer:
b) Hierarchical

Question 11.
The transitive nature of inheritance is itself reflected by _____ form of inheritance.
a) Single
b) Multilevel
c) Multiple
d) Hybrid
Answer:
b) Multilevel

Question 12.
When a class is derived from a class which is a derived class – then it is referred to as ______ inheritance.
a) Single
b) Multilevel
c) Multiple
d) Hybrid
Answer:
b) Multilevel

Question 13.
When there is a combination of more than one type of inheritance, it is known as ________ inheritance.
a) Single
b) Multilevel
c) Multiple
d) Hybrid
Answer:
d) Hybrid

Question 14.
Hybrid inheritance may be a combination of ________inheritance.
a) Multilevel and Multiple
b) Hierarchical and Multilevel
c) Hierarchical, Multilevel and Multiple
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 15.
The order of inheritance by derived class, to inherit the base class is ________
a) Left to Right
b) Right to Left
c) Top to Bottom
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Left to Right

Question 16.
In ________ inheritance the base classes dc not have any relationship between them,
a) Single
b) Multilevel
c) Hybrid
d) Multiple
Answer:
d) Multiple

Question 17.
In ________inheritance a derived class itself acts as a base class to derive another class.
a) Single
b) Multilevel
c) Multiple
d) Multiple
Answer:
b) Multilevel

Question 18.
_________ inheritance is similar to relation between grandfather, father and child,
a) Single
b) Multilevel
c) Multiple
d) Multiple
Answer:
b) Multilevel

Question 19.
A class without any declaration will have ________byte size.
a) 1
b) 0
b) 2
d) 10
Answer:
a) 1

Question 20.
class x{}; x occupies
a) 1
b) 0
b) 2
d) 10
Answer:
a) 1

Question 21.
In inheritance, which member of the base class will be acquired by the derived class is done by using ________ .
a) Visibility modes
b) Data members
c) Member functions
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Visibility modes

Question 22.
The accessibility of base class by the derived class is controlled by ________
a) Visibility modes
b) Data members
c) Member functions
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Visibility modes

Question 23.
_______ is a visibility modes.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 24.
The default visibility mode is ________
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) private

Question 25.
When a base class is inherited with ________ visibility mode the public and protected members of the base class become ‘private’ members of the derived class.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) private

Question 26.
When a base class is inherited with ________ visibility mode the protected and public members of the base class become ‘protected members’ of the derived class,
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) All the above
Answer:
c) protected

Question 27.
When a base class is inherited with ________ visibility mode, the protected members of the base class will be inherited as protected members of the derived class and the public members of the base class will be inherited as public members of the derived class.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) All the above
Answer:
b) public

Question 28.
When classes are inherited with ________the private members of the base class are not inherited they are only visible.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
d) Either A or B or C

Question 29.
When classes are inherited with ________ the private members of the base class are continue to exist in derived classes, and cannot be accessed.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
d) Either A or B or C

Question 30.
________inheritance should be used when you want the features of the base class to be available to the derived class but not to the classes that are derived from the derived class.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
a) private

Question 31.
________ inheritance should be used when features of base class to be available only to the derived class members but not to the outside world.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
c) protected

Question 32.
_____ inheritance can be used when features of base class to be available the derived class members and also to the outside world.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
b) public

Question 33.
When an object of the derived class is created, the compiler first call the ________class constructor.
a) Base
b) Derived
c) Either Base or Derived
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Base

Question 34.
When the object of a derived class expires first the ________class destructor is invoked.
a) Base
b) Derived
c) Either Base or Derived
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Derived

Question 35.
The ________ are executed in the order of inherited class.
a) Constructors
b) Destructors
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructors

Question 36.
The ________ are executed in the reverse order.
a) Constructors
b) Destructors
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Destructors

Question 37.
If there are multiple base classes, then it starts executing from the ________base class.
a) Leftmost
b) Rightmost
c) Compiler decided
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Leftmost

Question 38.
________ members of the base class can be indirectly accessed by the derived class using the public or protected member function of the base class.
a) private
b) public
c) protected
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
a) private

Question 39.
________ member function has the access privilege for the private members of the base class.
a) public
b) protected
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 40.
________ functions can access the private members.
a) Member
b) Non-member
c) Destructor
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Member

Question 41.
In case of inheritance there are situations where the member function of the base class and derived classes have the same name. The ________operator resolves this problem.
a) Conditional
b) Membership
c) Scope resolution
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Scope resolution

Question 42.
When a derived class member function has the same name as that of its base class member function, the derived class member function ________the base class’s inherited function.
a) Shadows
b) Hides
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 43.
When a derived class member function has the same name as that of its base class member function, the derived class member function shadows/hides the base class’s inherited function is called function ________
a) Overriding
b) Overloading
c) Shadowing
d) Either A or C
Answer:
d) Either A or C

Question 44.
________ pointer is a constant pointer that holds the memory address of the current object.
a) this
b) void
c) new
d) None of these
Answer:
a) this

Question 45.
________pointer is useful when the argument variable name in the member function and the data member name are same.
a) this
b) void
c) new
d) None of these
Answer:
a) this

Very Short Answers (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Write a short note on hierarchical inheritance.
Answer:
When more than one derived class is created from a single base class, it is known as Hierarchical inheritance.

Question 2.
What are the types of inheritance?
Answer:
There are different types of inheritance viz., Single Inheritance, Multiple inheritance, Multilevel inheritance, hybrid inheritance and hierarchical inheritance.

Question 3.
Give the syntax of deriving a class.
Answer:
Syntax:
class derived_dass_name :visibility_mode base_dass_name
{
// members of derivedclass
};

Question 4.
Write note on this pointer.
Answer:
‘this’ pointer is a constant pointer that holds the memory address of the current object. It identifies the currently calling object. It is useful when the argument variable name in the member function and the data member name are same. To identify the data member it will be given as this->data member name.

Short Answers (3 Marks)

Question 1.
What are inheritance and access control?
Answer:
When you declare a derived class, a visibility mode can precede each base class in the base list of the derived class. This does not alter the access attributes of the individual members of a base class but allows the derived class to access the members of a base class with restriction.

Classes can be derived using any of the three visibility modes:

  1. In a public base class, public and protected members of the base class remain public and protected members of the derived class.
  2. In a protected base class, public and protected members of the base class are protected members of the derived class.
  3. In a private base class, public and protected members of the base class become private members of the derived class.
  4. In all these cases, private members of the base class remain private and cannot be used by the derived class.
  5. However, it can be indirectly accessed by the derived class using the public or protected member function of the base class since they have the access privilege for the private members of the base class.

Question 2.
Write a program for the working of constructors and destructors under inheritance.
Program
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class base
{
public:
base()
{
cout<<“\nConstructor of base class…”;
}
~base()
{
cout<<“\nDestructor of base class….”;
}
};
class derived:public base
{
public :
derived()
{
cout << “\nConstructor of derived …”;
}
~derived()
{
cout << “\nDestructor of derived…”;
}
};
class derived 1 :public derived
{
public :
derived 1()
{
cout << “\nConstructor of derived! //, …”;
}
~derived1()
{
cout << “\nDestructor of derived …”;
}
};
int main()
{
derivedl x;
return 0;
}

Output:
Constructor of base class…
Constructor of derived …
Constructor of derived …
Destructor of derived …
Destructor of derived …
Destructor of base class….

Question 3.
What about access control in a publicly derived class?
Answer:
From a publicly derived class, public and protected members of the base class remain public and protected members of the derived class. The public members can be accessed by the object of the derived class similar to its own members in public.

Question 4.
What about access control in the privately derived class?
Answer:
From a privately derived class, public and protected members of the base class become private members of the derived class. Hence it is not possible to access the derived members using the object of the derived class. The Derived members are invoked by calling it from the publicly defined members.

Explain in Detail

Question 1.
Write a program to implement single Inheritance.
Program
# include <iostream>
using namespace std;
class student //base class
{
private :
char name[20];
int rno;
public:
void acceptnameO
{
cout<<“\n Enter roll no and name ..”;
cin>>rno>>name;
}
void displayname()
{
cout<<“\n Roll no :-“<<rno;
cout<<“\n Name :-“<<name<<endl;
}
};
class exam : public student
//derived class with single base class
{
public:
int markl, mark2 ,mark3,mark4,marks, mark6, total;
void acceptmark()
{
cout<<“\n Enter lang, eng, phy, che, esc, mat marks..
cin>>mark1>>mark2>>mark3>>
mark4>>mark5>>mark6;
}
void displaymark()
{
cout<<“\n\t\t, Marks Obtained
cout<<“\n Language.. “<<mark1;
cout<<“\n English .. “<<mark2;
cout<<“\n Physics .. “<<mark3;
cout<<“\n Chemistry.. “<<mark4;
cout<<“\n Comp.sci.. “<<mark5;
cout«”\n Maths .. “<<mark6;
}
};
int main()
{
exam e1;
el.acceptname();
//calling base class function using derived
class object
e1.acceptmark();
e1.displayname();
//calling base class function using derived
class object
e1l.displaymark();
return 0;
}
Output
Enter roll no and name . . 1201
KANNAN
Enter lang,eng,phy,che,esc,mat
marks.. 100 100 100 100 100 100
Roll no:-1201
Name:-KANNAN
Marks Obtained
Language.. 100
English .. 100
Physics .. 100
Chemistry.. 100
Comp.sci.. 100
Maths .. 100

Question 2.
Write a program to implement multiple inheritance.
Program :
# include <iostream>
using namespace std;
class student //base class
{
private :
char name[20];
int rno;
public:
void acceptname()
{
cout<<“\n Enter roll no and name.. “;
cin>>rno>>name;
}
void displayname()
{
cout<<“\n Roll no :-“<<rno;
cout<<“\n Name:-” << name << endl;
}
};
class detail //Base class
{
int dd,mm,yy;
char cl[4];
public:
void acceptdob()
{
cout<<“\n Enter date,month,year in digits and class ..”;
cin>>dd>>mm>>yy>>cl;
}
void displaydob()
{
cout<<“\n class:-“<<cl;
cout<<“\t\t DOB : “<<dd«” –
“<<mm<<“-” <<yy<<endl;
}
};
//derived class with multiple base class
class exam: public student, public detail
{
public:
int mark1, mark2 ,mark3,mark4,mark5, mark6, total;
void acceptmark()
{
cout<<“\n Enter lang, eng, phy, che, esc, mat marks..”;
cin>>mark1>>mark2>>mark3>> mark4>>mark5>>mark6;
}
void displaymark()
{
cout<<“\n\t\t Marks Obtained
cout<<“\n Language.. “<<markl;
cout<<“\n English .. “<<mark2;
cout<<“\n Physics .. “<<mark3;
cout<<“\n Chemistry.. “<<mark4;
cout<<“\n Comp.sci.. “<<mark5;
cout<<“\n Maths .. “<<mark6;
}
};
int main()
{
exam e1;
//calling base class function using derived
class object
e1.acceptname();
//calling base class function using derived
class object
e1.acceptdob();
e1.acceptmark();
//calling base class function using derived
class object
e1.displayname();
//calling base class function using derived
class object
e1.displaydob();
e1.displaymark();
return 0;
}
Output:
Enter roll no and name . . 1201 MEENA
Enter date, month, year in digits and
class .. 7 12 2001 XII
Enter lang, eng, phy, che, esc, mat
marks.. 96 98 100 100 100 100
Roll no:-1201
Name MEENA
class:-XII
DOB : 7 – 12 -2001
Marks Obtained
Language..96
English .. 98
Physics .. 100
Chemistry.. 100
Comp.sci.. 100
Maths .. 100

Question 3.
Write a program to implement multilevel inheritance.
Program
# include <iostream>
using namespace std;
class student //base class
{
private :
char name[20];
int rno; public:
void acceptname()
{
cout<<“\n Enter roll no and name.. “;
cin>>rno>>name;
}
void displayname()
{
cout<<“\n Roll no :-“<<rno;
cout<<“\n Name << name <<
endl;
}
};
//derived class with single base class class
exam: public student
{
public:
int mark1, mark2, mark3, mark4, mark5, mark6;
void accept mark()
{
cout<<“\n Enter
lang,eng,phy,che,esc,mat marks..’; cin>>mark1>>mark2>>mark3>> mark4>>mark5>>mark6;
}
void displaymark()
{
cout<<“\n\t\t Marks Obtained
cout<<“\n Language… “<<markl;
cout<<“\n English… “<<mark2;
cout<<“\n Physics… “<<mark3;
cout<<“\n Chemistry… “<<mark4;
cout<<“\n Comp.sci… “<<mark5;
cout<<“\n Maths… “<<mark6;
}
};
class result: public exam
{
int total;
public:
void showresult()
{
total=markl+mark2+mark3+mark 4+mark5+mark6;
cout<<“\nTOTAL MARK SCORED : “<<total;
}
};
int main()
{
result r1;
//calling base class function using derived
class object
r1.acceptname();
//calling base class function which itself is a derived
r1.acceptmark();
// class function using its derived class object
r1.displayname();
//calling base class function
using derived class //object
//calling base class function which itself is a derived
r1.displaymark();
//class function using its derived class object
r1.showresult();
//calling the child class
function
return 0;
}

Output :
Enter roll no and name .. SARATHI
Enter lang,eng,phy,che,csc,mat
marks.. 96 98 100 100 100 100
Roll no:-1201
Name:-SARATHI
Marks Obtained
Language… 96
English… 98
Physics… 100
Chemistry… 100
Comp.sci… 100
Maths… 100
TOTAL MARK SCORED: 594

Question 4.
Write a program to implement hierarchical inheritance.
Program
# include <iostream>
using namespace std;
class student //base class
{
private :
char name[20];
int rno;
public:
void acceptname()
{
cout<<“\n Enter roll no and name..”;
cin>>rno>>name;
}
void displayname()
{
cout<<“\n Roll no :-“<<rno;
cout<<“\n Name :-” <<name <<
endl;
}
};
//derived class with single base class
class qexam: public student
{
public:
int mark1, mark2, mark3, mark4, marks, mark6;
void accent mark()
{
cout<<“\n Enter lang, eng, phy, che, esc, mat marks for quarterly exam”;
cin>>markl>>mark2>>mark3>>mark4>>mark5>>mark6;
}
void displaymark()
cout< <“\n\t\t Marks Obtained in quarterly”;
cout< <“\n Language.. “<<marki;
cout<<”\n English .. “<<mark2;
cout< <“\n Physics .. “<<mark3;
cout< <“\fl Chemistry.. “<<mark4;
cout<<“\n Comp.sci.. “<<mark5;
cout< <“\n Maths .. “<<mark6;
}
};
//derived class with single base class
class hexam : public student
{
public:
int mark1, mark2, mark3, mark4, marks, mark6;
void acceptmark()
{
cout<<“\n Enter lang, eng, phy, che, esc, mat marks for half/early exam..”;
cin>>markl>>mark2>>mark3>>mark4>>mark5>>mark6;
}
void displaymark()
{
cout<<“\n\t\t Marks Obtained in Halfyearly”;
cout<<“\n Language., “<< mark1;
coutcc”\n English .. “<< mark2;
coutcc”\n Physics .. “<< mark3;
coutcc”\n Chemistry.. “<< mark4;
coutcc”\n Comp.sci.. “<< mark5;
coutcc”\n Maths .. “<< mark6;
}
};
int main()
{
qexam q1;
hexam hi;
//calling base class function using derived class object
q1.acceptname();
//calling base class function
q1. acceptmark();
//calling base class function using derived
class object
h1.acceptname();
//calling base class function using derived class object
h1.displayname(); .
h1,acceptmark();
//calling base class- function using its // derived class object
h1.displaymark();
return 0
}
Output:
Enter roll no and name . . 1201
KANNAN
Enter lang,eng,phy,che,esc,mat
marks for quarterly exam. .
95 96 100 98 100 99
Roll no :-1201
Name :-KANNAN
Marks Obtained in quarterly
Language.. 95
English .. 96
Physics .. 100
Chemistry.. 98
Comp.sci.. 100
Maths .. 99
Enter roll no and name . . 1201
KANNAN
Enter lang,eng,phy,che,esc, mat marks for the half-yearly exam.
96 98 100 100 100 100
Roll no:-1201
Name:-KANNAN
Marks Obtained in Halfyearly
Language.. 96
English .. 98
Physics .. 100
Chemistry.. 100
Comp.sci.. 100
Maths .. 100

Question 5.
Write a program to implement hybrid inheritance.
Program
# include <iostream>
using namespace std;
class student //base class
{
private :
char name[20];
int rno; public:
void acceptname()
{
cout<<“\n Enter roll no and name.. cin>>rno>>name;
}
void displayname()
{
cout<<“\n Roll no :-“<<rno;
cou<<“\n Name name <<
endl;
}
};
//derived class with the single base class
class exam: public student
{
public:
int mark1, mark2, mark3, mark4, marks, mark6;
void accept mark()
{
cout<<“\n Enter larig, eng, phy, che, esc,mat marks..”;
cin>>markl>>mark2>>mark3>> mark4>>mark5>>mark6;
}
void displaymark()
{
cout<<“\n\t\t Marks Obtained “;
cout<<“\n Language.. “<<markl;
cout<<“\n English .. “<<mark2;
cout<<“\n Physics .. “<<mark3;
cout<<“\n Chemistry.. “<<mark4;
cout<<“\n Comp.sci.. “<<mark5;
cout<< “\n Maths .. “<<mark6;
}
};
class detail //base classs 2
{
int dd,mm,yy;
char cl[4];
public:
void acceptdob()
{
cout<<“\n Enter date,month,year in digits and class ..”;
cin>>dd>>mm>>yy>>cl;
}
void displaydob()
{
cou<<“\n class :-“<<cl;
cou<<“\t\t DOB : “<<dd<<” – ”
<<mm<<“-” <<yy<<endl;
}
};
//inherits from the exam, which itself is a //derived
class and also from class detail
class result: public exam, public detail
{
int total;
public:
void showresuit()
{
total=markl+mark2+mark3+ mark4+mark5+mark6;
cout<<“\nTOTAL MARK SCORED: ” <<total;
}
};
class detail //base classs 2
{
int dd,mm,yy;
char cl[4];
public:
void acceptdob()
{
cout<<“\n Enter date,month,year in digits and class ..
cin>>dd>>mm>>yy>>cl;
}
void displaydob()
{
cout<<“\n class :-“<<cl;
cout<<“\t\t DOB : “<<dd<<” – ”
<<mm<<“-” <<yy<<endl;
}
};
//inherits from the exam, which itself is a //derived class and also from class detail class result: public exam, public detail
{
int total;
public:
void showresuit()
{
total = markl + mark2-i-mark3 + mark4+mark5+mark6;
cout<<“\nTOTAL MARK SCORED : ” <<total;
}
};
int main()
{
result r1;
//calling base class function using derived class object
r1.acceptname();
//calling base class which itsel is a derived class function using its derived class object
r1.acceptmark();
r1.acceptdob();
cout<<“\n\n\t\t MARKS STATEMENT”; //calling base class function using derived class object
r1.displayname();
r1.displaydob();
//calling base class which itsel is a derived class function using its derived class object
r1.displaymark();
//calling the child class function
r1.showresuit();
return 0;
>
Output:
Enter roll no and name .. 1201 RAGU
Enter lang,eng,phy,che,esc,mat
marks.. 96 98 100 100 100 100
Enter date,month,year in digits and class .. 7 12 2001 XII
MARKS STATEMENT
Roll no :-1201
Name :-RAGU
class : -XII
DOB : 7 – 12 -2001
Marks Obtained
Language..96
English .. 98
Physics .. 100
Chemistry.. 100
Comp.sci.. 100
Maths .. 100
TOTAL MARK SCORED: 594

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 6 Gaseous State Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 6 Gaseous State

11th Chemistry Guide Gaseous State Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textual Questions:

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
Gases deviate from ideal behavior at high pressure. Which of the following statement(s) is correct for non-ideality?
(a) at high pressure the collision between the gas molecule become enormous
(b) at high pressure the gas molecules move only in one direction
(c) at high pressure, the volume of gas become insignificant
(d) at high pressure the intermolecular interactions become significant
Answer:
(d) at high pressure the intermolecular interactions become significant

Question 2.
Rate of diffusion of a gas is
(a) directly proportional to its density
(b) directly proportional to its molecular weight
(c) directly proportional to its square root of its molecular weight
(d) inversely proportional to the square root of its molecular weight
Answer:
(d) inversely proportional to the square root of its molecular weight

Question 3.
Which of the following is the correct expression for the equation of state of van der Waals gas?
(a) [P + \(\frac{a}{n^{2} V^{2}}\)](V – nb) = nRT

(b) [P + \(\frac{n a}{n^{2} V^{2}}\)](V – nb) = nRT

(c) [P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)](V – nb) = nRT

(d) [P + \(\frac{n^{2} a^{2}}{V^{2}}\)(V – nb) = nRT]
Answer:
(c) [P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)](V – nb) = nRT

Question 4.
When an ideal gas undergoes unrestrained expansion, no cooling occurs because the molecules
(a) are above inversion temperature
(b) exert no attractive forces on each other
(c) do work equal to the loss in kinetic energy
(d) collide without loss of energy
Answer:
(b) exert no attractive forces on each other

Question 5.
Equal weights of methane and oxygen are mixed in an empty container at 298 K. The fraction of total pressure exerted by oxygen is
(a) \(\frac{1}{3}\)
(b) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(c) \(\frac{2}{3}\)
(d) \(\frac{1}{3}\) × 273 × 298
Answer:
(a) \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 6.
The temperatures at which real gases obey the ideal gas laws over a wide range of pressure is called
(a) Critical temperature
(b) Boyle temperature
(c) Inversion temperature
(d) Reduced temperature
Answer:
(b) Boyle temperature

Question 7.
In a closed room of 1000 m3 a perfume bottle is opened up. The room develops a smell. This is due to which property of gases?
(a) Viscosity
(b) Density
(c) Diffusion
(d) None
Answer:
(c) Diffusion

Question 8.
A bottle of ammonia and a bottle of HCl connected through a long tube are opened simultaneously at both ends. The white ammonium chloride ring first formed will be
(a) At the center of the tube
(b) Near the hydrogen chloride bottle
(c) Near the ammonia bottle
(d) Throughout the length of the tube
Answer:
(b) Near the hydrogen chloride bottle

Question 9.
The value of universal gas constant depends upon
(a) Temperature of the gas
(b) Volume of the gas
(c) Number of moles of the gas
(d) units of Pressure and volume
Answer:
(d) units of Pressure and volume

Question 10.
The value of the gas constant R is
(a) 0.082 dm3atm
(b) 0.987 cal mol-1K-1
(c) 8.3J mol-1K-1
(d) 8erg mol-1K-1
Answer:
(c) 8.3J mol-1K-1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 11.
Use of hot air balloon in sports at meteorological observation is an application of
(a) Boyle’s law
(b) Newton’s law
(c) Kelvin’s law
(d) Brown’s law
Answer:
(a) Boyle’s law

Question 12.
The table indicates the value of vanderWaals constant ‘a’ in (dm3)2 atm. mol-2. The gas which can be most easily liquefied is

Gas O2 N2 NH3 CH4
A 1.360 1.390 4.170 2.253

(a) O2
(b) N2
(c) NH3
(d) CH4
Answer:
(c) NH3

Question 13.
Consider the following statements
(i) Atmospheric pressure is less at the top of a mountain than at sea level
(ii) Gases are much more compressible than solids or liquids
(iii) When the atmospheric pressure increases the height of the mercury column rises
Select the correct statement
(a) I and II
(b) II and III
(c) I and III
(d) I, II and III
Answer:
(b) II and III

Question 14.
Compressibility factor for CO2 at 400 K and 71.0 bar is 0.8697. The molar volume of CO2 under these conditions is
(a) 22.04 dm3
(b) 2.24 dm3
(c) 0.41 dm3
(d) 19.5 dm3
Answer:
(c) 0.41 dm3

Question 15.
If temperature and volume of an ideal gas is increased to twice its valuesthe initial pressure P becomes
(a) 4P
(b) 2P
(c) P
(d) 3P
Answer:
(b) 2P

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 16.
At identical temperature and pressure, the rate of diffusion of hydrogen gas is 3 times that of a hydrocarbon having molecular formula CnH2n – 2. What is the value of n?
(a) 8
(b) 4
(c) 3
(d) 1
Answer:
(d) 1

Question 17.
Equal moles of hydrogen and oxygen gases are placed in a container, with a pin-hole through which both can escape what fraction of oxygen escapes in the time required for one-half of the hydrogen to escape.
(a) \(\frac{3}{8}\)
(b) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(c) \(\frac{1}{8}\)
(d) \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 18.
The variation of volume V, with temperature T, keeping pressure constant is called the coefficient of thermal expansion i.e., α = 1\(\left[\frac{\partial V}{\delta T}\right]\)Vp. For an ideal gas α is equal to
(a) T
(b) 1/T
(c) P
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) T

Question 19.
Four gases P, Q, R, and S have almost same values of ‘b’ but their a’ values (a. h are Vander Waals Constants) are in the order Q < R < S < p. At a particular temperature, a’nong the four gases the most easily liquelìable one is
(a) P
(b) Q
(c) R
(d) S
Answer:
(c) R

Question 20.
Maximum deviation from ideal gas is expected
(a) CH4(g)
(b) NH3(g)
(c) H2 (g)
(d) N2 (g)
Answer:
(b) NH3(g)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 21.
The units of Vander Waals constants ‘b’ and ‘a’ respectively
(a) mol L-1 and L atm2 mol-1
(b) mol L and L atm mol2
(c) mol-1 L and L2 atm mol-2
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) mol-1 L and L2 atm mol-2

Question 22.
Assertion:
Critical temperature of CO2 is 304 K it can be liquefied above 304 K.
Reason:
For a given mass of gas, volume is to directly proportional to pressure at constant temperature
(a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion
(b) both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) assertion is true but reason is false
(d) both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
(d) both assertion and reason are false

Question 23.
What is the density of N2 gas at 227°C and 5.00 atm pressure? (R = 0.082 L atm K-1 mol-1)
(a) 1.40 g/L
(b) 2.81 g/L
(c) 3.41 g/L
(d) 0.29 g/L
Answer:
(c) 3.41 g/L

Question 24.
Which of the following diagrams correctly describes the behaviour of a fixed mass of an ideal gas? (T is measured in K)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 1
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 2

Question 25.
25g of each of the following gases are taken at 27°C and 600 mm Hg pressure. Which of these will have the least volume?
(a) HBr
(b) HCl
(c) HF
(d) HI
Answer:
(d) HI

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

II. Answer these questions briefly:

Question 26.
State Boyle’s law.
Answer:
At a given temperature the volume occupied by a fixed mass of a gas is inversely proportional to its pressure.
Mathematically, the Boyle’s law can be written as
V ∝ \(\frac{1}{P}\)     …………..(1)
(T and n are fixed, T-temperature, n-number of moles)
V = k × \(\frac{1}{P}\) …………(2)
k – proportionality constant
PV = k (at constant temperature and mass)

Question 27.
A balloon filled with air at room temperature and cooled to a much lower temperature can be used as a model for Charle’s law.
Answer:
Yes, a balloon filled with air at room temperature and cooled to a much lower temperature can be used as a model for Charle’s law. Volume of balloon decrease when the temperature reduced from room temperature to low temperature. When cooled, the kinetic energy of the gas molecules decreases, so that the volume of the balloon also decreases.

Question 28.
Name two items that can serve as a model for ‘Gay Lusaac’ law and explain.
Answer:
Firing a bullet:
When gunpowder burns, it creates; a significant amount of superheated gas. The high pressure of the hot gas behind the bullet forces it out, of the barrel of the gun.
Heating food in an oven:
When you keep food in an oven for heating, the air inside the oven is heated, thus pressurized.

Question 29.
Give the mathematical expression that relates gas volume and moles. Describe in words what j the mathematical expression means.
Answer:
The mathematical expression that relates gas volume and moles is Avogadro’s hypothesis. It may be expressed as
V ∝ n,
\(\frac{V_{1}}{n_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{n_{2}}\) = constant
where V1 and n1 are the volume and number of moles of a gas and V2 and n2 are a different set of values of volume and number of moles of the same gas at same temperature and pressure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 30.
What are ideal gases? In what way real gases differ from ideal gases?
Answer:
The kinetic theory of gases which is the basis for the gas equation (PV = nRT), assumes that the individual gas molecules occupy negligible volume when j compared to the total volume of the gas and there is no attractive force between the gas molecules. Gases whose behaviour is consistent with these assumptions under all conditions are called ideal gases.

But in practice both these assumptions are not valid under all conditions. For example, the fact that gases can be liquefied shows that the attractive force exists among molecules. Hence, there is no gas which behaves ideally under all conditions. The non-ideal gases are called real gases. The real gases f tend to approach the ideal behaviour under certain conditions.

Question 31.
Can a Vander Waals gas with a = 0 be liquefied? Explain.
Answer:
If the vander Waals constant (a) = 0 for a gas, then it behaves ideally, (i.e.,) there is no intermolecular forces of attraction. So it cannot be liquefied. Moreover,
Pc = \(\frac{a}{27 b^{2}}\)
If a = 0, then Pc = 0; therefore it cannot he liquefied.

Question 32.
Suppose there is a tiny sticky area on the wall of a container of gas. Molecules hitting this area stick there permanently. Is the pressure greater or less than on the ordinary area of walls?
Answer:
Gaseous pressure is developed by the continuous bombardment of the molecules of the gas among themselves and also with the walls of the container. When the molecules hit the sticky area of the container, the number of molecules decreases and hence, the pressure decreases. Therefore, pressure is less than the ordinary area of walls.

Question 33.
Explain the following observations
(a) Aerated water bottles are kept under water during summer
(b) Liquid ammonia bottle is cooled before opening the seal
(c) The tyre of an automobile is inflated to slightly lesser pressure in summer than in winter
(d) The size of a weather balloon becomes larger and larger as it ascends up into larger altitude.
Answer:
(a) Aerated water bottles contains excess dissolved oxygen and minerals which dissolved under certain pressure and if this pressure suddenly decrease due to change in atmospheric pressure, the bottle will certainly burst with decrease the amount of dissolved oxygen in water , this tends to change the aerated water into normal-water.

(b) The vapour pressure of ammonia at room temperature is very high and hence the ammonia will evaporate unless the vapour pressure is decreased. On cooling the vapour pressure decreases so that the liquid remains in the same state. Hence, the bottle is cooled ’ before opening.

(c) In Summer due to hot weather condition, the air inside the tyre expands to large volume due to heat as compared to winter therefore inflated to lesser pressure in summer.

(d) As we move to higher altitude, the atmospheric pressure decreases, therefore balloon can J easily expand to large volume.

Question 34.
Give suitable explanation for the following facts about gases.
(a) Gases don’t settle at the bottom of a container.
Answer:
According to kinetic theory, gas molecules are moving continuous at random. Hence, they do not settle at the bottom of a container.

(b) Gases diffuse through all the space available to them.
Answer:
Gases have a tendency to occupy all the available space. The gas molecules migrate from region of higher concentration to a region of lowrer concentration. Hence, gases diffuse through all the space available to them.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 35.
Suggest why there is no hydrogen in our atmosphere. Why does the moon have no atmosphere?
Answer:
Hydrogen has tendency to combine with oxygen to from water vapour. Hence, the presence of hydrogen is negligible in the atmosphere. The gravitational pull in the moon is very less and hence, there is no atmosphere in the moon.

Question 36.
Explain whether a gas approaches ideal behavior or deviates from ideal behaviour if
(a) it is compressed to a smaller volume at f constant pressure.
Answer:
When the gas is compressed to a smaller volume, the compressibility factor (Z) decreases. Hence, the gas deviates from ideal behavior

(b) the temperature is raised at while keeping the volume constant.
Answer:
When the temperature is increased, the compressibility factor approaches unity. Hence, the gas behaves ideally.

(c) More gas is introduced into the same volume and at the same temperature.
Answer:
When more gas is introduced into a container of the same volume and at the same temperature, the compressibility factor tend to unity. Hence, the gas behaves ideally.

Question 37.
Which of the following gases would you expect to deviate from ideal behavior under conditions of low temperature F2, Cl2 or Br2? Explain.
Answer:
Bromine has greater tendency to deviate from ideal behavior at low temperature. The compressibility factor tends to deviate from unity for bromine.

Question 38.
Distinguish between diffusion and effusion.
Answer:

Diffusion Effusion
1. The property of gas which involves the movement of the gas molecules through another gases is called diffusion. It is the property in which a gas escapes from a container through a very small hole.
2. It is the ability of gases to mix with each other It is ability of gas to travel through a small hole.
3. The rate of diffusion of a gas depends on how fast the gas molecules are moving The rate that this happens depends on how many gas molecules “collide” with the pore.
4. e.g., Smell of perfume diffuses into air e.g., Air escaping slowly through the pinhole in a tire.

Question 39.
Aerosol cans carry clear warning of heating of the can. Why?
Answer:
If aerosol cans are heated, then they will produce more vapour inside the can, which will make the pressure rise very quickly. The rises of temperature can double the pressure inside. Even though the cans are tested, they will burst if the pressure goes up too far. A bursting can could be dangerous.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 40.
When the driver of an automobile applies brake, the passengers are pushed toward the front of the car but a helium balloon is pushed toward back of the car. Upon forward acceleration the passengers are pushed toward the front of the car. Why?
Answer:
Helium floats because it is buoyant; its molecules are lighter than the nitrogen and oxygen molecules of our atmosphere and so they rise above it. In the car, it’s the air molecules that are actually getting pulled and pushed around by gravity as the result of the accelerating frame.

That means it moves in a direction opposite to the force on the surrounding air. Normally, air is pulled downwards due to gravity, which pushes the balloon upwards. In this case, the surrounding air in the car is pulled forward by the deceleration of the car, which pushes the helium balloon backwards.

Question 41.
Would it be easier to drink water with a straw on the top of Mount Everest?
Answer:
It would be harder on the top of the mountain; because the external pressure pushing on the liquid to force it up the straw is less.

Question 42.
Write the Van der Waals equation for a real gas. Explain the correction term for pressure and Volume.
Answer:
Vander Waals equation for a real gas is given by
(P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\))(V – nb) = nRT
Pressure Correction:
The pressure of a gas is directly proportional to the force created by the bombardment of molecules on the walls of the container. The speed of a molecule moving towards the wall of the container is reduced by the attractive forces exerted by its neighbours. Hence, the measured gas pressure is lower than the ideal pressure of the gas. Hence, van der Waals introduced a correction term to this effect.
Where n is the number of moles of gas and V is the volume of the container
⇒ P ∝ \(\frac{n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)
⇒ P = \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)
Where a is proportionality constant and depends on the nature of gas
Therefore,
P = P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)

Volume Correction:
As every individual molecule of a gas occupies a certain volume, the actual volume is less than the volume of the container, V. Van der Waals introduced a correction factor V to this effect. Let us calculate the correction term by considering gas molecules as spheres.
V = excluded volume
Excluded volume for two molecules = \(\frac{4}{3}\) π(2r)3 = 8Vm
where Vm is a volume of a single molecule.
Excluded volume for single molecule = \(\frac{8 V_{m}}{2}\) = 4Vm
Excluded volume for n molecule
= n(4Vm) = nb
Where b is van der waals constant which is equal to 4Vm
⇒ V’ = nb
Videal = V – nb
Replacing the corrected pressure and volume in the ideal gas equation PV = nRT we get the van der Waals equation of state for real gases as below,
(P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\))(V – nb) = nRT
The constants a and b are van der Waals constants and their values vary with the nature of the gas.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 43.
Derive the values of van der Vaals equation constants in terms of critical constants.
Answer:
The Van der walls equation for n moles is
(p + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\))(V – nb) = nRT ……… (1)
For 1 mole
(P + \(\frac{n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)) (V – b) = RT ……………(2)

From the equation we can derive the values of critical constants Pc, Vc, and Tc in terms of a and b, the van der Waals constants, On expanding the above equation,
PV + \(\frac{a}{V}\) – Pb – \(\frac{a b}{V^{2}}\) – RT = 0 ………….(3)

Multiply equation (3) by \(\frac{V^{2}}{P}\)
\(\frac{V^{2}}{P}\) (PV +\(\frac{a}{V}\) – pb – \(\frac{a b}{V^{2}}\) – RT) = 0

V3 + \(\frac{a}{P}\)V – bV2 – \(\frac{a b}{P}\) – \(\frac{R T V^{2}}{P}\) = 0 ………..(4)
When the above equation is rearranged in powers of V

V3 – [\(\frac{R T}{P}\) + b]V2 + \(\frac{a}{P}\)V – \(\frac{a b}{P}\) = 0 ……………..(5)

The equation (5) is a cubic equation in V. On solving this equation,
we will get three solutions. At the critical point all these three solutions of V are equal to the critical volume Vc. The pressure and temperature becomes Pc and Tc respectively
V = Vc
V – Vc = 0
(V – Vc)3 = 0
V3 – 3VcV2 + 3Vc2V – Vc3 = 0 …………..(6)
As equation (5) is identical with equation (6), we can equate the coefficients of V2, V and constant terms in (5) and (6).
-3VcV2 = –[\(\frac{R T_{c}}{P_{c}}\) + b] V2

3Vc = \(\frac{R T_{c}}{P_{c}}\) + b ………………(7)
3Vc2 = \(\frac{a}{P_{c}}\) ……………(8)
Vc3 = \(\frac{ab}{P_{c}}\) …………….(9)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 3
The critical constants can be calculated using the values of van der waals constant of a gas and vice versa.
a = 3Vc2 Pc and
b = \(\frac{V_{c}}{3}\)

Question 44.
Why do astronauts have to wear protective suits when they are on the surface of moon?
Answer:
Astronauts must wear spacesuits whenever they leave a spacecraft and are exposed to the environment of moon. In moon, there is no air to breath and no air pressure. Moon is extremely cold and filled with dangerous radiation. Without protection, an astronaut would quickly die in space. Spacesuits are specially designed to protect astronauts from the cold, radiation and low pressure in space. They also provide air to breathe. Wearing a spacesuit allows an astronaut to survive and work in moon.

Question 45.
When ammonia combines with HCl, NH4Cl is formed as white dense fumes. Why do more fumes appear near HCl?
Answer:
HCl and NH4Cl molecules diffuse through the air towards each other. When they meet, they reactto
form a white powder called ammonium chloride, NH4Cl.
HCl(g) + NH3(g) ⇌ NHC1

Hydrogen chloride + ammonia ⇌ ammonium chloride.
The ring of white powder is closer to the HCl than
the NH3. This is because the NH3 molecules are lighter (smaller) and have diffùsed more quickly through the air in the tube.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 46.
A sample of gas at 15°C at 1 atm. has a volume of 2.58 dm3. When the temperature is raised to 38°C at 1 atm does the volume of the gas Increase? If so, calculate the final volume.
Answer:
T1 = 15°C + 273;
T2 = 38 + 273
T1 = 228;
T2 = 311K
V1 = 2.58dm3;
V2 = ?
(P = 1 atom constant)
\(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\)

V2 = \(\left[\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}\right]\) × T2

= \(\frac{2.58 d m^{3}}{288 K}\) × 311K
V2 = 2.78 dm3 i.e, volume increased from 2.58 dm3 to 2.78 dm3

Question 47.
Of two samples of nitrogen gas, sample A contains 1.5 moles of nitrogen In a vessel of volume of 37.6 dm3 at 298K, and the sample B Is in a vessel of volume 16.5 dm3 at 298K. Calculate the number of moles in sample B.
Answer:
nA = 1.5mol; nB = ?
VA = 37.6 dm3; VB = 16.5 dm3
(T = 298K constant)
\(\frac{V_{A}}{n_{A}}=\frac{V_{B}}{n_{B}}\)

nA = \(\left[\frac{n_{A}}{n_{B}}\right] V_{B}\)

Question 48.
Sulphur hexafluoride Is a colourless, odourless gas; calculate the pressure exerted by 1.82 moles of the gas In a steel vessel of volume 5.43 dm3 at 69.5°C, assumIng Ideal gas behaviour.
Answer:
n = 1.82 mole
V = 5.43 dm3
T = 69.5 + 273 = 342.5
P =?
PV = nRT
P = nRT/V
P = Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 4
P = 94.25 atm

Question 49.
Argon is an Inert gas used In light bulbs to retard the vaporization of the tungsten filament. A certain light bulb containing argon at 1.2 atm and 18°C Is heated to 85°C at constant volume. Calculate its final pressure in atm.
Answer:
P1 = 1.2 atm
T1 = 180°C + 273 = 291 K
T2 = 850°C + 273 = 358 K
P2 =?
\(\frac{P_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{T_{2}}\)

P2 = \(\left[\frac{P_{1}}{T_{1}}\right] \times T_{2}\)

P2 = \(\frac{1.2 a t m}{291 K}\) × 358 K
P2 = 1.48 atm

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 50.
A small bubble rises from the bottom of a lake where the temperature and pressure are 6°C and 4 atm. to the water surface, where the temperature is 25°C and pressure Is I arm. Calculate the final volume in (mL) of the bubble, If its initial volume 1.5 mL.
Answer:
T1 = 6°C + 273 = 279 K
P1 = 4 atm; V2 = 1.5 ml
T2 = 25°C + 273 = 298 K
P2 = 1 atm; V2 =?
\(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{P_{2} V_{2}}{T_{2}}\)

= \(\frac{4 a t m \times 1.5 m l \times 298 K}{279 K \times 1 a t m}\) = 6.41 mol

Question 51.
Hydrochloric acid Is treated with a metal to produce hydrogen gas. Suppose a student carries out this reaction and collects a volume of 154.4 × 10-3 dm3 of a gas at a pressure of 742 mm of Hg at a temperature of 298 K. What mass of hydrogen gas (in mg) did the student collect?
Answer:
V = 154.4 × 10-3 dm3
P = 742 mm of Hg
T = 298K;
m =?
m = \(\frac{P V}{R T}\)

= \(\frac{742 m m H g \times 154.4 \times 10^{-3} L}{62 m m H g L K^{-1} m o l^{-1} \times 298 K}\)

n = \(\frac{\text { Mass }}{\text { Molar Mass }}\)

Mass = n × Molar Mass
= 0.0006 × 2.016
= 0.0121 g = 12.1 mg

Question 52.
It takes 192 sec for an unknown gas to diffuse through a porous wall and 84 sec for N2 gas to effuse at the same temperature and pressure. What Is the molar mass of the unknowa gas?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 5

Question 53.
A tank contains a mixture of 52.5 g of oxygen and 65.1 g of CO2 at 300 K the total pressure In the tanks Is 9.21 atm. calculate the partial pressure (in atm.) of each gas in the mixture.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 6
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 7

Question 54.
A combustible gas is stored in a metal tank at a pressure of 2.98 atm at 25°C. The tank can withstand a maximum pressure of 12 atm after which It will explode. The building in which the tank has been stored catches fire. Now predict whether the tank will blow up first or start melting? (Melting point of the metal 1100 K).
Answer:
Pressure of the gas in the tank at its melting point
T = 298 K;
P1 = 2.98 atom;
T2 = 1100 K;
P2 =?
\(\frac{P_{1} P_{2}}{T_{1} T_{2}}\) =????
⇒ P2 = \(\frac{P}{T_{1}}\) × T2
= \(\frac{2.98 \text { atm }}{298 K}\) × 1100 K = 11 atm

At 1100 K the pressure of the gas inside the tank will become 11 atm. Given that tank can withstand a maximum pressure of 12 atm, the tank will start melting first.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

11th Chemistry Guide Gaseous State Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best Answer:

Question 1.
The approximate volume percentage of nitrogen and oxygen in the atmosphere of air are _______ and ______ respectively.
(a) 21, 68
(b) 21, 78
(c) 78, 2
(d) 80, 21
Answer:
(c) 78, 2

Question 2.
The SI unit of pressure is
(a) pascal
(b) atmosphere
(c) bar
(d) torr
Answer:
(a) pascal

Question 3.
The compound widely used in the refrigerator as coolant is
(a) Freon-2
(b) Freon-12
(c) Freon-13
(d) Freon-14
Answer:
(b) Freon-12

Question 4.
“For a fixed mass of a gas at constant pressure, the volume is directly proportional to its temperature”. This statement is
(a) Boyle’s law
(b) Gay-Lussac law
(c) Avogadro’s law
(d) Charle’s law
Answer:
(d) Charle’s law

Question 5.
Hydrogen is placed in the ______ of the periodic table.
(a) Group -1
(b) group-17
(c) group-18
(d) group-2
Answer:
(a) Group -1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 6.
The plot of the volume of the gas against its temperature at a given pressure is called
(a) isotone
(b) isobar
(c) isomer
(d) isotactic
Answer:
(b) isobar

Question 7.
At constant temperature for a given mass, for each degree rise in temperature, all gases expand by of their volume at 0°C.
(a) 273
(b) 298
(c) \(\frac{1}{273}\)

(d) \(\frac{1}{298}\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{1}{273}\)

Question 8.
The precise value of temperature at which the volume of the gas becomes zero is
(a) -273.15 °C
(b) -273 °C
(c) -298.15°C
(d) -298 °C
Answer:
(a) -273.15 °C

Question 9.
‘At constant volume, the pressure of a fixed mass of a gas is directly proportional to temperature”. This statement is
(a) Charle’s law
(b) Boyle’s law
(c) Gay-Lussac’s law
(d) Dalton’s law
Answer:
(c) Gay-Lussac’s law

Question 10.
The value of gas constant, R, in terms of JK-1 mol-1 is
(a) 8.314
(b) 4.184
(c) 0.0821
(d) 1.987
Answer:
(a) 8.314

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 11.
A mixture of gases containing 4 mole of hydrogen and 6 mole of oxygen. The partial pressure of hydrogen, if the total pressure is 5 atm, is
(a) 10 atm
(b) 0.4 atm
(c) 20 atm
(d) 2 atm
Answer:
(d) 2 atm

Question 12.
A mixture of gases containing 1 mole of He, 4 mole of Ne and 5 mole of Xe. The correct order of partial pressure of the gases, if the total pressure is 10 atm is
(a) Xe < Ne < He
(b) He < Ne < Xe
(c) Xe < Ne < He
(d) He < Xe < Ne
Answer:
(b) He < Ne < Xe

Question 13.
The property of a gas which involves the movement of the gas molecules through another gases is called
(a) effusion
(b) dissolution
(c) difusion
(d) expansion
Answer:
(c) difusion

Question 14.
The process in which agas escapes from a container through a very small hole is called
(a) diffusion
(b) effusion
(c) occlusion
(d) dilution
Answer:
(a) diffusion

Question 15.
The rate of diffusion of a gas is inversely proportional to the
(a) square of molar mass
(b) square root of density
(c) square root of molar mass
(d) square of density
Answer:
(c) square root of molar mass

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 16.
An unknown gas X diffuses at a rate of 2 times of oxygen at the same temperature and pressure. The molar mass (in g mol-1) of the gas ‘X is (Molar mass of oxygen is 32 g mol-1)
(a) 8
(b) 16
(c) 20
(d)12
Answer:
(a) 8

Question 17.
The deviation of real gases from ideal behavior is measured in terms of
(a) expansivity factor
(b) molar mass
(c) pressure
(d) compressibility factor
Answer:
(d) compressibility factor

Question 18.
The gases which deviate from ideal behavior at
(a) low temperature and high pressure
(b) high temperature and low pressure
(c) low temperature and low pressure
(d) high temperature and high pressure
Answer:
(b) high temperature and low pressure

Question 19.
The temperature at which a real gas obeys ideal gas law over an appreciable range of pressure is called temperature
(a) inversion
(b) ideal
(c) Boyle
(d) reversible
Answer:
(c) Boyle

Question 20.
Ideal gas equation for ‘n’ moles is
(a) \(\frac{P}{R}=\frac{n T}{V}\)

(b) PV = \(\frac{n R}{T}\)

(c) \(\frac{V}{T}=\frac{n P}{R}\)

(d) \(\frac{P}{T}=\frac{n R}{V}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{P}{T}=\frac{n R}{V}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 21.
The pressure correction introduced by Van der Waals is,
Pideal =
(a) P + \(\frac{a V^{2}}{n^{2}}\)

(b) P + \(\frac{a n}{V^{2}}\)

(c) P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)

(d) P + \(\frac{a V}{n^{2}}\)
Answer:
(c) P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)

Question 22.
The volume correction introduced by Van der Waals is, Videal =
(a) V – nb
(b) V + nb
(c) \(\frac{V}{n b}\)
(d) b – nV
Answer:
(b) V + nb

Question 23.
Van der waals equation for one mole of a gas is
(a) (P + \(\frac{a}{V}\))(V-b) = RT
(b) (P – \(\frac{a}{V^{2}}\))(V + -b) = RT
(c) (P + \(\frac{a}{V^{2}}\))(V – b) = RT
(d) (P + \(\frac{a}{V}\))(V + b) = RT
Answer:
(c) (P + \(\frac{a}{V^{2}}\))(V – b) = RT

Question 24.
The unit of Van der Waals constant V is
(a) atm lit mol-1
(b) atm lit2 mol-2
(c) atm lit-2 mol2
(d) atm lit-1 mol2
Answer:
(b) atm lit2 mol-2

Question 25.
The unit of Van der waals constant ‘b’ is
(a) lit mol-1
(b) lit mol
(c) atm lit mol-1
(d) atm lif-1 mol-2
Answer:
(a) lit mol-1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 26.
The temperature above which a gas cannot be liquefied even at high pressure is called is ________ temperature.
(a) ideal
(b) inversion
(c) critical
(d) real
Answer:
(c) critical

Question 27.
The gas used in pressure-volume isotherm study of Andrew’s experiment is
(a) N2
(b) H2S
(c) NH3
(d) CO2
Answer:
(d) CO2

Question 28.
Which of the following gas has highest critical temperature?
(a) NH3
(b) CO2
(c) N2
(d) CH4
Answer:
(a) NH3

Question 29.
The relationship between critical volume and Vander waals constant is
(a) Vc =\(\frac{a}{R b}\)
(b) Vc = 3b
(c) Vc = \(\frac{8 a}{27 R b}\)
(d) Vc = 8b
Answer:
(b) Vc = 3b

Question 30.
The temperature below which a gas obeys Joule-Thomson effect is called ______ temperature.
(a) critical
(b) Inversion
(c) ideal
(d) real
Answer:
(b) Inversion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 31.
In the equation PV = nRT, which one cannot be numerically equal to R?
(a) 8.31 × 107 ergs K-1 mol-1
(b) 8.31 × 107 dynes cm K-1 mol-1
(c) 8.317J K-1 mol-1
(d) 8.317L atm K-1 mol-1
Answer:
(d) 8.317L atm K-1 mol-1

Question 32.
A sample of a given mass of gas at constant temperature occupies a volume of 95 cm3 under a pressure of 10.13 × 104 Nm-2. At the same temperature, its volume at pressure of 10.13 × 104 Vm-2 is
(a) 190 cm3
(b) 93 cm3
(c) 46.5 cm3
(d) 4.75 cm3
Answer:
(b) 93 cm3

Question 33.
The number of moles of H2 in 0.224 L of hydrogen gas at STP (273 K, 1 atm) assuming ideal gas behavior is
(a) 1
(b) 0.1
(c) 0.01
(d) 0.001
Answer:
(c) 0.01

Question 34.
Use of hot air balloons in sports and meteorological observations is an application of
(a) Boyle’s law
(b) Newton’s law
(c) Kelvin’s law
(d) Charle’s law
Answer:
(d) Charle’s law

Question 35.
To what temperature must a neon gas sample be heated to double its pressure, if the initial volume of gas at 75°C is decreased by 15.0% by cooling the gas?
(a) 319°C
(b) 592°C
(c) 128°C
(d) 60°C
Answer:
(a) 319°C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 36.
7.0 g of a gas at 300K and 1 atm occupies a volume of 4.1 litre. What is the molecular mass of the gas?
(a) 42
(b) 38.24
(c) 14.5
(d) 46.5
Answer:
(a) 42

Question 37.
If most probable velocity is represented by a and fraction possessing it by / then with increase in temperature which one of the following is correct?
(a) α increases, f decreases
(b) α decreases, f increases
(c) Both α and f decrease
(d) Both α and f increase
Answer:
(a) α increases, f decreases

Question 38.
The rate of diffusion of gases A and B of molecular weight 36 and 64 are in the ratio
(a) 9 : 16
(b) 4 : 3
(c) 3 : 4
(d) 16 : 9
Answer:
(b) 4 : 3

Question 39.
To which of the following gaseous mixtures Dalton’s law is not applicable?
(a) Ne + He + SO2
(b) NH3 + HCl + HBr
(c) O2 + N2 +CO2
(d) N2 + H2 + O2
Answer:
(b) NH3 + HCl + HBr

Question 40.
Which of the following is true about gaseous state?
(a) Thermal energy = molecular interaction
(b) Thermal energy >> molecular interaction
(c) Thermal energy << molecular interaction
(d) molecular forces >> those in liquids
Answer:
(b) Thermal energy >> molecular interaction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 41.
50 mL of gas A effuses through a pinhole in 146 seconds. The same volume of CO2 under identical condition effuses in 115 seconds. The molar mass of A is
(a) 44
(b) 35.5
(c) 71
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) 71

Question 42.
Gas deviates from ideal gas nature because molecules
(a) are colourless
(b) attract each other
(c) contain covalent bond
(d) show Brownian movement
Answer:
(b) attract each other

Question 43.
Which of the following gases is expected to have largest value of van der Waals constant ‘a’?
(a) He
(b) H2
(c) NH3
(d) O2
Answer:
(c) NH3

Question 44.
In van der Waals equation of state for a real gas, the term that accounts for intermolecular forces is
(a) Vm – b
(b) P + \(\frac{a}{V m^{2}}\)
(c) RT
(d) \(\frac{1}{R T}\)
Answer:
(b) P + \(\frac{a}{V m^{2}}\)

Question 45.
What are the most favourable conditions to liquefy a gas?
(a) High temperature and low pressure
(b) Low temperature and high pressure
(c) High temperature and high pressure
(d) Low temperature and low pressure
Answer:
(b) Low temperature and high pressure

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 46.
Which of the following has a non-linear relationship?
(a) P vs V
(b) P vs \(\frac{1}{V}\)
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) P vs V

Question 47.
Why is that the gases show ideal behavior when the volume occupied is large?
(a) So that the volume of the molecules can be neglected in comparison to it.
(b) So that the pressure is very high
(c) So that the Boyle temperature of the gas is constant
(d) all of these
Answer:
(a) So that the volume of the molecules can be neglected in comparison to it.

Question 48.
At a given temperature, pressure of a gas obeying Van der Waals equation is
(a) less than that of an ideal gas
(b) more than that of an ideal gas
(c) more or less depending on the nature of gas
(d) equal to that of an ideal gas
Answer:
(a) less than that of an ideal gas

Question 49.
NH3 gas is liquefied more easily than N2. Hence
(a) Van der Waals constant a and b of NH3 > that of N2
(b) van der Waals constants a and b of NH3 < that of N2
(c) a(NH3) > a(N2) but b(NH3) < b(N2)
(d) a(NH3) < a(N2) but b(NH3) > b(N2)
Answer:
(c) a(NH3) > a(N2) but b(NH3) < b(N2)

Question 50.
Maximum deviation from ideal gas is expected from
(a) CH4(g)
(b) NH3(g)
(c) H2(g)
(d) N2(g)
Answer:
(b) NH3(g)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

II. Very short question and answers (2 Marks):

Question 1.
Define Pressure? Give its unit?
Answer:
Pressure is defined as force divided by the area to which the force is applied. The SI unit of pressure is pascal which is defined as 1 Newton per square meter (Nm-2).
Pressure = \(\frac{\text { Force }\left(\mathrm{N}(\text { or }) \mathrm{Kg} \mathrm{ms}^{-2}\right)}{\text {Area }\left(\mathrm{m}^{2}\right)}\)

Question 2.
State Gay Lussac ‘s law.
Answer:
At constant volume, the pressure of a fixed mass of a gas is directly proportional to temperature.
P ∝ T or \(\frac{P}{T}\) = constant K
If P1 and P2 are the pressures at temperatures T1 and T2, respectively, then from Gay Lussac’s law
\(\frac{P_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{T_{2}}\)

Question 3.
State Dalton’s law of partial pressure.
Answer:
The total pressure of a mixture of non-reacting gases is the sum of partial pressures of the gases present in the mixture” where the partial pressure of a component gas is the pressure that it would exert if it were present alone in the same volume and temperature. This is known as Dalton s law of partial pressures.
For a mixture containing three gases 1, 2, and 3 with partial pressures p1, p2, and p3 in a container with volume V, the total pressure Ptotal will be give by
Ptotal = p1 + p2 + p3

Question 4.
What is Compressibility factor?
Answer:
The deviation of real gases from ideal behaviour is measured in terms of a ratio of PV to nRT. This is termed as compressibility factor. Mathematically,
Z = \(\frac{P V}{n R T}\)

Question 5.
Define Critical temperature (Tc) of a gas?
Answer:
Critical temperature (Tc) of a gas is defined as the temperature above which it cannot be liquefied even at high pressure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 6.
How does cooling is produced in Adiabatic Process?
Answer:
In Adiabatic process, cooling is produced by removing the magnetic property of magnetic material such as gadolinium sulphate. By this method, a temperature of 10-4 K i.e., as low as 0 K can be achieved.

Question 7.
How do you understand PV relationship?
Answer:
The PV relationship can be understood as follows. The pressure is due to the force of the gas particles on the walls of the container. If a given amount of gas is compressed to half of its volume, the density is doubled and the number of particles hitting the unit area of the container will be doubled. Hence, the pressure would increase two fold.

Question 8.
Write a note on Consequence of Boyle’s law.
Answer:
The pressure-density relationship can be derived from the Boyle’s law as shown below.
P1V1 = P2V2
P1 \(\frac{m}{d_{1}}\) = P2 \(\frac{m}{d_{2}}\)
where “m” is the mass, d1 and d2 are the densities of gases at pressure P1 and P2.
\(\frac{P_{1}}{d_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{d_{2}}\)
In other words, the density of a gas is directly proportional to pressure.

Question 9.
A gas cylinder can withstand a pressure of 15 aim. The pressure of cylinder is measured 12 atm at 27°C. Upto which temperature limit the cylinder will not burst?
Answer:
Cylinder will burst at that temperature when it attains the pressure of 15 atm
P1 = 12 atm
T = 27° C = (27 + 273)K = 300K
P2 = 15 atm; T = ?
\(\frac{P_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{T_{2}}\)

T2 = \(\frac{15 \times 300}{12}\) = 375 K
= (375 – 273)°C = 102°C

Question 10.
Write a note on application of Dalton’s law.
Answer:
In a reaction involving the collection of gas by downward displacement of water, the pressure of dry vapor collected can be calculated using Dalton’s law.
Pdry gas collected = Ptotal – Pwatervapour
Pwatervapour has generally referred as aqueous tension and its values are available for air at various temperatures.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 11.
State Charles law.
Answer:
For a fixed mass of a gas at constant pressure, the volume is directly proportional to its temperature.
\(\frac{V}{T}\) = constant (at constant pressure)

Question 12.
What happens when a balloon is moved from an ice cold water bath to a boiling water bath?
Answer:
If a balloon is moved from an ice cold water bath to a boiling water bath, the temperature of the gas increases. As a result, the gas molecules inside the balloon move faster and gas expands. Hence, the volume increases.

Question 13.
Write notes on coefficient of expansion(α).
Answer:
The relative increase in volume per °C (α) is equal to \(\frac{V}{V_{0} T}\)
Therefore, \(\frac{V}{V_{0} T}\)
TV = V0(αT + 1)
Charles found that the coefficient of expansion is approximately equal to 1/273. It means that at constant temperature for a given mass, for each degree rise in temperature, all gases expand by 1/273 of their volume at 0°C.

Question 14.
State Gay-Lussac law.
Answer:
At constant volume, the pressure of a fixed mass of a gas is directly proportional to temperature.
P ∝ T (at constant volume)

Question 15.
State Avogadro’s hypothesis.
Answer:
Equal volumes of all gases under the same conditions of temperature and pressure contain equal number of molecules.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 16.
Distinguish between diffusion and effusion.
Answer:
The property of gas that involves the movement of the gas molecules through another gases is called diffusion. Effusion is another process in which a gas escapes from a container through a very small hole.

Question 17.
State Graham’s law of diffusion.
Answer:
The rate of diffusion or effusion is inversely proportional to the square root of molar mass. This statement is called Graham’s law of diffusion/effusion.
Mathematically, rate of diffusion ∝ \(\frac{1}{M}\)

Question 18.
What is Boyle temperature?
Answer:
The temperature at which a real gas obeys ideal gas law over an appreciable range of pressure is called Boyle temperature or Boyle point.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

III. Short Question and Answers (3 Marks):

Question 1.
Write notes on Boyle’s point.
Answer:
The temperature at which a real gas obeys ideal gas law over an appreciable range of pressure is called Boyle temperature or Boyle point. The Boyle point varies with the nature of the gas. Above the Boyle point, for real gases, Z > 1, i.e., the real gases show positive deviation. Below the Boyle point, the real gases first show a decrease for Z, reaches a minimum and then increases with the increase in pressure.

Question 2.
What are the different methods of liquefaction of gases?
Answer:
There are different methods used for liquefaction of gases:

  1. In Linde’s method, Joule-Thomson effect is used to get liquid air or any other gas.
  2. In Claude’s process, the gas is allowed to perform mechanical work in addition to Joule-Thomson effect so that more cooling is produced.
  3. In Adiabatic process, cooling is produced by removing the magnetic property of magnetic material such as gadolinium sulphate. By this method, a temperature of 10-4 K i.e., as low as 0 K can be achieved.

Question 3.
48 litre of dry N2 is passed through 36g of H2O at 27°C and this results In a loss of 1.20 g of water. Find the vapour pressure of water?
Answer:
Water loss is observed because of escape of water molecules with N2 gas. These water vapour occupy the volume of N2 gas i.e., 48 litres.
Using,
PV = \(\frac{m}{M}\)RT;
V = 48L
m = 1.2g;
M = 18u;
R = 0.082 L atm K-1mol-1
T = 27 + 273 = 300 K
P = \(\frac{1.2}{18} \times \frac{0.0821 \times 300}{48}\) = 0.034 atm

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 4.
A flask of capacity one litre is heated from 25°C to 35°C. What volume of air will escape from the flask?
Answer:
Applying, \(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\)
V1 = 1L;
T1 = 25 + 273 = 298 K
V2 = ?
T2 = 35 + 273 = 308 K
V2 = \(\frac{1}{298}\) × 308 = 1.033 L
Capacity of Flask = 1 L
So, volume of air escaped = 1.033 – 1 = 0.033 L = 33 mL

Question 5.
Discuss the graphical representation of Boyle’s law.
Answer:
Boyle’s law is applicable to all gases regardless of their chemical identity (provided the pressure is low). Therefore, for a given mass of a gas under two different sets of conditions at constant temperature we can write,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 10
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 11

Question 6.
A certain gas takes three times as long to effuse out as helium. Find its molecular mass.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 12

Question 7.
The vapour pressure of water at 80°C is 355.5 mm of Hg. A 100 mL vessel contains water saturated with O2 at 80°C, the total pressure being 760 mm of Hg. The contents of the vessel were pumped into a 50 mL vessel at the same temperature. What is the partial pressure of O2?
Answer:
Ptotal = PH2O + PO2
PO2 = 760 – 355.5 = 404.5
When the contents were pumped into 50 mL vessel
P1 = 404.5
V1 = 100 mL
P2 =?
V2 = 50 mL
P1V1 = P2V2
P2 = \(\frac{404.5 \times 100}{50}\) = 809 mm
Thus, PO2 in 50 mL vessel = 809 mm

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 8.
Write notes on compressibility factor for real gases.
Answer:
The compressibility factor Z for real gases can be rewritten,
Z = PVreal / nRT …………..(1)
Videal = \(\frac{n R T}{P}\) ……………(2)
substituting (2) in (1)
where Vreal is the molar volume of the real gas and Videal is the molar volume of it when it behaves ideally.

Question 9.
Derive ideal gas equation.
Answer:
The gaseous state is described completely using the following four variables T, P, V, and n and their relationships were governed by the gas laws studied so far.
Boyle’s law V ∝ P1
Charles law V ∝ T
Avogadro’s law V ∝ n
We can combine these equations into the following general equation that describes the physical behaviour of all gases.
V ∝ \(\frac{n T}{P}\)

V = \(\frac{n R T}{P}\)
where, R is the proportionality constant called universal gas constant.
The above equation can be rearranged to give the ideal gas equation
PV = nRT

Question 10.
State and explain Dalton’s law of partial pressure.
Answer:
John Dalton stated that “the total pressure of a mixture of non-reacting gases is the sum of partial pressures of the gases present in the mixture” where the partial pressure of a component gas is the pressure that it would exert if it were present alone in the same volume and temperature. This is known as Dalton’s law of partial pressures, i.e., for a mixture containing three gases 1, 2, and 3 with partial pressures p1, p2, and p3 in a container with volume V, the total pressure Ptotal will be given by
P = p1 + p2 + p3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

IV. Long Question and Answers (5 Marks):

Question 1.
Derive Van der waals equation of state.
Answer:
J.D.Van der Waals made the first mathematical analysis of real gases. His treatment provides us an interpretation of real gas behaviour at the molecular level. He modified the ideal gas equation PV = nRT by introducing two correction factors, namely, pressure correction and volume correction.

Pressure Correction:
The pressure of a gas is directly proportional to the force created by the bombardment of molecules on the walls of the container. The speed of a molecule moving towards the wall of the container is reduced by the attractive forces exerted by its neighbours. Hence, the measured gas pressure is lower than the ideal pressure of the gas. Hence, van der Waals introduced a correction term to this effect.

Van der Waals found out the forces of attraction experienced by a molecule near the wall are directly proportional to the square of the density of the gas.
P’ ∝ p2
p = \(\frac{n}{v}\)

where n is the number of moles of gas and V is the volume of the container
⇒ P’ = \(\frac{n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)
⇒ P’ = a\(\frac{n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)

where a is the proportionality constant and depends on the nature of gas.
Therefore, ideal P = P + a\(\frac{n^{2}}{V^{2}}\)

Volume Correction:
As every individual molecule of a gas occupies a certain volume, the actual volume is less than the volume of the container, V. Van der Waals introduced a correction factor V’ to this effect. Let us calculate the correction term by considering gas molecules as spheres.
V = excluded volume
Excluded volume for two molecules = \(\frac{4}{3}\)π(2r)3
= \(\left|\frac{-8}{(3 \pi)}\right|\) = 8Vm

where Vm is a volume of a single molecule
Excluded volume for single-molecule = \(\frac{8 V_{m}}{2}\) = 4Vm

Excluded volume for n molecule = n(4Vm) = nb
Where b is van der Waals constant which is equal to 4 Vm
=> V’ = nb
Videal = V nb

Replacing the corrected pressure and volume in the ideal gas equation PV = nRT we get the van der Waals equation of state for real gases as below,
(P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V}\))(V – nb) = nRT
The constants a and b are van der Waals constants and their values vary with the nature of the gas. It is an approximate formula for the non-ideal gas.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 2.
Derive the relationship between Van der Waals constants and critical constants.
Answer:
The van der Waals equation for n moles is
(P + \(\frac{a n^{2}}{V}\))(V – nb) = nRT
For 1 mole
(p + \(\frac{a}{V^{2}}\))(V – b) = RT
From the equation we can derive the values of critical constants Pc, Vc, and Tc in terms of a and b, the van der Waals constants, On expanding the above equation
PV + \(\frac{a}{V}\) – Pb – \(\frac{a b}{V^{2}}\) – RT = 0

Multiply above equation by
\(\frac{V_{2}}{P}\)(PV + \(\frac{a}{V}\) – Pb – \(\frac{a b}{V^{2}}\) – RT) = 0

V3 + \(\frac{a V}{P}\) + -bV2 – \(\frac{a b}{p}\) – \(\frac{R T V^{2}}{P}\) = 0

when the above equation is rearranged in powers of V

V3 \(\frac{R T}{P}\) + bV2 \(\frac{a}{P}\) V – \(\frac{a b}{P}\) = 0.

The above equation is a cubic equation in V. On solving this equation,
we will get three solutions. At the critical point, all these three solutions of Vc are equal to the critical volume. The pressure and temperature becomes Pc and Tc respectively
i.e., V = Vc
V – Vc = 0
V – (Vc)3 = 0
V3 – 3VcV2 + 3VVc2 – Vc3 = 0.
As equation identical with equation above, we can equate the cocfficients of Vc, V and constant terms.

-3VcV2 = –\(\frac{R T_{C}}{P}\) + bV2

3Vc = \(\frac{R T_{C}}{P_{C}}\) + b ……….(1)

3Vc2 = \(\frac{a}{P_{C}}\) …………..(2)

Vc3 = \(\frac{a b}{P_{C}}\) …………..(3)

Divide equation (3) by equation (2)

\(\frac{V_{c}^{3}}{3 V_{C}^{2}}=\frac{a b / P_{C}}{a / P_{C}}\)

\(\frac{V_{C}}{3}\) = b
i.e., Vc = 3b ……………(4)

when equation (4) is substituted in (2)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 13
The critical constants can be calculated using the values of vander walls constant of a gas and vice versa.

a = 3Vc2 Pc and b = \(\frac{V_{C}}{3}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State

Question 3.
Explain Andrew’s isotherm for Carbon dioxide.
Answer:
Thomas Andrew gave the first complete data on pressure-volume-temperature of a substance in the gaseous and liquid states. He plotted isotherms of carbon dioxide at different temperatures which is shown in Figure. From the plots we can infer the following.

At low temperature isotherms, for example, at 130°C as the pressure increases, the volume decreases along AB and is a gas until the point B is reached. At B, a liquid separates along the line BC, both the liquid and gas co-exist and the pressure remains constant. At C, the gas is completely converted into liquid. If the pressure is higher than at C, only the liquid is compressed so, there is no significant change in the volume. The successive isotherms shows similar trend with the shorter flat region. i.e., The volume range in which the liquid and gas coexist becomes shorter.

At the temperature of 31.1°C the length of the shorter portion is reduced to zero at point P. In other words, the CO2 gas is liquefied completely at this point. This temperature is known as the liquefaction temperature or critical temperature of CO3. At this point the pressure is 73 atm. Above this temperature, CO3 remains as a gas at all pressure values. It is then proved that many real gases behave in a similar manner to carbon dioxide.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 14

Question 4.
Explain Boyle’s law experiment:
Answer:
Robert Boyle performed a series of experiments to j study the relation between the pressure and volume of gases. The schematic diagram of the apparatus j used Boyle is shown in figure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 6 Gaseous State 15

Mercury was added through the open end of the apparatus such that the mercury level on both ends are equal as shown in the figure (a). Add more amount of mercury until the volume of the trapped air is reduced to half of its original volume as shown in figure (b). The pressure exerted on the gas by the addition of excess mercury is given by the difference in mercury levels of the tube.

Initially the pressure exerted by the gas is equal to 1 atm as the difference in height of the mercury levels is zero. When the volume is reduced to half, the difference in mercury levels increases to 760 mm. Now the pressure exerted by the gas is equal to 2 atm. It led him to conclude that at a given temperature the volume occupied by a fixed mass of a gas is inversely proportional to its pressure.
Mathematically, the Boyle’s law can be written as
V ∝ \(\frac{1}{P}\) ……….(1)
(T and n are fixed, T-temperature, n- number of moles)
V = k × \(\frac{1}{P}\) ……….(2)
k – proportionality constant When we rearrange equation (2)
PV = k at constant temperature and mass.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

11th Bio Botany Guide Mineral Nutrition Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part -I

Question 1.
Identify correct match.
1. Die back disease of citrus -(i) Mo
2. Whip tail disease – (ii) Zn
3. Brown heart of turnip -(iii) Cu
4. Little leaf -(iv) B
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 1
Answer:
b) 1 (iii) 2 (i) 3 (iv) 4 (ii)

Question 2.
If a plant is provided with all mineral nutrients but, Mn concentration is increased, what will be the deficiency?
(a) Mn prevent the uptake of Fe, Mg but not Ca
(b) Mn increase the uptake of Fe, Mg and Ca
(c) Only increase the uptake of Ca
(d) Prevent the uptake Fe, Mg, and Ca
Answer:
(a) Mn prevent the uptake of Fe, Mg but not Ca

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
The element which is not remobilized?
a) Phosphorous
b) Potassium
c) Calcium
d) Sulphur
Answer:
c) Calcium

Question 4.
Match the correct combination.

Minerals Role
A Molybdenum 1. Chlorophyll
B Zinc 2. Methionine
C Magnesium 3. Auxin
D Sulphur 4. Nitrogenase

a) A-1 B-3 C-4 D-2
b) A-2 B-1 C-3 D-4
c) A-4 B-3 C-1 D-2
d) A-4 B-2 C-1 D-3
Answer:
c) A-4 B-2 C-1 D-3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
Identify the correct statement:
(i) Sulphur is essential for amino acids Cystine and Methionine
(ii) Low level of N, K, S and Mo affect the cell division
(iii) Non – leguminous plant Alnus which contain bacterium Frankia
(iv) Denitrification carried out by nitrosomonas and nitrobacter.

(a) (i), (ii) are correct
(b) (i), (ii), (iii) are correct
(c) I only correct
(d) all are correct
Answer:
(b) (i), (ii), (iii) are correct

Question 6.
Nitrogen is present in the atmosphere in huge amounts but higher plants fail to utilize it. Why?
Answer:
1. Plants absorb minerals from the soil along with water with the help of Roots. Minerals are absorbed as salts.

2. Nitrogen is present in large quantities in the atmosphere in a gaseous form, the gaseous nitrogen must be fixed in the form of Nitrate salts in the soil to facilitate absorption by plant roots.

3. Nitrogen fixation can occur 2 ways by

  • Non – Biological means (Industrial process or by lighting)
  • Biological means (Bacteria / Cyanobacteria Fungi)
  • Therefore higher plants con not utilize the atmospheric Nitrogen.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 7.
Why is that in certain plants, deficiency symptoms appear first in younger parts of the plants while in others, they do so in mature organs?
Answer:
When deficiency symptoms appear first, we can notice the differences in old and younger leaves. It is mainly due to mobility’ of minerals. Based on this, they are classified into
1. Actively mobile minerals and
2. Relatively immobile minerals

a) Actively mobile minerals: Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium, Magnesium, Chlorine, Sodium, Zinc and Molybdenum. Deficiency symptoms first appear on old and senescent leaves due to active movement of minerals to younger leaves, than the older leaves.

b) Relatively immobile minerals: Calcium, Sulphur, Iron, Boron and Copper. Here, deficiency symptoms first appear on young leaves due to the immobile nature of minerals.

Question 8.
Plant A in a nutrient medium shows whiptail disease plant B in a nutrient medium shows a little leaf disease. Identify mineral deficiency of plant A and B?
Answer:
Mineral deficiency of plant A and B:

  1. Plant A is deficient in the mineral molybdenum (Mo).
  2. Plant B is deficient in the mineral zinc (Zn).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 9.
Write the role of nitrogenase enzyme in nitrogen fixation?
Answer:
Nitrogen fixation is the first step in Nitrogen cycle, during which gaseous nitrogen from the atmosphere is fixed. It required nitrogenase enzyme complex nitrogenase is active only in anaerobic condition. To create this anaerobic condition, a pigment known as leghaemoglobin is synthesized in the nodules which acts as oxygen scavenger and removes oxygen.

Question 10.
Explain the insectivorous mode of nutrition in angiosperms?
Answer:
Plants which are growing in nitrogen deficient areas develop insectivorous habit to resolve nitrogen deficiency.

  1. Nepenthes (Pitcher plant): Pitcher is a modified leaft and contains digestive enzymes. Rim of the pitcher is provided with nectar glands and acts as an attractive lid. When insect is trapped, proteolytic enzymes will digest the insect.
  2. Drosera (Sundew): It consists of long club shaped tentacles which secrete sticky digestive fluid which looks like a sundew.
  3. Utricularia (Bladder wort): Submerged plant in which leaf is modified into a bladder to collect insect in water.
  4. Dionaea (Venus fly trap): Leaf of this plant modified into a colourful trap. Two folds of lamina consist of sensitive trigger hairs and when insects touch the hairs it will close.

Insectivorous Plants

1. Nepenthes (Pitcher Plant)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 2
2. Drosera (Sundew)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 3

3. Dlonaca (Venus Fly tray)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 4

Part – II

11th Bio Botany Guide Mineral Nutrition Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose the Correct Answers

Question 1.
Plants naturally obtain nutrients from:
(a) atmosphere
(b) water
(c) soil
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 2.
The minerals placed under the list of unclassified minerals are
a) Carbon. Hydrogen, & Oxygen
b) Sodium. Silicon. Cobalt and selenium
c) Copper, Iron, Cadmium, and selenium
d) Magnesium, Sulphur, & Manganese
Answer:
b) Sodium, Silicon, Cobalt, and Selenium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
Who coined the term ‘Hydroponics’:
(a) Julius Von Sachs
(b) William Frederick Goerick
(c) Liebig
(d) Wood word
Answer:
(b) William Frederick Goerick

Question 4.
Skeletal elements are
a) Carbon, Hydrogen, and Oxygen
b) Nitrogen, Phosphorus, and Calcium
c) Potassium, Magnesium, and Sulphur
d) Nitrogen, Sulphur and Phosphorus
Answer:
a) Carbon, Hydrogen, and Oxygen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
Actively mobile minerals are:
(a) nitrogen and phosphorus
(b) iron and manganese
(c) sodium and cobalt
(d) silicon and selenium
Answer:
(a) nitrogen and phosphorus

Question 6.
Which chelating agent found in soil are produced by bacteria?
a) Siderophores
b) EDTA
c) Auxin
d) Gibberellin
Answer:
a) Siderophores

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 7.
Molybdenum is essential for the reaction of:
(a) hydrolase enzyme
(b) nitrogenase enzyme
(c) carboxylase enzyme
(d) dehydrogenase enzyme
Answer:
(b) nitrogenase enzyme

Question 8.
Minerals that play important role for activation of enzymes involved in Respiration are
a) Molybdenum and Boron
b) Boron and Silicon
c) Calcium and Magnesium
d) Magnesium and Manganese
Answer:
d) Magnesium and Manganese

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 9.
Essential component of aminoacids like Cystine, Cysteine and Melhionine is
a) Potassium
b) Magnesium
c) Sulphur
d) Calcium
Answer:
c) Sulphur

Question 10.
Which of the element is involved in the synthesis of DNA and RNA:
(a) calcium
(b) magnesium
(c) sulphuric
(d) potassium
Answer:
(b) magnesium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 11.
Delay in flowering is due to the deficiency of
a) N, S, Mo
b) Ca, Mg, Mn
c) C, H, O
d) N,P,K
Answer:
a) N,S,Mo

Question 12.
Kheria disease of Rice and Internal cork of Apple are caused by the deficiency of
a) Calcium and Maganese
b) Zinc and Boron
c) Copper and Manganese
d) Boron and Nickel
Answer:
b) Zinc and Boron

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 13.
Indicate the correct statements:
(i) Iron is the essential element for the synthesis of chlorophyll and carotenoid
(ii) Iron is the activator of carboxylene enzyme
(iii) Iton is the component of cytochrome
(iv) lvon is the component of plastocyanin

(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (ii) and (iv)
(c) (ii) and (iii)
(d) (i) and (iii)
Answer:
(d) (i) and (iii)

Question 14.
The enzyme that is a constituent of urease and dehydrogenase are
a) Molybdenum
b) Boron
c) Nickel
d) Zinc
Answer:
c) Nickel

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 15.
A membrane bound bacterium formed inside the nodule is called
a) Bacteriod
b) Plasmid
c) Nucleoid
d) Noduloid
Answer:
a) Bacteriod

Question 16.
The increased concentration of manganese in plants will prevent the uptake of:
(a) calcium and potassium
(b) sodium and potassium
(c) boron and silicon
(d) iron and magnesium
Answer:
(d) iron and magnesium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 17.
Plants need one of the following minerals for ATP and meristematic tissue formation
a) K, N
b) N, Cu
c) N, Ca
d) P, N
Answer:
d) P, N

Question 18.
The techniques of Aeroponics was developed by:
(a) Goerick
(b) Amon and Hoagland
(c) Soifer Hillel and David Durger
(d) Von Sachs
Answer:
(c) Soifer Hillel and David Durger

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 19.
Mo is a part of enzyme ……………..
a) Reverse transcriptase
b) Restriction endonuclease
c) Hexokinase
d) Nitrogenase
Answer:
d) Nitrogenase

Question 20.
Which of the bacterium causes denitrification?
a) Azotobacter
b) Nitrobacter
c) Nitrosomonas
d) Pseudomonas
Answer:
d) Pseudomonas

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 21.
Beside paddy fields, cyanobacteria are also found inside the vegetative parts of
a) Psiloturn
b) Pinus
c) Cycas
d) Equiseturn
Answer:
c) Cycas

Question 22.
The legume plants secrete phenolics to attract:
(a) Azolla
(b) Rhizobium
(c) Nitrosomonas
(d) Streptococcus
Answer:
(b) Rhizobium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 23.
Element involved in Nitrogen fixation is
a) Zinc
b) Copper
c) iron
d) Chlorine
Answer:
c) Iron

Question 24.
The nitrogenase enzyme is active:
(a) only in aerobic condition
(b) only in anaerobic condition
(c) both in aerobic and anaerobic condition
(d) only in toxic condition
Answer:
(b) only in anaerobic condition

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 25.
Plants that can grow in marshy places where there is scarcity of Nitrogen are
a) Halophytes
b) Psammophytes
c) Bryophytes
d) insectivorous plants
Answer:
d) Insectivorous plants

Question 26.
Decomposition of organic nitrogen (proteins and amino acids) from dead plants and animals into ammonia is called:
(a) nitrification
(b) ammonification
(c) nitrogen fixation
(d) denitrification
Answer:
(b) ammonification

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 27.
Internal cork of apple and Exanthema in citrus and whiptail disease of cauliflower are produced by the deficiency of
1. Copper,
2. Zinc,
3. Boron
4. Molybdenum
a) 2,3, 1
b) 2, 3, 4
c) 4, 3, 1
d) 3, 1,4
Answer:
d) 3,1,4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 28.
Necrosis means
a) Discolouration of leaf
b) Stunted growth
c) Death of the tissue
d) Death of the root
Answer:
c) Death of the tissue

Question 29.
The transfer of amino group (NH2) from glutamic acid to keto group of keto acid is termed as:
(a) Transamination
(b) Hydrogenation
(c) Nitrification
(d) Denitrification
Answer:
(a) Transamination

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 30.
Denitrification process deplete important nutrients from soil. It also cause ………………………
a) Acidification of soil
b) Alkalification of soil
c) Neutralization of soil
d) Ammoniafication of soil
Answer:
a) Acidification of soil

Question 31.
Availability of Nitrogenase enzyme depend on
a) Non avoulability of ATP
b) Availability of Nitric acid
c) Availability of ATP
d) Non availability of Nitric acid
Answer:
c) Availability of ATP

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 32.
Obligate or Total parasites are
a) Santalum albumn and orabanche
b) Vanda and Venilla
c) Cuscuta and Rafflesia
d) Viscum and Loranthus
Answer:
c) Cuscuta and Rafflesia

Question 33.
The association of mycorrhizae with higher plants is termed as:
(a) Parasitism
(b) Mutualism
(c) Symbiosis
(d) Saprophytic
Answer:
(c) Symbiosis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 34.
Major role of minor elements inside living organism is to act as
a) Binder of cell structure
b) Constituent of hormone
c) Building blocks of important amino acids
d) Co factors of enzymes
Answer:
d) Co factors of enzymes

Question 35.
Lichens are the indicators of:
(a) carbon monoxide
(b) nitrogen oxide
(c) sulphur di oxide
(d) hydrogen sulphide
Answer:
(c) sulphur di oxide

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 36.
Free living aerobic nitrogen fixing bacterium is
a) Azotobacter, Beijemeckia and Derxia
b) Nostoc, Anabaena, and Oscullatoria
c) Saccharomyces, Pullularia, Pseudomonas
d) Chlorobium and Rhodospirillum
Answer:
a) Azotobacter, Beijerneckia and Derxia

Question 37.
Leguminous plants does not include
a) Black gram
b) Bengal gram
c) Pongamia
d) Casuarina
Answer:
d) Casuarina

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 38.
Cyanobacteria does not include
a) Nostoc
b) Anabaena
c) Clostridium
d) Oscillatoria
Answer:
c) Clostridium

II. Match The Following & Find Out The Correct Option

Question 39.
Cuscuta – A) Giant flower
Dianaea – B) Pitcher plant
Rafflesia – C) Dodder
Utricularia – D) Venus fly trap
Nepenthus – E) Bladder wort
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 5
Answer:
b) C-D-A-E-B

Question 40.

Column I Column II
I) 94% of dry weight of plant comprises A) K
II) Maintain turgid and osmotic Potential of cell B) Mn
III) Mineral that play important role in photosynthesis of water C) Mg
IV) Activator of enzymes RUBP and PEP carboxylase D) C,H,O

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 6
Answer:
b) D-A-B-C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 41.

Column I Column II
I) Potassium A) Mitotic cell division & spindle fomiation
II) Calcium B) Constituent of vitamins Biotin and Thiamine
III) Sulphur C) Essential component of amino acids Nucleic acids
IV) Nitrogen D) Maintain opening and closing of Stomata

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 7
Answer:
a) D-A-B-C

Question 42.
I) Criteria required for essential minerals was given by – A) Julius von Sachs
II) Word – Hydroponics Was coined by – B)SoiferHillel& David Durger
III) Hydroponics was developed by – C)Amon& Stout
IV) Aeroponics was developed by – D) William Frederick Goerick
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 8
Answer:
c) C -D-A-B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

III. Find Out The Incorrect Statement With Reference To Potassium

Question 43.
a. It is essential for opening & closing of stomata
b. It is an essential component of vitamins, hormones, alkaloids and chlorophyll
c. It maintains osmotic potential of the cell
d. It maintain anion, cation balance by ion exchange.
Answer:
b. It is an essential component of vitamins, hormones, alkaloids and chlorophyll

Question 44.
a. Magnesium is a constituent of chlorophyll
b. Iron is essential for the formation of chlorophyll
c. Phosphorus is a component of ATP
d. Copper is essential for the synthesis of IAA
Answer:
d. Copper is essential for the synthesis of IAA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 45.
Find out wrong choice with reference to symbiotic mode of Nutrition
a. Lichens
b. Mycorrhizae
c. Coralloid roots of cycas
d. Viscum
Answer:
d. Viscum

Question 46.
The deficiency of which two exhibit competitive behaviour and the deficiencey of the two showing same symptoms.
(I) Iron
(II) Magnesium
(III) Calcium
(IV) Manganese
a) I & II
b) II & III
c) III & IV
d) I & IV
Answer:
d. I & IV

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 47.
Statement
(I) Alnus and Casuarina are nonlegume nitrogen fixers containing bacterium Frankia
(II) Nostoc and Anabaena are present in the corolloid roots of cycas.
a) Both (I) & (IT) are correct
b) (I) is correct (II) is wrong
c) (I) is wrong (II) is correct
d) Both (I) & (II) are wrong
Answer:
a) Both (I) & (II) are correct

Question 48.
Statement
(I) Dionaea is a submerged hydrophyte in which leaf is modified into a bladder to trap insects
(II) Loranthus is a partial stem parasite, absorb water and minerals from the xylem of the host
a) Both (I) & (II) are correct
b) (I) is correct (II) is wrong
c) (I) is wrong (II) is correct
d) Both (I) & (II) are wrong
Answer:
c) (I) is wrong (II) is correct

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Assertion ‘A’ & Reason ‘R’
a) Both ‘A’ and ‘R’ are True and ‘R’ is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are True, but R is not the correct explanation of A
c) A is True but ‘R’ is False
d) A& Rare False

Question 49.
Assertion: A Manganese is a Micro element
Reason: R Micro elements are required in traces only, less than 1 mg/gm of dry matter
Answer:
a) Both A and R are True and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 50.
Assertion: Calcium is a constituent of cell wall
Reason: R Calcium is required in mitotic division.
Answer:
b) A and R are True but ‘R’ is not the correct explanation of A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 51.
Assertion: A Deficiency of sulphur causes chlorosis in plants
Reason: R Sulphur is a constituent of chlorophyll
Answer:
c) A is True but ‘R’ is false

Question 52.
Assertion: A Plants absorb Nitrogen in the form of Nitrate only
Reason: R Nitrogen is the most critical element
Answer:
d) Both A and R are false

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 53.
Assertion: A Mineral salt absorption is an active process.
Reason: R Metabolic energy is not used in active absorption.
Answer:
c) A is true but ‘R’ is false

IV. 2 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Define micronutrients of plants.
Answer:
Essential minerals which are required in less concentration called Micronutrients.

Question 2.
Is there any mne monic for remembering essential minerals?
Answer:
CHOPKNs Cafe Mg B Mn Cu Zn Mo Cl (C) HOPKINS (name) Cafe managed by Mine CUZINS, Mo tnd Claude”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
What is the role of molybdenum in the conversion of nitrogen into ammonia?
Answer:
Molybdenum (Mo) is essential for nitrogenase enzyme during the reduction of atmospheric nitrogen into ammonia.

Question 4.
What are the minerls classifed as unclassified minerals and why?
Answer:
5ome minerals Such as Sodium, Silicon, Cobalt and Selenium some minerals are not included in the list ol essential nuitrients by they play some specific roles.
Eg. Silicon

  • essential for pest resistance
  • prevent water lodging
  • aids in cell wall formation in Equisetaceae, Cyperaceae & Gramineae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
What are the deficiency symptoms of nitrogen?
Answer:
Chlorosis, stunted growth, anthocyanin formation.

Question 6.
Distinguish between Hydroponics & Aeroponics
Answer:
Hydroponics: Growing plants in nutrient solution with roots immerse in it and air is supplied with the help of tube.
Hydroponics: It Is a system where roots suspended in air and nuitrients solution in a tank is sprayed over the roots by motor driven rotor – in the form of mist.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 7.
Define the term Siderophores.
Answer:
Siderophores (iron carriers) are iron-chelating agents produced by bacteria. They are used to chelate ferric iron (Fe3+) from environment and host.

Question 8.
What are called critical elements & complete fertilizers?
Answer:

  • Macro elements which commonly remain deficient in the soil are called Critical elements, (ie) N.P.K.
  • The fertilizer which contain critical elements are called complete fertilizer. They are expressed in the ratio 15: 15: 15(N:P: K)

Question 9.
Why is Iron kept between Macro and Micro nuitrients?
Answer:
Iron is required lesser than macro nuitrients and larger than the micronuitrient so it can be placed in any one of the two groups.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 9

Question 10.
Write down the deficiency symptoms of molybdenum in plants.
Answer:
Chlorosis, necrosis, delayed flowering, retarded growth and whip tail disease of cauliflower.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 11.
List two purpose for which you think Magnesium is required essentially to the plants.
Answer:
(I) Synthesis of Chlorophyll
(II) Formation of nodules in legumes

Question 12.
Define Aeroponics.
Answer:
It is a system where roots are suspended in air and nutrients are sprayed over the roots by a motor driven rotor.

Question 13.
What is meant by Toxicity of Minerals
Answer:
If mineral nuitrients lesser than critical concentration cause deficiency, where as when there is increase in
mineral nuitrients more than normal concentration cause Toxicity Toxicity ¡s that particular concentration at which 10% of the dry weight of tissue is reduced.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 14.
Give examples for Nitrogen Fixation with out nodulation.
Answer:

Plants Prokaryotes
1. Lichens Anabaena & Nostoc
2.  Anthoceros Nostoc
3.  Azolla Anabaena azollae
4. Cycas Anabaena & Nostoc

Question 15.
Give examples for Non – symbiotic Nitrogen fixation by bacteria and Fungi.
Answer:

Aerobic Azotobacter and Dervia
Anaerobic Closthdium
Photosynthetic Chiorobiuni & Rhodospirillum
Chemosynthetic Disulfo – vibrio
Freeliving Fungi Yeast & Pullularia
Cyanobacteria Ñostoc, Anabaen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 16.
Define the term Nitrate assimilation.
Answer:
The process by which nitrate is reduced to ammonia is called nitrate assimilation and occurs during the nitrogen cycle.

Question 17.
What are the negative effects of denitrification.
Answer:

  • Nitrate in the soil are converted back to atmospheric nitrogen.
  • Denitrification process deplete important nuitrients from the soil.
  • It also causes acidification of the soil.

Question 18.
Name 2 hormones involved in Nodule formation.
Answer:
During nodule formation in leguminous plants cytokinin from bacteria and Auxin from host (leguminous) plant promotes cell division and leads to nodule formation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 19.
Give two examples of symbiotic mode of nutrition.
Answer:
Two examples of symbiotic mode of nutrition:

  1. Lichens: It is a mutual association of Algae and Fungi. Algae prepares food and fungi absorb water and provides thallus structure.
  2. Mycorrhizae: Fungi associated with roots of higher plants including Gymriosperms. eg: Pinus.

Question 20.
Decreased availability of the element results in early fall of fruits and flowers. Identify the element.
Answer:
Phosphorus, Magnesium and Copper (Any one of these three elements) may cause the above symptoms.

Question 21.
Name any 3 diseases caused by copper deficiency.
Answer:

  1. Die back of Citrus.
  2. Reclamation disease of cereals & legumes.
  3. Exanthema in Citrus.

Question 22.
Notes on unclassified minerals.
Answer:
Required by some plants – for some specific functions, in trace amounts.
Example: Sodium, Silicon, Selenium & Cobalt.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 23.
Explain Nitrate Assimilation.
Answer:
Definaition: The process by which nitrate is reduced to ammonia is called Nitrate assimilation and it occurs during Nitrogen cycle.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 10
Question 24.
Explain Aluminium Toxicity.
Answer:
Aluminium toxicity causes,

  • Precipitation ofNucleic acid
  • Inhibition of ATP ase
  • Inhibition of cell division and binding of Plasma membrane with Calmodulin.

Question 25.
Differentiate between Nitrification & Denitrification
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 11

Question 26.
Organisms like Pseudomonas and Thiobacillus are of great significance in nitrogen cycle. How?
Answer:
These microorganisms carry out denitrification they help to maintain the constant level of nitrogen in the atmosphere.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 27.
What is meant by Symbiotic association give examples?
Answer:
Close relationship between two organism, both being benefitted out of it is known as symbiosis.
Eg. 1. Nitrogen fixing bacteria Nitrosomonas living in the root nodules of leguminous plants.
2. Fungi associated with roots of higher plants is a symbiotic association known as Mycorrhiza

Question 28.
What is the use of FTWS.
Answer:

  • FTWS – means floating treatment wet lands.
  • It works on the principle of hydroponics recently FTWS work on the principle of hydroponics, helping to solve pollution that come up due to Eutrophication.

Question 29.
Notes on Lichens.
Answer:

  • Lichens are pioneer species in xeric succession.
  • Lichens are nothing but symbiotic association of Algae and Fungi partners.
  • Lichens are also indicators of S02 pollution.

Question 30.
Notes on Haustoria.
Answer:
Total parasitic or partial parasites they have some special structures to absorb food or water from the host plant phloem and xylem. These special absorbing structures are known as Haustoria.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 31.
Identify the diagram A.
Answer:
Cycas corolloid roots – have symbiotic association with Nostoc helping to fix nitrogen.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 12

Question 32.
Identify the diagram.
Answer:
Root nodules of leguminous plant inhabiting Rhizobium fixing nitrogen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 13

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

3 Mark Questions.

V. Identify And Complete The Equations

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 14
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 15

Question 2.
Explain the unclassified minerals required for plants.
Answer:
Minerals like Sodium,Silicon, Cobalt and Selenium are not included in the list of essential nutrients but are required by some plants, these minerals are placed in the list of unclassified minerals. These minerals play specific roles for example, Silicon is essential for pest resistance, prevent water lodging and aids cell wall formation in Equisetaceae (Equisetum), Cyperaceae and Gramineae.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
Draw a model of Hydroponics.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 16

Question 4.
Explain briefly the functions and deficiency symptoms of potassium.
Answer:
Functions: Maintains turgidity and osmotic potential of the cell, opening and closure of stomata, phloem translocation, stimulate activity of enzymes, anion and cation balance by ion – exchange. It is absorbed as K+ ions. Deficiency symptoms: Marginal chlorosis, necrosis, low cambial activity, loss of apical dominance, lodging in cereals and curled leaf margin.

Question 5.
Draw the schematic representation of Nitrogenase enzyme function.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 17

Question 6.
Explain the term critical concentration of minerals.
Answer:
To increase productivity and also to avoid mineral toxicity knowledge of critical concentration is essential. Mineral nutrients lesser than critical concentration cause deficiency symptoms. Increase of mineral nutrients more than the normal concentration causes toxicity. A concentration, at which 10% of the dry weight of tissue is reduced, is considered a toxic critical concentration.

Question 7.
Nitrogen fixation is shown by Prokaryotes and not by Eukaryotes comment.
Answer:
Nitrogen fixation is the phenomenon that occurs in Prokaryotes but not in Eukaryotes, because the enzymes nitrogenase, which is capable of nitrogen reduction is present exclusively in prokaryotes and such microbes are often called fixers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 8.
Who are people responsible for developing hydroponics?
Answer:
Hydroponics or Soil less culture: Von Sachs developed a method of growing plants in nutrient solution. The commonly used nutrient solutions are Knop solution (1865) and Amon and Hoagland Solution (1940). Later the term Hydroponics was coined by Goerick (1940) and he also introduced commercial techniques for hydroponics. In hydroponics roots are immersed in the solution containing nutrients and air is supplied with help of tube.

VI. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Classify minerals on the basis of on their function.
a) Structural component – C, H, O & N
b) Enzyme function – Mo, Zn, Mg, &Ni
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 18
C) Osmotic potential – K:
Potassium -(K) – maintain osmotic Potential by 2 steps.

  1. Absorption of water
  2. Movement of stomata & turgidity

d) Energy components:
Mg – in chlorophyll
P- in ATP

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 2.
Tabulate the mode of absorption, function and deficiency symptoms of any 5 microelements.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 19

Question 3.
Give the details of minerals and their deficiency symptoms.
Answer:
Name of the deficiency disease and symptoms:

  1. Chlorosis (Overall)
    • Interveinal chlorosis
    • Marginal chlorosis
  2. Necrosis (Death of the tissue)
  3. Stunted growth
  4. Anthocyanin formation
  5. Delayed flowering
  6. Die back of shoot, Reclamation disease, Exanthema in citrus (gums on bark)
  7. Hooked leaf tip
  8. Little Leaf
  9. Brown heart of turnip and Internal cork of apple
  10. Whiptail of cauliflower and cabbage
  11. Curled leaf margin

Deficiency minerals:

  1. Nitrogen, Potassium, Magnesium, Sulphur, Iron, Manganese, Zinc and Molybdenum. Magnesium, Iron, Manganese and Zinc Potassium
  2. Magnesium, Potassium, Calcium, Zinc, Molybdenum and Copper.
  3. Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Calcium, Potassium and Sulphur.
  4. Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Magnesium and Sulphur
  5. Nitrogen, Sulphur and Molybdenum
  6. Copper
  7. Calcium
  8. Zinc
  9. Boron
  10. Molybdenum
  11. Potassium

Question 4.
Why are NPK fertilizers important to plants?
Answer:
Nitrogen: It helps in plant growth and development.

  • It required in large amount
  • It is essential component of Proteins, Amino acids, Nucleic acids, Vitamins, Hormones, Chlorophyll etc.

Phosphorus:
It is an important constituent of Cell membrane, Proteins, Nucleic acids, ATP, NADP etc.

Potassium:

  • It is essential to maintain turgidity and osmotic potential of the cell.
  • Opening and closure of stomata.
  • Phloem translocation.
  • Ion exchange etc.
  • So overall all the three in right proportion is used by farmers for various plants to enhance yield.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
Tabulate the major Essential elements their function & Deficiency symptoms.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 20
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 21

Question 6.
What are the stages of Root nodule formation.
Answer:
1. Attraction:
Legume roots secretes Phenolics to attract Rhizobium.

2. Infection:

  • Rhizobium – reaches rhizosphere
  • Rhizosphere – to root hair.
  • Curling of root hairs.

3. Spreading & multiplication:
Infection thread grows inwards and infected area is separated from normal tissue.

4. Bacteriod formation:
A membrane bound bacterium is formed inside the nodule ……………. called Bacterioid.

5. Nodule formation:

  • Cytokinin from Bacteria.
  • Auxin from legume roots together promote cell division and nodules are formed.

Question 7.
Explain the fate of Ammonia or Assimilation of Ammonia.
Answer:

  • Ammonia ions are quite toxic to plants, and hence cannot accumulate in the plants.
  • It should be converted into Amino acids.

There are 3 methods by which it is done.

I) Reductive amination:
In this ammonia reacts with Ketoglutaric acid and form glutamic acid.Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 22

II) Transamination:

  • It involves the transfer of amino group from one amino acid to the ketogroup of another keto acid.
  • Glutamic acid is the main amino acid from which the transfer of NH2 (amino group) takes place and other amino acids are fonned through transamination.
  • The enzyme Transaminase + Pyridoxus phosphate (COenz) reactions.

Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 23

III) Catalytic Amination (GS/GOGAT path way)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 24

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 8.
Explain parasitic mode of Nuitrition.
Answer:
Definition:
Organism deriving their nuitrients from another organism (host and causing damage/disease to the host is known as parasite. Stem parasite Root parasite Stem parasite Root parasite.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 25
I) Obligate or Total parasite :

  1. Completely depends on host for their survival produce haustoria.
    Total stem parasite:
  2. Leafless plant twine around the host. Eg. Cuscuta on Zizipus, citrus etc.
    Total root parasite:
  3. Plants do not have stem axis – so grow in the roots of host plants produce haustoria.
    Eg. Rafflesia, Orobanche and Balanophora.

II) Partial parasite:
Plant have chlorophyll on their leaves dependent on water and mineral requirements.

  • Partial stem parasite: The plant grow an fig and mango and absorb water and minerals from xylem of host through haustoria.
    Eg. Loranthus.
  • Partial root parasite: This plant in its juvenile stages produces haustoria which grow on roots of many forest trees.
    Eg. Sandal wood tree (santalum album)

Question 9.
Describe Saprophytic mode of nuitrition in Angiosperms?
Answer:
Definition:
Derving nuitrients from dead and decaying organic matter is known as saprophytic – nuitrition.
Eg. Bacteria, Fungi

Saprophytic Angiosperms:

  • Neottia: (Bird’s nest orchid) Roots of Neottia get associated with the mycorrhizae and absorb nuitrients from the litter in the soil.
  • The plant leaves lack chlorophyll so dependon mycorrhiza to absorb nuitrients from the decomposed litter in the soil.
  • Monotropa: (Indian pipe) It also lack leaves, so absorb nuitrients from the soil through the mycorrhizal association.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

11th Chemistry Guide Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textual Questions:

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
For alkali metals, which one of the following trends is incorrect?
(a) Hydration energy: Li > Na > K> Rb
(b) Ionisationenergy: Li> Na> K> Rb
(c) Density: Li < Na < K < Rb
(d) Atomic size: Li < Na < K < Rb
Answer:
(c) Density: Li < Na < K < Rb

Question 2.
Which of the following statements is incorrect?
(a) Li+ has minimum degree of hydration among alkali metal cations
(b) The oxidation state of K in KO2 is +1
(c) Sodium is used to make Na / Pb alloy
(d) MgSO4 is readily soluble in water
Answer:
(a) Li+ has minimum degree of hydration among alkali metal cations

Question 3.
Which of the following compounds will not evolve H2 gas on reaction with alkali metals ?
(a) ethanoic acid
(b) ethanol
(c) phenol
(d) none of these
Answer:
(d) none of these

Question 4.
Which of the following has the highest tendency to give the reaction, M+(g) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals 1 M+(aq)
(a) Na
(b) Li
(c) Rb
(d) K
Answer:
(b) Li

Question 5.
sodium is stored in
(a) alcohol
(b) water
(c) kerosene
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) kerosene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 6.
RbO2 is
(a) superoxide and paramagnetic
(b) peroxide and diamagnetic
(c) superoxide and diamagnetic
(d) peroxide and paramagnetic
Answer:
(a) superoxide and paramagnetic

Question 7.
Find the wrong statement
(a) sodium metal is used in organic qualitative analysis
(b) sodium carbonate is soluble in water and it is used in inorganic qualitative analysis
(c) potassium carbonate can be prepared by solvay process
(d) potassium bicarbonate is acidic salt
Answer:
(c) potassium carbonate can be prepared by solvay process

Question 8.
Lithium shows diagonal relationship with
(a) sodium
(b) magnesium
(c) calcium
(d) aluminium
Answer:
(b) magnesium

Question 9.
Incase of alkali metal halides, the ionic character increases in the order
(a) MF < MCl < MBr < MI
(b) MI < MBr < MCl < MF
(c) MI < MBr < MF < MCl
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) MI < MBr < MCl < MF

Question 10.
In which process, fused sodium hydroxide is electrolysed for extraction of sodium?
(a) Castner’s process
(b) Cyanide process
(c) Down process
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Castner’s process

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 11.
The product obtained as a result of a reaction of nitrogen with CaC2 is
(a) Ca(CN)3
(b) CaN2
(c) Ca(CN)2
(d) Ca3N2
Answer:
(c) Ca(CN)2

Question 12.
Which of the following has highest hydration energy
(a) MgCl2
(b) CaCl2
(c) BaCl2
(d) SrCl2
Answer:
(a) MgCl2

Question 13.
Match the flame colours of the alkali and alkaline earth metal salts in the bunsen burner

(p) Sodium (1) Brick red
(q) Calcium (2) Yellow
(r) Barium (3) Violet
(s) Strontium (4) Apple green
(t) Cesium (5) Crimson red
(u) Potassium (6) Blue

(a) p – 2, q – 1, r – 4, s – 5, t – 6, u – 3
(b) p – 1, q – 2, r – 4, s – 5, t – 6, u – 3
(c) p – 4, q – 1, r – 2, s – 3, t – 5, u – 6
(d) p – 6, q – 5, r – 4, s – 3, t – 1, u – 2
Answer:
(a) p – 2, q – 1, r – 4, s – 5, t – 6, u – 3

Question 14.
Assertion:
Generally alkali and alkaline earth metals form superoxides
Reason:
There is a single bond between O and O in superoxides.
(a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion .
(b) both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) assertion is true but reason is false
(d) both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
(d) both assertion and reason are false

Question 15.
Assertion:
BeSO4 is soluble in water while BaSO4 is not
Reason:
Hydration energy decreases down the group from Be to Ba and lattice energy remains almost constant.
(a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion
(b) both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) assertion is true but reason is false
(d) both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
(a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 16.
Which is the correct sequence of solubility of carbonates of alkaline earth metals ?
(a) BaCO3 > SrCO3 > CaCO3 > MgCO3
(b) MgCO3 > CaCO3 > SrCO3 > BaCO3
(c) CaCO3 > BaCO3 > SrCO3 > MgCO3
(d) BaCO3 > CaCO3 > SrCO3 > MgCO3
Answer:
(b) MgCO3 > CaCO3 > SrCO3 > BaCO3

Question 17.
In context with beryllium, which one of the following statements is incorrect?
(a) It is rendered passive by nitric acid
(b) It forms Be2C
(c) Its salts are rarely hydrolysed
(d) Its hydride is electron deficient and polymeric
Answer:
(c) Its salts are rarely hydrolysed

Question 18.
The suspension of slaked lime in water is known as
(a) lime water
(b) quick lime
(c) milk of lime
(d) aqueous solution of slaked lime
Answer:
(c) milk of lime

Question 19.
A colourless solid substance (A) on heating evolved CO2 and also gave a white residue, soluble in water. Residue also gave CO2 when treated with dilute HCl.
(a) Na2CO3
(b) NaHCO3
(c) CaCO3
(d) Ca(HCO3)2
Answer:
(b) NaHCO3

Question 20.
The compound (X) on heating gives a colourless gas and a residue that is dissolved in water to obtain (5). Excess of CO2 is bubbled through aqueous solution of B, C is formed. Solid (C) on heating gives back X. (B) is
(a) CaCO3
(b) Ca(OH)2
(c) Na2CO3
(d) NaHCO3
Answer:
(b) Ca(OH)2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 21.
Which of the following statement is false?
(a) Ca2+ ions are not important in maintaining the regular beating of the heart
(b) Mg2+ ions are important in the green parts of the plants
(c) Mg2+ ions form a complex with ATP
(d) Ca2+ ions are important in blood clotting
Answer:
(a) Ca2+ ions are not important in maintaining the regular beating of the heart

Question 22.
The name ‘Blue John’ is given to which of the following compounds?
(a) CaH2
(b) CaF2
(c) Ca3(PO4)2
(d) CaO
Answer:
(b) CaF2

Question 23.
Formula of Gypsum is
(a) CaSO4 .2H2O
(b) CaSO4 .\(\frac{1}{2}\)H2O
(c) 3CaSO4 .H2O
(d) 2CaSO4 .2H2O
Answer:
(a) CaSO4 .2H2O

Question 24.
When CaC2 is heated in atmospheric nitrogen in an electric furnace the compound formed is
(a) Ca(CN)2
(b) CaNCN
(c) CaC2N2
(d) CaNC2
Answer:
(b) CaNCN

Question 25.
Among the following the least thermally stable is
(a) K2CO3
(b) Na2CO3
(c) BaCO3
(d) Li2CO3
Answer:
(d) Li2CO3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

II. Write brief answer to the following questions:

Question 26.
Why sodium hydroxide is much more water-soluble than chloride?
Answer:

  1. Sodium hydroxide is stronger base whereas sodium chloride is a salt.
  2. Sodium hydroxide dissolve freely in water with evolution of much heat on account of intense hydration.
  3. In other words when the Na+ and OH ions break up, the OH ions are much smaller than Cl ions and are able to form a hydrogen bond with water.
  4. Thus sodium hydroxide dissolves easily in water.

Question 27.
Explain what to mean by efflorescence.
Answer:

  1. Efflorescence is a process of losing water of hydration from hydrate.
  2. Sodium carbonate crystallises as decahydrate which is white in colour.
  3. Upon heating, it loses the water of crystallization to form monohydrate.
  4. Monohydrate (Na2CO3.H2O) is formed as a result of efflorescence.
    Na2CO3 .10H2O → Na2CO3.H2O + 9H2O

Question 28.
Write the chemical equations for the reactions involved in solvay process of preparation of sodium carbonate.
Answer:
2NH3 + H2O + CO2 → (NH4)2CO3
(NH4)2CO3 + H2O + CO2 → 2NH4HCO3
2NH4HCO3 + NaCl → NH4Cl + NaHCO3
2NaHCO3 → Na2CO3 + CO2 + H2O

Question 29.
An alkali metal (x) forms a hydrated sulphate, X2SO4 .10H2O. Is the metal more likely to be sodium (or) potassium?
Answer:
Sodium: Because hydration is favoured by high charge density cations and of the two mono positive ions, sodium is smaller and will have higher charge density.
Thus, Na2SO4.10H2O is more readily formed.

Question 30.
Write a balanced chemical equation for each of the following chemical reactions.
(i) Lithium metal with nitrogen gas
(ii) heating solid sodium bicarbonate
(iii) Rubidum with oxgen gas
(iv) solid potassium hydroxide with CO2
(v) heating calcium carbonate
(vi) heating calcium with oxygen
Answer:
(i) 6Li(s) + N2(g) → 2Li3N(s)
(ii) 2NaHCO3(s) → Na2CO3(s) + CO2(g) + H2O(g)
(iii) Rb + O2 → RbO2
(iv) 2KOH + CO2 → K2CO3 + H2O
(v) CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
(vi) 2Ca + O2 → 2 CaO

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 31.
Discuss briefly the similarities between beryllium and aluminium.
Answer:

  1. Beryllium chloride forms a dimeric structure like aluminium chloride with chloride bridges. Beryllium chloride also forms a polymeric chain structure in addition to dimer. Both are soluble in organic solvents and are strong Lewis acids.
  2. Beryllium hydroxide dissolves in excess of alkali and gives beryllate ion and [Be(OH)4]2- and hydrogen as aluminium hydroxide which gives aluminate ion, [Al(OH)4]2-.
  3.  Beryllium and aluminium ions have strong tendency to form complexes, BeF42-, AlF63-.
  4. Both beryllium and aluminium hydroxides are amphoteric in nature.
  5. Carbides of beryllium (Be2C) like aluminium carbide (Al4C3) give methane on hydrolysis.
  6. Both beryllium and aluminium are rendered passive by nitric acid.

Question 32.
Give the systematic names for the following
(i) milk of magnesia
(ii) lye
(iii) lime
(iv) Caustic potash
(v) washing soda
(vi) soda ash
(vii) trona
Answer:
(i) Magnesium hydroxide
(ii) caustic soda(Sodium Hydroxide)
(iii) calcium oxide
(iv) Potassium Hydroxide
(v) sodium carbonate
(vi) sodium carbonate
(vii) Sodium Sesquicarbonate

Question 33.
Substantiate Lithium fluoride has the lowest solubility among group one metal fluorides.
Answer:
Lithium fluoride has the lowest solubility among alkali metal fluoride due to its small size of Li+ and F ions, lattice enthalpy is much higher than that of hydration enthalpy.

Question 34.
Mention the uses of plaster of paris.
Answer:
The largest use of Plaster of Paris is in the building industry as well as plasters. It is used for immobilising the affected part of organ where there is a bone fracture or sprain. It is also employed in dentistry, in ornamental work and for making casts of statues and busts.

Question 35.
Beryllium halides are Covalent whereas magnesium halides are ionic why?
Answer:
Halogens are non-metals and beryllium is also a non-metal. Since non-metals always form covalent bonds with each other due to almost similar ionization potential and electronegativity. And Beryllium is smaller in size and has high polarizing power therefore, beryllium halides are covalent.

Magnesium is a metal and metals mostly form ionic bonds with non-metals due to vast difference in their ionization potential and electronegativity, therefore magnesium halides are always ionic.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 36.
Alkaline earth metal (A), belongs to 3rd period reacts with oxygen and nitrogen to form compound (B) and (C) respectively. It undergoes metal displacement reaction with AgNO3 solution to form compound (D).
Answer:
Alkaline earth metal, 3rd → Magnesium(Mg) ……….(A)
2 Mg + O2 → 2MgO …………(B)
3 Mg + N2 → Mg3N2 ……….(C)
Mg + 2 AgNO3 → 2 Ag + Mg(NO3)2 ………….(D)
A – Magnesium
B – Magnesium oxide
C – Magnesium nitride
D – Magnesium nitrate

Question 37.
Write balanced chemical equation for the following processes
(a) heating calcium in oxygen
(b) heating calcium carbonate
(c) evaporating a solution of calcium hydrogen carbonate
(d) heating calcium oxide with carbon
Answer:
(a) 2 Ca + O2 → 2CaO
(b) CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
(c) Ca(HCO3)2 → CO2 + H2O + CaCO3.
(d) CaO + 3 C → CaC2 + CO

Question 38.
Explain the important common features of Group 2 elements.
Answer:

  1. Group 2 is known as alkaline earth metals. It contains soft, silver metals that are less metallic in character than the Group 1 elements. Although many characteristics are common throughout the group, the heavier metals such as Ca, Sr, Ba, and Ra are almost as reactive as the Group 1 Alkali Metals.
  2. General electronic configuration can be represented as [Noble gas] ns2 where ‘n’ represents the valence shell.
  3. All the elements in Group 2 have two electrons in their valence shells, giving them an oxidation state of +2. This enables the metals to easily lose electrons, which increases their stability and allows them to form compounds via ionic bonds.
  4. The atomic and ionic radii of alkaline earth metals are smaller than the corresponding members of the alkali metals.
  5. On moving down the group, the radii increases due to gradual increase in the number of the shells and the screening effect.
  6. Down the group the ionisation enthalpy decreases as atomic size increases. They are less electropositive than alkali metals.
  7. Compounds of alkaline earth metals are more extensively hydrated than those of alkali metals, because the hydration enthalpies of alkaline earth metal ions are larger than those of alkali metal ions.

Question 39.
Discus the similarities between beryllium and aluminium.
Answer:
Similarities between Beryllium and Aluminium

  1. Beryllium chloride forms a dimeric structure like aluminium chloride with chloride bridges. Beryllium chloride also forms polymeric chain structure in addition to dimer. Both are soluble in organic solvents and are strong Lewis acids.
  2. Beryllium hydroxide dissolves in excess of alkali and gives beryllate ion and [Be(OH)4]2-and hydrogen as aluminium hydroxide which gives aluminate ion, [Al(OH)4].
  3. Beryllium and aluminium ions have strong tendency to form complexes, BeF42-, AlF63-.
  4. Both beryllium and aluminium hydroxides are amphoteric in nature.
  5. Carbides of beryllium (Be2C) like aluminium carbide (Al4C3) give methane on hydrolysis.
  6. Both beryllium and aluminium are rendered passive by nitric acid.

Question 40.
Why alkaline earth metals are harder than alkali metals?
Answer:
The strength of metallic bond in alkaline earth metals is higher than the alkali metals due to presence of 2 electrons in its outermost shell as compared to alkali metal which have only 1 electron in valence shell. Therefore alkaline earth metals are harder than the alkali metals.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 41.
How is plaster of paris prepared?
Answer:
It is a hemihydrate of calcium sulphate. It is obtained when gypsum,
CaSO4.2H2O is heated to 393 K.
2CaSO4.2H2O(s) → 2CaSO4.H2O + 3H2O
Above 393 K, no water of crystallisation is left and anhydrous calcium sulphate, CaSO4 is formed. This is known as ‘dead burnt plaster’.

Question 42.
Give the uses of gypsum.
Answer:

  1. Gypsum is used in making drywalls or plasterboards. Plasterboards are used as the finish for walls and ceilings, and for partitions.
  2. Another important use of gypsum is the production of plaster of Paris. Gypsum is heated to about 300 degree Fahrenheit to produce plaster of Paris, which is also known as gypsum plaster. It is mainly used as a sculpting material.
  3. Gypsum is used in making surgical and orthopaedic casts, such as surgical splints and casting moulds.
  4. Gypsum plays an important role in agriculture as a soil additive, conditioner, and fertilizer. It helps loosen up compact or clay soil, and provides calcium and sulphur, which are essential for the healthy growth of a plant. It can also be used for removing sodium from soils having excess salinity.
  5. Gypsum is used in toothpaste, shampoos, and hair products, mainly due to its binding and thickening properties.
  6. Gypsum is a component of Portland cement, where it acts as a hardening retarder to control the speed at which concrete sets.

Question 43.
Describe briefly the biological importance of Calcium and magnesium.
Answer:
Magnesium:

  1. A typical adult human body contains about 25 g of magnesium and 1200 g of calcium.
  2. Magnesium plays an important role in many biochemical reactions catalyzed by enzymes.
  3. It is the co-factor of all enzymes that utilize ATP in phosphate transfer and energy release.
  4. It also essential for DNA synthesis and is responsible for the stability and proper functioning of DNA.
  5. It is also used for balancing electrolytes in our body.
  6. Deficiency of magnesium results into convulsion and neuromuscular irritation.
  7. The main pigment that is responsible for photosynthesis, chlorophyll, contains magnesium which plays an important role in photosynthesis.

Calcium:

  1. Calcium is a major component of bones and teeth.
  2. It is also present in in blood and its concentration is maintained by hormones (calcitonin and parathyroid hormone).
  3. Deficiency of calcium in blood causes it to take longer time to clot. It is also important for muscle contraction.

Question 44.
Which would you expect to have a higher melting point, magnesium oxide or magnesium fluoride? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

  1. Magnesium fluoride – 1263°C
  2. Magnesium oxide – 2852°C
  3. The strength of ionic bonds usually depends on two factors – ionic radius and charge. Mg2+ and O2- have charges of +2 and -2 respectively. This is larger than the charge of other ions like.
  4. Magnesium ions and oxygen ions also have small ionic radius.
  5. Oxygen ion is smaller than fluoride
  6. The smaller the ionic radii, the smaller the bond length and the stronger the bond. Therefore the ionic bond between magnesium and oxygen is very strong.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

11th Chemistry Guide Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best Answer:

Question 1.
The reducing property of alkali metals follows the order
(a) Na < K < Rb < Cs < Li
(b) K < Na < Rb < Cs < Li
(c) Li < Cs < Rb < K < Na
(d) Rb < Cs < K < Na < Li
Answer:
(a) Na < K < Rb < Cs < Li

Question 2.
Arrange the following in increasing order of hydration enthalpy.
(a) Rb+ > Li+ > Na+ > K+ > Cs+
(b) Cs+ > Rb+ > K+ > Na+ > Li+
(c) Li+ > Na+ > K+ > Rb+ > Cs+
(d) K+ > Na+ > Li+ > Rb+ > Cs+
Answer:
(c) Li+ > Na+ > K+ > Rb+ > Cs+

Question 3.
Li does not resemble other alkali metals in which of the following property?
(a) Li2CO3 decomposes into oxides while other alkali carbonates re thermally stable
(b) LiCl is predominantly covalent
(c) Li3N stable
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 4.
1 mol of a substance (X) was treated with an excess of water, 2 mol of readily combustible gas were . produced along with solution which when reacted with CO2 gas produced a white turbidity. The substance (X) could be
(a) Ca
(b) CaH2
(c) Ca(OH)2
(d) Ca(NO3)2
Answer:
(b) CaH2

Question 5.
The alkali metal used in photoelectric cells is
(a) Na
(b) Cs
(c) Rb
(d) Fr
Answer:
(b) Cs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 6.
Na2O2 has light yellow colour. This is due to
(a) presence of unpaired electron in the molecule
(b) presence of trace of NaO2
(c) presence of KO2 ass an impurity
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) presence of trace of NaO2

Question 7.
Be2C + 4H2O → 2X + CH4
X + 2HCl + 2H2O → Y
X and Y formed in the above two reactions is
(a) BeCO3 and Be(OH)2 respectively
(b) Be(OH)2 and BeCl2 respectively
(c) Be(OH)2 and [Be(OH)4]Cl2 respectively
(d) [Be(OH)4]2- and BeCl2 respectively
Answer:
(c) BQ(OH)2 and [Be(OH)4]Cl2 respectively

Question 8.
When sodium reacts with excess of oxygen, oxidation number of oxygen changes from
(a) 0 to – 1
(b) 0 to 2
(c) – 1 to – 2
(d) +1 to -1
Answer:
(a) 0 to – 1

Question 9.
Magnesium burns in air to give
(a) MgO
(b) MgCO3
(c) MgCO3
(d) MgO and Mg3N2
Answer:
(d) MgO and Mg3N2

Question 10.
The composition of common baking powder is
(a) starch, sodium bicarbonate, citric acid
(b) Sodium bicarbonate, tartaric acid
(c) starch, sodium bicarbonate, citric acid
(d) Starch, sodium bicarbonate, calcium hydrogen phosphate.
Answer:
(d) Starch, sodium bicarbonate, calcium hydrogen phosphate.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 11.
The word ‘alkali’ used for alkali metals indicates
(a) ashes of plants
(b) metallic luster
(c) soft metals
(d) reactive metals
Answer:
(a) ashes of plants

Question 12.
Which salt can be used to identify coloured cation
(a) borax
(b) microcosmic salt
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) both (a) and (b)

Question 13.
Select the correct statement
LiOH > NaOH > KOH > RbOH
Li2CO3 > Na2CO3 > K2CO3 > Rb2CO3
(a) Solubility of alkali hydroxides is in order
(b) Solubility of alkali carbonates is in order
(c) both are correct
(d) None is correct
Answer:
(b) Solubility of alkali carbonates is in order

Question 14.
Which fumes in air?
(a) BeCl2
(b) MgCl2
(c) CaCl2
(d) BaCl2
Answer:
(a) BeCl2

Question 15.
Which of the following ions form a hydroxide highly soluble in water?
(a) Ni2+
(b) K2+
(c) Zn2+
(d) Al3+
Answer:
(b) K2+

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 16.
Which causes nerve signals in animals?
(a) Electrical potential gradient due to transfer of K+ ions
(b) Electrical potential gradient due to transfer of Na+ ions in (Na+ – K+) pumps
(c) Electrical potential gradient set up due to transfer of Ca2+ ions
(d) No nerve signal exists in animals.
Answer:
(a) Electrical potential gradient due to transfer of K+ ions

Question 17.
The carbide of which of the following metals on hydrolysis gives allylene or propyne?
(a) Be
(b) Ca
(c) Al
(d) Mg
Answer:
(d) Mg

Question 18.
Which of the following reaction produces hydrogen?
(a) Mg + H2O
(b) H2S4O8 + H2O
(c) BaO2 + HCl
(d) Na2O2 + 2HCl
Answer:
(a) Mg + H2O

Question 19.
A major constituent of Portland cement (except lime) is
(a) Silica
(b) Alumina
(c) Iron oxide
(d) Magnesia
Answer:
(a) Silica

Question 20.
Which of the following is known as a variety of gypsum ?
(a) CaCO3
(b) CaSO4
(c) plaster of paris
(d) gypsum
Answer:
(d) gypsum

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 21.
The elements belongs to group-1 are called as
(a) Alkali metals
(b) Alkaline earth metals
(c) halogens
(d) chalcogens
Answer:
(a) Alkali metals

Question 22.
Which one of the following is a radioactive element of alkali metal?
(a) Cesium
(b) Francium
(c) Potassium
(d) Sodium
Answer:
(b) Francium

Question 23.
Match the correct pair Element:

(A) lithium (i) Sylvite
(B) Sodium (ii) Spodumene
(C) Potassium (iii) Rock Salt

(a) A – ii, B – iii, C – i
(b) A – i, B – ii, C – iii
(c) A – ii, B – i, C – iii
(d) A – i, B – iii, C – ii
Answer:
(a) A – ii, B – iii, C – i

Question 24.
The colour of potassium salt in flame is
(a) Crimson red
(b) Lilac
(c) Blue
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(b) Lilac

Question 25.
Lithium reacts directly with carbon to form
(a) Li2C2
(b) Li2C
(c) LiC2
(d) LiC
Answer:
(a) Li2C2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 26.
Lithium shows diagonal relationship with
(a) Beryllium
(b) Carbon
(c) Magnesium
(d) Calcium
Answer:
(c) Magnesium

Question 27.
Which of the following element forms monoxide and peroxide?
(a) Lithium
(b) Potassium
(c) Rubedium
(d) Sodium
Answer:
(d) Sodium

Question 28.
Choose the correct pair:

(A) Pb(Me)4 (i) fertilizer
(B) KCl (ii) photoelectric cells
(C) Pb-Al alloy (iii) anti-knock additives
(D) Cs (iv) air craft parts

(a) A – iii, B – i, C – iv, D – ii
(b) A – ii, B – iii, C – iv, D – i
(c) A – iv, B – ii, C – iii, D – i
(d) A – ii, B – iv, C – i, D – iii
Answer:
(a) A – iii, B – i, C – iv, D – ii

Question 29.
Sodium reacts with acetylene to give
(a) Sodium ethoxide
(b) Sodium acetylide
(c) Sodium hydroxide
(d) Sodamide
Answer:
(b) Sodium acetylide

Question 30.
The products obtained on reaction of Na2O2 with water are
(a) NaOH and H2O
(b) NaOH and H2O2
(c) Na2O and H2O2
(d) NaOH, Na2O
Answer:
(c) Na2O and H2O2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 31.
Choose the correct statement/s is are correct about alkali metals.
1. The oxides and peroxides are colourless when pure but the superoxides are yellow or orange in colour.
2. The peroxides are diamagnetic while the superoxides are paramagnetic.
3. Sodium peroxide is widely used as an oxidizing agent.
4. The alkali metal hydroxides are weak bases.
(a) 1, 2 and 4
(b) 2, 3 and 4
(c) 1, 2 and 3
(d) 1, 3 and 4
Answer:
(c) 1, 2 and 3

Question 32.
Statement – 1:
LiF has low solubility in water.
Statement – 2:
LiF has low lattice enthalpy.
In the above statements
(a) 1 alone is correct.
(b) Both 1 and 2 are correct
(c) 2 alone is correct
(d) Both 1 and 2 are incorrect
Answer:
(b) Both 1 and 2 are correct

Question 33.
Alkali metals except ______ form solid bicarbom
(a) Sodium
(b) Potassium
(c) Cesium
(d) Lithium
Answer:
(d) Lithium

Question 34.
The ammonia used in the Solvay proves- recovered by using
(a) calcium chloride
(b) Calcium hydroxide
(c) calcium carbonate
(d) calcium oxide
Answer:
(b) Calcium hydroxide

Question 35.
The by-product formed in the Solvay process
(a) calcium chloride
(b) calcium hydroxide
(c) calcium carbonate
(d) ammonium chloride
Answer:
(a) calcium chloride

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 36.
Sodium carbonate decahydrate on heating ab 373K gives
(a) Na2CO3 .3H2O
(b) N2CO3 .5H2O
(c) Na2CO3
(d) Na2CO3 .H2O
Answer:
(c) Na2CO3

Question 37.
_______ is used water treatment to convert the hard water to soft water.
(a) Sodium chloride
(b) Sodium bicarbonate
(c) Sodium hydroxide
(d) Sodium carbonate
Answer:
(d) Sodium carbonate

Question 38.
The product obtained on saturating a solution o sodium carbonate with carbon dioxide i,-.
(a) sodium bicarbonate
(b) sodium hydroxide
(c) sodium chloride
(d) sodium peroxide.
Answer:
(a) sodium bicarbonate

Question 39.
Choose the correct pair:

(A) Sodium chloride (i) Petroleum refining
(B) Sodium Carbonate (ii) domestic use
(C) Sodium bicarbonate (iii) laundering
(D) Sodium Hydroxide (iv) fire extinguisher

(a) A – ii, B – iv, C – iii, D – i
(b) A – ii, B – iii, C – iv, D – i
(c) A – iv, B – ii, C – i, D – iii
(d) A – iv, B – i, C – ii, D – iii
Answer:
(b) A – ii, B – iii, C – iv, D – i

Question 40.
The used in baking cakes, pastries etc., is
(a) sodium chloride
(b) sodium carbonate
(c) sodium bicarbonate
(d) sodium hydroxide
Answer:
(c) sodium bicarbonate

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 41.
______ pump play an important role in transmitting nerve signals.
(a) sodium-Magnesium
(b) sodium-potassium
(c) sodium-calcium
(d) sodium-lithium
Answer:
(b) sodium-potassium

Question 42.
Fluoraptite is the ore of
(a) magnesium
(b) beryllium
(c) potassium
(d) calcium
Answer:
(d) calcium

Question 43.
The fifth most abundant element in the earth’s crust is
(a) magnesium
(b) beryllium
(c) calcium
(d) strontium
Answer:
(c) calcium

Question 44.
Strontium nitrate give _______ colour in fire works.
(a) violet
(b) bright red
(c) green
(d) orange
Answer:
(b) bright red

Question 45.
Which of the alkaline earth metal has highest hydration enthalpy?
(a) Be
(b) Mg
(c) Ca
(d) Sr
Answer:
(a) Be

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 46.
The anomalous properties of beryllium is mainly due to its
1. small size
2. low electronegativity
3. high ionization energy
4. low polarizing power.
(a) 1,2, 3 and 4
(b) 2 and 4
(c) 1 and 3
(d) 1 and 3
Answer:
(d) 1 and 3

Question 47.
______ and ______ ions have strong tendency to form complexes.
(a) Be and Al
(b) Be and Mg
(c) Ca and Sr
(d) Be and B
Answer:
(a) Be and Al

Question 48.
______ is used as radiation windows for X-ray tubes.
(a) Mg
(b) Be
(c) Na
(d) Ca
Answer:
(b) Be

Question 49.
A compound of calcium used in makig surgical and orthopedic casts is
(a) Dolomite
(b) Gypsum
(c) Feldspar
(d) plaster of paris
Answer:
(b) Gypsum

Question 50.
______ is a major component of bones and teeth.
(a) Na
(b) Be
(c) Ca
(d) Mg
Answer:
(c) Ca

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

II. Very short question and answers (2 Marks):

Question 1.
What are s-block elements?
Answer:
The elements belonging to the group 1 and 2 in the modem periodic table are called s-block elements. The elements belonging to these two groups are commonly known as alkali and alkaline earth metals respectively.

Question 2.
What are alkali metals?
Answer:
Alkali metals consists of the elements: lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, caesium and francium. They are all metals, generally soft and highly reactive. They form oxides and hydroxides and these compounds are basic in nature.

Question 3.
Write the mineral source of lithium, sodium and potassium.
Answer:

Element Mineral source
1. Lithium Spodumene
2. Sodium Rock Salt
3. Pottasium Sylvite

Question 4.
Why does the ionization enthalpy of alkali metals decreases in a group?
Answer:
Alkali metals have the lowest ionisation enthalpy compared to other elements present in the respective period. As we go down the group, the ionisation enthalpy decreases due to the increase in atomic size. In addition, the number of inner shells also increases, which in turn increases the magnitude of screening effect and consequently, the ionisation enthalpy decreases down the group.

Question 5.
The second ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are very high. Give reason.
Answer:
The second ionisation enthalpies of alkali metals are very high. The removal of an electron from the alkali metals gives monovalent cations having stable electronic configurations similar to the noble gas. Therefore, it becomes very difficult to remove the second electron from the stable Configurations, already attained.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 6.
Why is the lithium salts are more soluble than the salts of other metals of group-1.
Answer:
Lithium salts are more soluble than the salts of other metals of group 1. eg., LiClO4 is up to 12 times more soluble than NaClO4. KClO4, RbClO4, and CsClO4 have solubilities only 10-3 times of that of LiClO4. The high solubility of Li salts is due to strong solvation of small size of Li+ ion.

Question 7.
What is diagonaol relatiobship?
Answer:
Similarity between the first member of group 1 (Li) and the diagonally placed second element of group 2 (Mg) is called diagonal relationship. It is due to similar size (rLi+ = 0.766 Å and Mg2+ = 0.12 Å) and comparable electronegativity values (Li = 1.0; Mg = 1.2).

Question 8.
Why does the solubility of carbonates and bicarbonates decreases in a group?
Answer:
All the carbonates and bicarbonates are soluble in water and their solubilities increase rapidly on descending the group. This is due to the reason that lattice energies decrease more rapidly than their hydration energies on moving down the group.

Question 9.
Lithium carbonate is considerably less stable and decompose readily. Give reason.
Answer:
Li2CO3 is considerably less stable and decomposes readily.
Li2CO3 → Li2O + CO2
This is presumably due to large size difference between Li+ and CO23- which makes the crystal lattice unstable.

Question 10.
What is washing soda?
Answer:
Sodium carbonate, commonly known as washing soda, crystallises as decahydrate which is white in colour.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 11.
What is action of heating on sodium carbonate?
Answer:
Upon heating, it looses the water of crystallisation to form monohydrate. Above 313 K, the monohydrate becomes completely anhydrous and changes to a white powder called soda ash.
Na2CO3 .10H2O → Na2CO3 .H2O + 9H2O
Na2CO3 .H2O → Na2CO3 + H2O

Question 12.
How does Lithium shows similar properties with magnesium in its chemical behavior?
Answer:

  1. Both react with nitrogen to form nitrides.
  2. Both react with oxygen to give monoxides.
  3. Both the element have tendency to form covalent compounds.
  4. Both can form complex compounds.

Question 13.
Why are potassium and caesium, rather than lithium used in photoelectric cells?
Answer:
Potassium and Caesium have much lower ionization enthalpy than that of Lithium. As a result, these metals easily emit electrons on exposure to light. Due to this, K and Cs are used in photoelectric cells.

Question 14.
Write the chemical formula of the following compounds.
(a) Chile salt petre; (b) marble; (c) Brine
Answer:
(a) Chile salt petre – NaNO3
(b) marble – CaCO3
(c) Brine – NaCl

Question 15.
The order ofionic mobility of the ions in aqueous solution is Cs+ > Rb+ > K+ > Na+. Account it.
Answer:
Smaller the size of cation, higher will be the hydration and its effective size will increase and hence mobility in aqueous solution will decrease. Larger size ions have more ionic mobility due to less hydration. Thus the degree of hydration of M+ ions decreases from Li+ to Cs+.

Cosequently the radii of the hydrated ion decreses from Li+ to Cs+. Hence, the ionic conductance of these hydrated ions increases from Li+ to Cs+.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 16.
(a) Lithium Iodide is more covalent than Lithium fluoride, (b) Lattice enthalpy of LiF is maximum among all the alkali metals halides. Explain.
Answer:
(a) According to Fajan’s rule, Li+ ion can polarise I ion more than the F ion due to bigger size of the anion. Thus, LiI has more covalent character than LiF.

(b) Smaller the size (intemuclear distance), more is the value of Lattice enthalpy since intemuclear distance is expected to be least in the LiF.

Question 17.
Write notes on flame test for alkali metals.
Answer:
When the alkali metal salts moistened with concentrated hydrochloric acid are heated on a platinum wire in a flame, they show characteristic coloured flame.
Eg:- Lithium – Crimson red; Potassium – Lilac

Question 18.
Give two uses of alkali metals.
Answer:

  • Lithium metal is used to make useful alloys. For example with lead it is used to make ‘white metal’ bearings for motor engines, with aluminium to make aircraft parts, and with magnesium to make armour plates. It is used in thermonuclear reactions.
  • Lithium is also used to make electrochemical cells.

Question 19.
Write the uses of sodium bicarbonate.
Answer:
The uses of sodium bicarbonate are

  • Primarily used as an ingredient in baking.
  • Sodium hydrogen carbonate is a mild antiseptic for skin infections.
  • It is also used in fire extinguishers.

Question 20.
What are alkaline earth metals?
Answer:
Group 2 in the modem periodic table contains the elements beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium and radium are called alkaline earth metals.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 21.
Write notes on the physical state of alkaline earth metals.
Answer:
Beryllium is rare and radium is the rarest of all comprising only 10% of igneous rocks. Magnesium and calcium are very common in the earth’s crust, with calcium the fifth-most-abundant element, and magnesium the eighth. Magnesium and calcium are found in many rocks and minerals: magnesium in carnallite, magnesite, dolomite and calcium in chalk, limestone, gypsum.

Strontium is found in the minerals celestite and strontianite. Barium is slightly less common, much of it in the mineral barite. Radium, being a decay product of uranium, is found in all uranium-bearing ores.

Question 22.
Write the uses of Beryllium.
Answer:

  1. Because of its low atomic number and very low absorption for X-rays, it is used as radiation windows for X-ray tubes and X-ray detectors.
  2. The sample holder in X-ray emission studies usually made of beryllium
  3. Since beryllium is transparent to energetic particles it is used to build the ‘beam pipe’ in accelerators.
  4. Because of its low density and diamagnetic nature, it is used in various detectors.

Question 23.
What are the uses of Strontium.
Answer:

  1. 90Sr is used in cancer therapy.
  2. 86Sr/ 86Sr ratios are commonly used in marine investigations as well as in teeth, tracking animal migrations or in criminal forensics.
  3. Dating of rocks.
  4. As a radioactive tracer in determining the source of ancient archaeological materials such as timbers and coins.

Question 24.
Write the uses of Barium.
Answer:

  1. Used in metallurgy, its compounds are used in pyrotechnics, petroleum mining and radiology.
  2. Deoxidiser in copper refining.
  3. Its alloys with nickel readily emits electrons hence used in electron tubes and in spark plug electrodes.
  4. As a scavenger to remove last traces of oxygen and other gases in television and other electronic tabes,
  5. An isotope of barium 133Ba, used as a source in the calibration of gamma-ray detectors in nuclear chemistry.

Question 25.
How does beryllium hydride can be prepared?
Answer:
All the elements except beryllium, combine with hydrogen on heating to fdrm their hydrides with general formula MH2. BeH2 can be prepared by the reaction of BeCl2 with LiAlH4.
2BeCl2 + LiAlH4 → 2BeH2 + LiCl + AlCl3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 26.
Why does solubility of sulphates of alkaline earth metal decreases? Explain.
Answer:
The sulphates of the alkaline earth metals are all white solids and stable to heat. BeSO4, and MgSO4 are readily soluble in water; the solubility decreases from CaSO4 to BaSO4. The greater hydration enthalpies of Be2+ and Mg2+ ions overcome the lattice enthalpy factor and therefore their sulphates are soluble in water.

Question 27.
Write notes on plaster of paris.
Answer:
It is a hemihydrate of calcium sulphate. It is obtained when gypsum, CaSO4.2H2O, is heated to 393 K.
2CaSO4 2H2O{s) → 2CaSO4 .H2)O + 3H2O
Above 393 K, no water of crystallisation is left and anhydrous calcium sulphate, CaSO4 is formed. This is known as ‘dead burnt plaster’. It has a remarkable property of setting with water. On mixing with an adequate quantity of water it forms a plastic mass that gets into a hard solid in 5 to 15 minutes.
Uses:
The largest use of Plaster of Paris is in the building industry as well as plasters. It is used for immobilising the affected part of organ where there is a bone fracture or sprain. It is also employed in dentistry, in ornamental work and for making casts of statues and busts.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

III. Short question and answers (3 Marks):

Question 1.
Write notes characteristic flame colouration of alkali metal salts.
Answer:
When the alkali metal salts moistened with concentrated hydrochloric acid are heated on a platinum wire in a flame, they show characteristic coloured flame as shown below.

Element Colour
Lithium Crimson red
Sodium Yellow
Potassium Lilac
Rubidium Reddish violet
Caesium Blue

The heat in the flame excites the valence electron to a higher energy level. When it drops back to its actual energy level, the excess energy is emitted as light, whose wavelength is in the visible region.

Question 2.
Discuss the reaction of alkali metals with liquid ammonia.
Answer:
Alkali metals dissolve in liquid ammonia to give deep blue solutions that are conducting in nature. The conductivity is similar to that of pure metals. This happens because the alkali metal atom readily loses its valence electron in ammonia solution. Both the cation and the electron are ammoniated to give ammoniated cation and ammoniated electron.
M + (x + y)NH3 → [M(NH3)x]+ [e(NH3)y)]

The blue colour of the solution is due to the ammoniated electron which absorbs energy in the visible region of light and thus imparts blue colour to the solution. The solutions are paramagnetic and on standing slowly liberate hydrogen resulting in the formation of an amide.
M+ + e + NH3 → MNH2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)H2
In concentrated solution, the blue colour changes to bronze colour and become diamagnetic.

Question 3.
Write the properties of oxides and peroxides of alkali metals.
Answer:
The oxides and the peroxides are colourless when pure, but the superoxides are yellow or orange in colour. The peroxides are diamagnetic while the superoxides are paramagnetic. Sodium peroxide is widely used as an oxidising agent.

The hydroxides which are obtained by the reaction of the oxides with water are all white crystalline solids. The alkali metal hydroxides are strong bases. They dissolve in water with evolution of heat on account of intense hydration.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 4.
Write the uses of sodium carbonate.
Answer:

  1. Sodium carbonate known as washing soda is used heavily for laundering
  2. It is an important laboratory reagent used in the qualitative analysis and in volumetric analysis.
  3. It is also used in water treatment to convert the hard water to soft water
  4. It is used in the manufacturing of glass, paper, paint etc…

Question 5.
Write the uses of sodium hydroxide.
Answer:

  1. Sodium hydroxide is used as a laboratory reagent
  2. It is also used in the purification of bauxite and petroleum refining
  3. It is used in the textile industries for mercerizing cotton fabrics.
  4. It is used in the manufacture of soap, paper, artificial silk and a number of chemicals.

Question 6.
What are the mineral sources of alkali metals?
Answer:

Element Mineral source
Beryllium Beryl, Be3Al2Si6O18
Magnesium Camallite, KCl. MgCl2.6H2O Dolomite, MgCO3.CaCO3
Calcium Fluorapatite
Strontium Celestite, SrSO4
Barium Barytes, BaSO4

Question 7.
Comapare the ionization energy of alkali metals with alkaline earth metals.
Answer:
Members of group 2 have higher ionization enthalpy values than group 1 because of their smaller size, with electrons being more attracted towards the nucleus of the atoms. Correspondingly they are less electropositive than alkali metals.

Although IE1 values of alkaline earth metals are higher than that of alkali metals, the IE2 values of alkaline earth metals are much smaller than those of alkali metals. This occurs because in alkali metals the second electron is to be removed from a cation, which has already acquired a noble gas configuration. In the case of alkaline earth metals, the second electron is to be removed from a monovalent cation, which still has one electron in the outermost shell. Thus, the second electron can be removed more easily in the case of group 2 elements than in group 1 elements.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 8.
Write the uses of magnesium.
Answer:

  1. Removal of sulphur from iron and steel
  2. Refining of titanium in the ‘Kroll” process.
  3. Used as photoengrave plates in printing industry.
  4. Magnesium alloys are used in aeroplane and missile construction.
  5. Mg ribbon is used in synthesis of Grignard reagent in organic synthesis.
  6. It alloys with aluminium to improve its mechanical, fabrication and welding property.
  7. As a desiccant.
  8. As sacrificial anode in controlling galvanic corrosion.

Question 9.
Write the uses of calcium.
Answer:

  1. As a reducing agent in the metallurgy of uranium, zirconium and thorium.
  2. As a deoxidiser, desulphuriser or decarboniser for various ferrous and non-ferrous alloys.
  3. In making cement and mortar to be used in construction.
  4. As a getter in vacuum tubes.
  5. In dehydrating oils
  6. In fertilisers, concrete and plaster of paris.

Question 10.
Give uses of magnesium.
Answer:

  1. Removal of sulphur from iron and steel
  2. Refining of titanium in the “Kroll” process.
  3. Used as photoengrave plates in printing industry.
  4. Magnesium alloys are used in aeroplane and missile construction.
  5. Mg ribbon is used in synthesis of Grignard reagent in organic synthesis.
  6. It alloys with aluminium to improve its mechanical, fabrication and welding property.
  7. As a desiccant.
  8. As sacrificial anode in controlling galvanic corrosion.

Question 11.
Give the structure of BeCl2 in the solid phase and Vapor phase.
Answer:
Beryllium chloride has a chain structure in the solid-state as shown below, (structure-a). In the vapour phase, BeCl2 tends to form a chloro-bridged dimer (structure-c) which dissociates into the linear monomer at high temperatures of the order of 1200 K. (structure-b).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

IV. Long Answer Questions(5 Marks):

Question 1.
Compare the properties of Lithium with other elements of the group.
Answer:
The distinctive behaviour of Li+ ion is due to its exceptionally small size, high polarising power, high hydration energy and non-availability of d-orbitals.

Lithium Other elements of the Group
Hard, high melting and boiling point Soft, Lower melting and boiling point
Least reactive (For example it reacts with oxygen to form normal oxide, forms peroxides with great difficulty and its higher oxides are unstable) More reactive
Reacts with nitrogen to give Li3N No reaction
Reacts with bromine slowly React violently
Reacts directly with carbon to form ionic carbides. For example

2Li + 2C →  Li2C2

Do not react with carbon directly, but can react with carbon compounds.

Na + C2H2 → Na2C2

Compounds are sparingly soluble in water highly soluble in water.
Lithium nitrate decomposes to give an oxide decompose to give nitrites

Question 2.
Discuss the diagonal relationship between Lithium and Magnesium.
Answer:
Similarity between the first member of group 1 (Li) and the diagonally placed second clement of group 2 (Mg) is called diagonal relationship. It is due to similar size (rLi+ = 0.766 Å and Mg2+ = 0.72 Å) and comparable electronegativity values (Li = 1.0; Mg = 1.2). Similarities between Lithium and Magnesium are

  1. Both lithium and magnesium are harder than other elements in the respective groups
  2. Lithium and magnesium react slowly with water. Their oxides and hydroxides are much less soluble and their hydroxides decompose on heating.
  3. Both form a nitride, Li3N and Mg3N2, by direct combination with nitrogen
  4. They do not give any superoxides and form only oxides, Li2O and MgO
  5. The carbonates of lithium and magnesium decompose upon heating to form their respective oxides and CO2.
  6. Lithium and magnesium do not form bicarbonates.
  7. Both LiCl and MgCl2 are soluble in ethanol and are deliquescent. They crystallise from aqueous solution as hydrates, LiCl.2H2O and MgCl28H2O

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 3.
Explain the reaction of alkali metals with (i) Oxygen (ii) hydrogen (iii) halogens.
Answer:
(i) Reaction with Oxygen:
All the alkali metals on exposure to air or oxygen bum vigorously, forming oxides on their surface. Lithium forms only monoxide, sodium forms the monoxide and peroxide and the other elements form monoxide, peroxide, and superoxides. These oxides are basic in nature.
4Li + O2 → 2Li2O (simple oxide)
2Na + O2 → Na2O2 (peroxide)
M + O2 → MO2
(M = K, Rb, Cs; MO2 – superoxide)

(ii) Reaction with hydrogen:
All alkali metals react with hydrogen at about 673 K (lithium at 1073 K) to form the corresponding ionic hydrides. Reactivity of alkali metals with hydrogen decreases from Li to Cs.
2M + H2 → 2M+H
(M = Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs)
The ionic character of the hydrides increases from Li to Cs and their stability decreases. The hydrides behave as strong reducing agents and their reducing nature increases down the group.

(iii) Reaction with halogen:
Alkali metals combine readily with halogens to form ionic halides MX. Reactivity of alkali metals with halogens increases down the group because of corresponding decrease in ionisation enthalpy.
2 M + X2 → 2 MX
(M = Li, Na,K, Rb, Cs) (X = F, Cl, Br, I)
All metal halides are ionic crystals. However Lithium iodide shows covalent character, as it is the smallest cation that exerts high, polarising power on the iodide anion. Additionally, the iodide ion being the largest can be polarised to a greater extent by Li+ ion.

Question 4.
Write the uses of alkali metals.
Answer:

  1. Lithium metal is used to make useful alloys. For example with lead it is used to make ‘white metal’ bearings for motor engines, with aluminium to make aircraft parts, and with magnesium to make armour plates. It is used in thermonuclear reactions.
  2. Lithium is also used to make electrochemical cells.
  3. Lithium carbonate is used in medicines
  4. Sodium is used to make Na/Pb alloy needed to make Pb(Et)4 and Pb(Me)4. These organolead compounds were earlier used as anti-knock additives to petrol, but nowadays lead-free petrol in use.
  5. Liquid sodium metal is used as a coolant in fast breeder nuclear reactors. Potassium has a vital role in biological systems.
  6. Potassium chloride is used as a fertilizer. Potassium hydroxide is used in the manufacture of soft soap. It is also used as an excellent absorbent of carbon dioxide.
  7. Caesium is used in devising photoelectric cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 5.
How is washing soda prepared? Discuss its properties.
Answer:
Sodium carbonate is one of the important inorganic compounds used in industries. It is prepared by Solvay process. In this process, ammonia is converted into ammonium carbonate which then converted to ammonium bicarbonate by passing excess carbon dioxide in a sodium chloride solution saturated with ammonia.

The ammonium bicarbonate thus formed reacts with the sodium chloride to give sodium bicarbonate and ammonium chloride. As sodium bicarbonate has poor solubility, it gets precipitated. The sodium bicarbonate is isolated and is heated to give sodium carbonate. The equations involved in this process are,
2NH3 + H2O + CO2 → (NH4)2 CO3
(NH4)2 CO3 + H2O + CO2 → 2NH4HCO3
2NH4HCO3 + NaCl → NH4Cl + NaHCO3
2NaHCO → Na2CO3 + CO2 + H2O

The ammonia used in this process can be recovered by treating the resultant ammonium chloride solution with calcium hydroxide. Calcium chloride is formed as a by-product.

Properties:
Sodium carbonate, commonly known as washing soda, crystallises as decahydrate which is white in colour. It is soluble in water and forms an alkaline solution. Upon heating, it looses the water of crystallisation to form monohydrate. Above 373 K, the monohydrate becomes completely anhydrous and changes to a white powder called soda ash.
Na2CO3 .10H2O → Na2CO3.H2O + 9H2O
Na2CO3.H2O → Na2CO3 + H2O

Question 6.
Compare the properties of Beryllium with other elements of the group.
Answer:

Beryllium Other elements of the family
1. Forms covalent compounds Form ionic compounds
2. High melting and boiling point Low melting and boiling point
3. Does not react with water even at elevated temperature React with water
4. Does not combine directly with hydrogen Combine directly with hydrogen
5. Does not combine directly with halogens. Halides are covalent Combine directly with halogens. Halides are electrovalent.
6. Hydroxide and oxides of beryllium are amphoteric in nature Basic in nature.
7. It is not readily attacked by acids because of the presence of an oxide film Readily attacked by acids
8. Beryllium carbide evolves methane with water. evolve acetylene with water.
9. Salts of Be are extensively hydrolysed Hydrolysed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 7.
Explain the diagonal relationship of Beryllium with Aluminium.
Answer:
Beryllium (the first member of group 2) shows a diagonal relationship with aluminium. In this case, the size of these ions (rBe2+ = 0.45 Å and rAl3+ = 0.54 Å) is not as close. However, their charge per unit area is closer. (Be2+ = 2.36 and Al3+ = 2.50) They also have same electronegativity values (Be = 1.5; Al = 1.5).
Properties:

  1. Beryllium chloride forms a dimeric structure like aluminium chloride with chloride bridges. Beryllium chloride also forms polymeric chain structure in addition to dimer. Both are soluble in organic solvents and are strong Lewis acids.
  2. Beryllium hydroxide dissolves in excess of alkali and gives beryllate ion and [Be(OH)4]2- and hydrogen as aluminium hydroxide which gives aluminate ion. [Al( OH4)
  3. Beryllium and aluminum ions have strong tendency to form complexes, BeF42-, AlF63-.
  4. Both beryllium and aluminium hydroxides are amphoteric in nature.
  5. Carbides of beryllium (Be2C) like aluminum carbide (Al4C3) give methane on hydrolysis
  6. Both beryllium and aluminium are rendered passive by nitric acid.

Question 8.
Explain the properties and uses of Gypsum.
Answer:
Properties of Gypsum:

  1. Gypsum is a soft mineral, which is moderately soluble in water. The solubility of this mineral in water is affected by temperature. Unlike other salts, gypsum becomes less soluble in water as the temperature increases. This is known as retrograde solubility, which is a distinguishing characteristic of gypsum.
  2. Gypsum is usually white, colorless, or gray in color. But sometimes, it can also be found in the shades of pink, yellow, brown, and light green, mainly due to the presence of impurities.
  3. Gypsum crystals are sometimes found to occur in a form that resembles the petals of a flower. This type of formation is referred to as ‘desert rose’, as they mostly occur in arid areas or desert terrains.
  4. Gypsum is known to have low thermal conductivity, which is the reason why it is used in making drywalls or wallboards. Gypsum is also known as a natural insulator.
  5. Alabaster is a variety of gypsum, that is highly valued as an ornamental stone. It has been used by the sculptors for centuries. Alabaster is granular and opaque.
  6. Gypsum has hardness between 1.5 to 2 on Moh’s Hardness Scale. Its specific gravity is 2.3 to 2.4.

Uses of Gypsum:

  1. The alabaster variety of gypsum was used in ancient Egypt and Mesopotamia by the sculptors. The ancient Egyptians knew how to turn gypsum into plaster of Paris about 5,000 years ago. Today, gypsum has found a wide range of uses and applications in human society, some of which are enlisted below.
  2. Gypsum is used in making drywalls or plaster boards. Plaster boards are used as the finish for walls and ceilings, and for partitions.
  3. Another important use of gypsum is the production of plaster of Paris. Gypsum is heated to about 300 degree Fahrenheit to produce plaster of Paris, which is also known as gypsum plaster. It is mainly used as a sculpting material.
  4. Gypsum is used in making surgical and orthopedic casts, such as surgical splints and casting moulds.
  5. Gypsum plays an important role in agriculture as a soil additive, conditioner, and fertilizer, It helps loosen up compact or clay soil, and provides calcium and sulphur, which are essential for the healthy growth of a plant. It can also be used for removing sodium from soils having excess salinity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 9.
Mention the biological importance of sodium and potassium.
Answer:

  1. Monovalent sodium and potassium ions are found in large proportions in biological fluids. These ions perform important biological functions such as maintenance of ion balance | and nerve impulse conduction.
  2. A typical 70 kg man contains about 90 g of sodium and 170 g of potassium compared with only 5 g of iron and 0.06 g of copper.
  3. Sodium ions are found primarily on the outside of cells, being located in blood plasma and in the interstitial fluid which surrounds the cells. These ions participate in the transmission of nerve signals, in regulating the flow of water across cell membranes and in the transport of sugars and amino acids into cells.
  4. Sodium and potassium, although so similar chemically, differ quantitatively in their ability to penetrate cell membranes, in their transport mechanisms and in their efficiency to activate enzymes.
  5. Thus, potassium ions are the most abundant cations within cell fluids, where they activate many enzymes, participate in the oxidation of glucose to produce ATP and, with sodium, are responsible for the transmission of nerve signals.
    Sodium-potassium pump play an important role in transmitting nerve signals.